Oracle® Banking Branch

Teller User Guide

14.7.0.0.0
F75188-02
November 2022
Oracle Banking Branch Teller User Guide, 14.7.0.0.0

F75188-02

Copyright © 2021, 2022, Oracle and/or its affiliates.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software, software documentation, data (as defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulation), or related
documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S.
Government, then the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs (including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs embedded, installed, or activated on delivered hardware, and modifications of such programs)
and Oracle computer documentation or other Oracle data delivered to or accessed by U.S. Government end
users are "commercial computer software," "commercial computer software documentation," or "limited rights
data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental
regulations. As such, the use, reproduction, duplication, release, display, disclosure, modification, preparation
of derivative works, and/or adaptation of i) Oracle programs (including any operating system, integrated
software, any programs embedded, installed, or activated on delivered hardware, and modifications of such
programs), ii) Oracle computer documentation and/or iii) other Oracle data, is subject to the rights and
limitations specified in the license contained in the applicable contract. The terms governing the U.S.
Government's use of Oracle cloud services are defined by the applicable contract for such services. No other
rights are granted to the U.S. Government.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.
It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that
may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you
shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its
safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle®, Java, MySQL and NetSuite are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names
may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Intel and Intel Inside are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are
used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Epyc,
and the AMD logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered
trademark of The Open Group.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise
set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be
responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents

1 Overview of Oracle Banking Branch

1.1 Prerequisites 1-2
1.2 About Main Menu 1-4
1.3 Application Layout 1-6
1.3.1 Customer Search 1-6
1.3.2 About Transaction Area 1-7
1.4 Salient Features 1-9
1.4.1 About Machine Learning 1-14
1.4.2 About Oracle Digital Assistant 1-16
1.4.3 About Virtual Identifier 1-18
1.4.4 About Amount-Based Signature Verification 1-19
1.5 Keyboard Navigation for Transaction Screens 1-22
1.6 About Business Process Codes 1-23

2 Branch Operations
2.1 TC Denomination Enquiry 2-2
2.2 Open Branch Batch 2-3
2.3 Open Vault Batch 2-4
2.4 Open Teller Batch 2-6
2.5 Current Open Tills 2-8
2.6 Branch Breach Limits 2-10
2.7 Till Vault Position 2-11
2.8 Branch Total Position 2-12
2.9 Close Teller Batch 2-14
2.9.1 Add TC Denomination Details 2-16
2.10 Close Vault Batch 2-18
2.11 Close Branch Batch 2-20
2.12 Book Shortage 2-21
2.12.1 Add Denomination Details 2-23
2.13 Book Overage 2-24
2.14 Teller Session 2-26
2.14.1 Start Teller Session 2-26

iii
 2.14.2 Stop Teller Session 2-28

3 Till-Vault Operations
3.1 Buy TC from Agent 3-2
3.1.1 Add TC Denominations to Buy TC 3-3
3.2 Buy TC from Head Office 3-4
3.3 Buy TC from Vault 3-5
3.4 Return TC to Vault 3-8
3.4.1 Add TC Denominations to Return TC 3-9
3.5 Return TC to HO 3-10
3.6 Buy Cash from Currency Chest 3-11
3.7 Sell Cash to Currency Chest 3-13
3.8 Buy Cash from Vault 3-14
3.9 Sell Cash to Vault 3-15
3.10 Buy Cash from Till 3-17
3.11 Sell Cash to Till 3-18
3.12 Denomination Exchange 3-20
3.13 Inter Branch Transactions 3-21
3.13.1 Inter Branch Transaction Request 3-22
3.13.2 Inter Branch Transaction Input 3-24
3.13.3 Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation 3-26

4 Customer Transactions
4.1 Cash Deposit 4-2
4.1.1 Add Charge Details 4-6
4.2 Cash Withdrawal 4-7
4.3 Cheque Withdrawal 4-11
4.4 FX Sale Against Account 4-14
4.5 FX Sale Against Walk-in 4-18
4.6 FX Purchase Against Account 4-21
4.7 FX Purchase Against Walk-in 4-25
4.8 Close Out Withdrawal 4-28
4.9 Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode 4-35
4.10 Safe Deposit Rental By Cash 4-38
4.11 Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash 4-41
4.12 F23C Tax Payment by Cash 4-43
4.13 F24C Tax Payment By Cash 4-47
4.13.1 Add Standard Details 4-50
4.13.1.1 Add Tax Details 4-51

iv
 4.13.1.2 Add INPS Details 4-52
4.13.1.3 Add Region Details 4-53
4.13.1.4 Add IMU and Other Local Taxes 4-54
4.13.1.5 Add Insurance Details 4-55
4.13.1.6 Add Other Bodies 4-56
4.13.1.7 Add Excise Details 4-57
4.13.2 Add Simplified Details 4-58
4.13.3 Add Element Identification Details 4-60
4.13.4 Add Predefined Details 4-62
4.14 F23 Tax Payment by Account 4-64
4.15 F24 Tax Payment By Account 4-69
4.15.1 Add Standard Details 4-72
4.15.2 Add Simplified Details 4-75
4.15.3 Add Element Identification Details 4-77
4.15.4 Add Predefined Details 4-78

5 Miscellaneous Transactions
5.1 Miscellaneous Customer Debit 5-1
5.2 Miscellaneous Customer Credit 5-4
5.3 Miscellaneous GL Debit 5-8
5.4 Miscellaneous GL Credit 5-10
5.5 Miscellaneous GL Transfer 5-13
5.6 Miscellaneous Transfer 5-16

6 Transfers
6.1 Account to Account Transfer 6-1
6.2 In-House Cheque Deposit 6-5
6.3 Domestic Transfer Against Account 6-8
6.3.1 Add Payment Details for Domestic Transfer 6-10
6.4 Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in 6-12
6.5 International Transfer Against Account 6-14
6.5.1 Add Payment Details for International Transfer 6-18
6.6 International Transfer Against Walk-in 6-21

7 Clearing Transactions
7.1 Cheque Deposit 7-1
7.1.1 Cheque Deposit Against Account 7-1
7.1.2 Cheque Deposit Against GL 7-5
7.2 Cheque Return 7-8

v
 7.3 Inward Clearing Data Entry 7-10
7.4 Outward Clearing Data Entry 7-13

8 Remittances
8.1 Banker's Cheque 8-1
8.1.1 BC Issue Against Account 8-2
8.1.2 BC Issue Against Walk-in 8-6
8.1.3 BC Issue Against GL 8-10
8.1.4 BC Print and Reprint 8-14
8.1.5 BC Operations 8-15
8.1.5.1 BC Inquiry 8-16
8.1.5.2 BC Revalidation 8-19
8.1.5.3 BC Duplicate Issue 8-21
8.1.5.4 BC Payment Reversal 8-23
8.1.5.5 BC Payment by Account 8-25
8.1.5.6 BC Payment by Cash 8-27
8.1.5.7 BC Payment by GL 8-30
8.1.5.8 BC Refund by Account 8-32
8.1.5.9 BC Refund by Cash 8-35
8.1.5.10 BC Refund by GL 8-37
8.1.5.11 Cancel BC by Account 8-39
8.1.5.12 Cancel BC by Cash 8-42
8.1.5.13 Cancel BC by GL 8-44
8.1.6 Multi BC Issuance 8-46
8.1.6.1 Multi BC Issuance Against Account 8-47
8.1.6.2 Multi BC Issuance Against Cash 8-50
8.2 Demand Drafts 8-53
8.2.1 DD Issue Against Account 8-54
8.2.2 DD Issue Against Walk-in 8-58
8.2.3 DD Issue Against GL 8-61
8.2.4 DD Print and Reprint 8-65
8.2.5 DD Operations 8-66
8.2.5.1 DD Inquiry 8-67
8.2.5.2 DD Revalidation 8-70
8.2.5.3 DD Duplicate Issue 8-72
8.2.5.4 DD Payment Reversal 8-74
8.2.5.5 DD Payment by Account 8-76
8.2.5.6 DD Payment by Cash 8-79
8.2.5.7 DD Payment by GL 8-81
8.2.5.8 DD Refund by Account 8-84

vi
 8.2.5.9 DD Refund by Cash 8-86
8.2.5.10 DD Refund by GL 8-89
8.2.5.11 Cancel DD by Account 8-91
8.2.5.12 Cancel DD by Cash 8-94
8.2.5.13 Cancel DD by GL 8-96
8.3 Cash Remittance 8-98
8.3.1 Cash Remittance Issue 8-99
8.3.1.1 Cash Remittance Issue Against Account 8-99
8.3.1.2 Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash 8-103
8.3.1.3 Cash Remittance Issue Against GL 8-106
8.3.2 Cash Remittance Operations 8-109
8.3.2.1 Cash Remittance Inquiry 8-110
8.3.2.2 Cash Remittance Payment by Account 8-113
8.3.2.3 Cash Remittance Payment by Cash 8-116
8.3.2.4 Cash Remittance Payment by GL 8-118
8.3.2.5 Cash Remittance Refund by Account 8-122
8.3.2.6 Cash Remittance Refund by Cash 8-124
8.3.2.7 Cash Remittance Refund by GL 8-127
8.3.2.8 Cancel Cash Remittance by Account 8-130
8.3.2.9 Cancel Cash Remittance by Cash 8-133
8.3.2.10 Cancel Cash Remittance by GL 8-136
8.3.3 Inward Remittance Registration 8-139
8.4 Travellers Cheque 8-142
8.4.1 TC Sale by Other Modes 8-142
8.4.1.1 Add TC Denominations to Sell TC 8-146
8.4.2 TC Sale Against Walk-in 8-147
8.4.3 TC Purchase Against Account 8-150
8.4.3.1 Add TC Denominations to Purchase TC 8-153
8.4.4 TC Purchase Against Walk-in 8-155

9 Term Deposit Transactions

9.1 TD Account Opening 9-1
9.1.1 Add Funding Details 9-4
9.1.2 Add Joint Holders Details 9-6
9.1.3 Add Payout Details 9-7
9.1.4 Add Interest Details 9-8
9.1.5 Add Rollover Details 9-10
9.2 TD Redemption Against Cash 9-11
9.3 TD Redemption Against Account 9-14
9.4 TD Top-Up Against Account 9-17

vii
 9.5 TD Top-Up Against Cash 9-19

10 Credit Card Transactions

10.1 Credit Card Advance by Cash 10-1
10.2 Credit Card Advance by Transfer 10-4
10.3 Credit Card Payment by Cash 10-7
10.4 Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes 10-10
10.4.1 Credit Card Payment by Account 10-10
10.4.2 Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque 10-13
10.5 Stop Card Request 10-16

11 Loan Transactions
11.1 Loan Disbursement by Cash 11-1
11.2 Loan Repayment by Cash 11-3

12 Islamic Transactions
12.1 Murabaha Payment by Cash 12-1
12.2 Islamic Down Payment by Cash 12-4
12.3 Islamic TD Account Opening 12-6
12.3.1 Add Funding Details for Islamic TD 12-9
12.3.2 Add Joint Holders for Islamic TD 12-11
12.3.3 Add Payout Details for Islamic TD 12-12
12.3.4 Add Rollover Details for Islamic TD 12-14

13 Bill Payments
13.1 Bill Payment by Cash 13-1
13.2 Bill Payments by Other Modes 13-3
13.2.1 Bill Payment by Account 13-3
13.2.2 Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque 13-6

14 Session Teller Transactions

14.1 Cash Deposit 14-1
14.2 Cash Withdrawal 14-2
14.3 FX Sale Against Walk-in 14-4
14.4 FX Purchase Against Walk-in 14-5
14.5 Loan Repayment by Cash 14-7

viii
15 Journal Log
15.1 About Electronic and Servicing Journals 15-1
15.2 Electronic Journal 15-3
15.3 Servicing Journal 15-7
15.4 Reassign Transactions 15-11

16 Prediction
16.1 Teller Service Counters Prediction 16-1

17 Cache
17.1 Clear Cache 17-1

18 Customer Service
18.1 Cheque Status Inquiry 18-2
18.2 Stop Cheque Request 18-3
18.3 Cheque Book Request 18-4
18.4 Passbook Issue 18-6
18.5 Passbook Update 18-8
18.6 Passbook Status Change 18-10
18.7 Passbook Reprint 18-11
18.8 Account Balance Inquiry 18-13
18.9 Account Statement Request 18-16
18.10 Customer Address Update 18-18
18.11 Account Address Update 18-19
18.12 Customer Contact Update 18-21
18.13 Cheque Book Status Change 18-22

19 Branch Dashboard

20 Branch Maintenance
20.1 Common Actions for Branch Maintenance 20-3
20.2 Maintain Teller Branch Parameters 20-3
20.3 Maintain Branch Role Limits 20-5
20.4 Maintain Branch User Preferences 20-7
20.5 Maintain Denominations 20-9

ix
 20.6 Maintain Function Code Definitions 20-11
20.7 Maintain Function Code Preferences 20-15
20.8 Maintain Default Authorizer 20-21
20.9 Maintain Accounting and Settlements 20-22
20.10 Maintain Instrument Numbers 20-25
20.11 Maintain Inter Branch Transit Account 20-26
20.12 Maintain External System 20-28
20.13 Maintain Channel Limits 20-30
20.14 Maintain Account Group 20-32
20.15 Maintain Branch Group 20-33
20.16 Maintain Customer Group 20-34
20.17 Maintain Charge Definitions 20-36
20.18 Create Charge Pricing Maintenance 20-38
20.19 View Charge Pricing Maintenance 20-40
20.20 Maintain Charge Condition Group 20-41
20.20.1 Additional Information on Parameters 20-42
20.21 Maintain Charge Decisions 20-43
20.22 Charge Decision Enquiry 20-45
20.23 Maintain Reject Codes 20-47
20.24 Maintain Clearing Network Codes 20-48
20.25 Maintain Denomination Variations 20-50
20.26 Maintain External Bank Codes 20-51
20.27 Maintain Issuer Codes 20-52
20.28 Maintain Utility Providers 20-53
20.29 Maintain Account Entitlement Restriction 20-55

A Error Codes and Messages

B List of Function Codes

C Advices

D Order of Replacing Parameters with Wild Card Entries

E Static Maintenance Parameters

x
Index

xi
 Audience

Preface
This guide helps you to familiarize yourself with the Oracle Banking Branch
application. It gives an overview of the module and explains all the maintenances
required for its smooth functioning. It also takes you through the different types of
transactions that can be handled through this module.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Audience
• Related Resources
• Conventions
• Symbols, Definitions, and Shortcut Keys
• List of Topics
• Screenshot Disclaimer

Audience
This guide is intended for the Branch Tellers, Vault Operators, and Branch Supervisors
to provide quick and efficient service to customers and prospects of your bank.

Related Resources
The related documents are as follows:
• Getting Started User Guide
• Current Account and Savings Account User Guide
• Servicing Configurations User Guide

Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:

Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated
with an action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables for
which you supply particular values.
monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs, code
in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.

Symbols, Definitions, and Shortcut Keys

The following are the symbols you are likely to find in this guide:

12
 Symbols, Definitions, and Shortcut Keys

Table Symbols

Symbol Function
Add icon

Add a row

Edit icon

Delete icon

Calendar icon

Close icon

Delete a row

Grid view

Increase/Decrease value

List view

Maximize

Minimize

Navigate to the first page

Navigate to the last page

Navigate to the next page

Navigate to the previous page

Open a list

Perform search

Refresh

Most of the screens contain icons to perform all or a few of the basic actions. The actions
which are called here are generic, and it varies based on the usage and the applicability. The
table below gives a snapshot of them:

13
 Symbols, Definitions, and Shortcut Keys

Table Common Icons and its Definitions

Icon Description
Submit Click Submit to complete the transaction after you specify all the
input parameters for a particular transaction.
Cancel Click Cancel to cancel the transaction input midway without
saving any data.
Clear Click Clear to clear the transaction input data. The system
displays a pop-up screen with confirmation to clear data. You can

click OK to confirm or click icon to retain the data.

Query On completion of input of necessary parameters, click Query to
fetch and display the details.
Save Click Save to save the details specified on the screen.
Exit Click Exit to close the screen and go to the Homepage.
OK Click OK to confirm the details on the pop-up screen.

The following shortcut keys can be used only for the screens which have the icons
specified in the Function column:

Table Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Key Function

Tab Used to shift focus from one input field to the other.

Note:
The last field of the last accordion
will shift focus to Submit/Cancel
button.

Alt + S Used to select Submit button.

Alt + C Used to select Clear button.
Alt + X Used to select Cancel button.
Alt + A Used to select Charge Details data segment.
Alt + Y Used to select Denominations data segment.

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in this guide:

Table Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronym/ Description
Abbreviation
ARC Account, Rate, and Charge
BC Bankers Cheque

14
 List of Topics

Table (Cont.) Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronym/ Description
Abbreviation
CASA Current Account and Saving Account
CCY Currency
CIF Customer Information File
DD Demand Draft
EJ Electronic Journal
FCY Foreign Currency
FX Foreign Exchange
GL General Ledger
HO Head Office
LCY Local Currency
LOV List of Values
MIS Management Information System
ML Machine Learning
RD Recurring Deposit
SD Safe Deposits
System Unless specified, it shall always refer to Oracle Banking
Branch.
TC Travellers Cheque
TD Term Deposit
UDF User Defined Fields
VAT Value Added Tax

List of Topics
This guide is organized into the following topics:

Table List of Topics

Topic Description
Overview of Oracle This topic provides a snapshot of the features of the application.
Banking Branch
Branch Operations This topic describes the internal activities done at the branch where the
Customer is not involved.
Till-Vault Operations This topic describes the various screens used to perform the Till Vault
operations.
Customer Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to perform financial
transactions for Customer accounts.
Miscellaneous This topic describes the various screens used to perform General
Transactions Ledger (GL) transactions.

15
 Screenshot Disclaimer

Table (Cont.) List of Topics

Topic Description
Transfers This topic describes the various screens used to perform inter-bank
transfer, intra-bank transfer, and cross-border transactions.
Clearing Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to capture the Inward
Clearing Data Entry, Outward Clearing Data Entry, Cheque Return, and
Cheque Deposit transactions.
Remittances This topic describes the various screens used to perform various types
of remittances.
Term Deposit Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to open, redeem, and
top-up a term deposit.
Credit Card Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to perform credit card
advance and payment transactions.
Loan Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to perform loan
disbursement and loan repayment transactions.
Islamic Transactions This topic describes the various screens used to perform various
Islamic transactions.
Bill Payments This topic describes the various screens used to perform various bill
payment transactions.
Session Teller This topic describes the various screens used to perform financial
Transactions transactions for Customer accounts in the Teller Session.
Journal Log This topic describes the various screens used to view the status of
transactions performed, resubmit or reject an incomplete transaction,
and reverse a completed transaction.
Prediction This topic describes the screen that is used to predict the number of
service counters required for a specific period.
Cache This topic describes the Clear Cache screen, which is used to get the
maintenance reflected while performing the transactions.
Customer Service This topic describes the various screens used to maintain customer
accounts and ancillary services and to enquire about customer account
balance.
Branch Dashboard This topic describes the dashboard used to view the cash position,
transaction status, alerts, to access the frequently used transaction
screens, and to view the alerts and notifications.
Branch Maintenance This topic describes the various screens used to perform branch
maintenance.

Screenshot Disclaimer
Personal information used in the interface or documents are dummy and does not
exist in the real world. It is only for reference purposes.

16
1
Overview of Oracle Banking Branch
Oracle Banking Branch is a retail banking application that gives a 360-degree view of the
customer and financial transactions to the Teller of the bank.
Oracle Banking Branch you as the Teller, to provide better customer-focused services as well
as cross-sell and up-sell the other products and services of the bank. A typical transaction
under a branch is classified into the following stages:

Table 1-1 Transaction Stages

Stage Description
Teller Request In this stage, the Teller captures the transaction request and
transaction enrichment.
Authorization In this stage, the Supervisor authorizes the request.
Teller Resubmission The Resubmission stage is applicable only for certain transactions.

This topic contains the following subtopics:

• Prerequisites
Before you begin performing transactions, you need to log in to the Oracle Banking
Branch Homepage.
• About Main Menu
The Teller Main Menu is a Mega Menu that makes all the menu items visible at once. It is
a large panel divided into groups of menu items, which simplifies the navigation.
• Application Layout
The general layout of the Oracle Banking Branch application consists of the main menu,
customer search, transaction area including customer summary, and additional widgets
available to display the Current Till Position and frequently used transaction
icons.
• Salient Features
Learn about the salient features of the Oracle Banking Branch application.
• Keyboard Navigation for Transaction Screens
The keyboard navigation can be used as an alternative method to navigate through
interactive elements on a screen – fields, buttons, data segments, tables, etc. It can be
used to navigate through the application, input the necessary values, and perform the
transactions.
• About Business Process Codes
Business Process Code defines the various stages for servicing transactions.

1-1
 Chapter 1
Prerequisites

1.1 Prerequisites
Before you begin performing transactions, you need to log in to the Oracle Banking
Branch Homepage.
For information on how to log in, refer to the Getting Started User Guide. You can also
launch the Oracle Banking Branch application through the FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking.
To launch Oracle Banking Branch through FLEXCUBE Universal Banking:
1. Log in to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking Homepage. For information on how to
log in, refer to the Procedures User Guide in the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking
Documentation Library.
The FLEXCUBE Universal Banking Homepage is displayed.
2. Specify CSDNGUIM in the top right corner text box, and click Next.
The Next Gen UI Products Maintenance screen is displayed.

Note:
Make sure that the user has roles for the screen.

Figure 1-1 Next Gen UI Products Maintenance

3. On the Next Gen UI Products Maintenance screen, update the Next Generation
UI Product URL.

Note:
For example, NEW TELLER can be used as the Function id, with the
description as Teller Next Generation Product. It is released as
Static Data and ensures the user roles are maintained for the same in
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking.

1-2
 Chapter 1
Prerequisites

4. Once the roles are maintained in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking, click Next Generation
UI on the toolbar.
The Next Gen UI Dashboard is displayed with the list of products.

Figure 1-2 Next Gen UI Dashboard

5. Click NEW TELLER.

The Next Generation – Homepage is displayed.

Note:
Make sure that the same user id is maintained in FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking. In addition, make sure that the Next Generation UI is maintained and
has the necessary roles. For example, if the user ID is Jones, the same needs
to be present in the SMS systems of FLEXCUBE Universal Banking and Next
Generation UI.

6. Do the Next Generation UI changes. The SECURITY_CONFIG table in

PLATO_SECURITY schema must have the following entries:

Table 1-2 Next Generation UI Changes

Configuration Value
INTEGRATION_ENABLED {id} true
INTEGRATION_CALLBACK_URL https://10.00.00.00:1010/FCJNeoWeb/
{id} ValidationService/FCNonceValidation/
validate

Note:
The IP and port number of the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking server must be
updated.

The Oracle Banking Branch Homepage is displayed.

1-3
 Chapter 1
About Main Menu

Figure 1-3 Homepage

1.2 About Main Menu

The Teller Main Menu is a Mega Menu that makes all the menu items visible at once. It
is a large panel divided into groups of menu items, which simplifies the navigation.
The menu items are grouped based on the type of operation performed. In addition,
the Menu Item Search can be used to search and select a specific screen from any of
the main menu items. For more information on menus, refer to Figure 1-4 and
Table 1-3.

Figure 1-4 Mega Menu Teller

1-4
 Chapter 1
About Main Menu

Table 1-3 Menu Items – Description

Menu Description
Branch Operations Branch Manager, Vault Teller, or Teller can use Branch Operations to
cover the internal activities done at the branch where the Customer is
not involved. This facilitates branch, vault, Till opening, or closing for
the day and monitoring the transactions done during the day, and Cash
Balancing.
Till-Vault Operations Vault Teller or Teller can use Till-Vault Operations to monitor the cash
and currency boxes for the day and to perform cash transfers from or to
the Vault or Till as and when required.
Customer Transactions Teller can use Customer Transactions to perform financial
transactions for Customer accounts, which includes, Cash Deposits,
Cash Withdrawals, Cheque Withdrawals, Forex Transactions, and
Account Closure.
Miscellaneous Teller can use Miscellaneous Transactions to perform General
Transactions Ledger transactions such as miscellaneous debit and credit
transactions against a Customer’s CASA account and GL account.
Transfers Teller can use Transfers to perform inter-bank transfers, intra-bank
transfers, and cross-border transactions.
Clearing Teller can use Clearing to capture the Inward Clearing Data Entry,
Outward Clearing Data Entry, Cheque Return, and Cheque Deposit
transactions.
Remittances Teller can use Remittances to issue remittances such as demand
drafts and banker's cheques, perform payment or cancellation of the
issued remittances, and perform further operations on the issued
remittances.
Term Deposits Teller can use Term Deposits to initiate Term Deposit account opening
and perform a redemption, top-up on the existing term deposit
accounts.
Credit Card Transactions Tellers can use Credit Card Transactions to perform credit card
advance and payment transactions.
Loan Transactions Teller can use Loan Transactions to perform loan disbursement and
loan repayment transactions.
Islamic Transactions Teller can use to Islamic Transactions perform various Islamic
transactions.
Bill Payments Teller can use Bill Payments to perform various bill payment
transactions.
Session Teller Teller can use Session Teller Transactions to perform financial
Transactions transactions for Customer accounts in the Teller Session.
Journal Log Teller or Supervisor can use Journal Log to view the status of
transactions performed by them. Also, it allows to resubmit or reject an
incomplete transaction, or to reverse a completed transaction.
Prediction The Supervisor can use Prediction to predict the number of service
counters required for a specific period.
Cache The Clear Cache screen is used to get the maintenance reflected
while performing the transactions.
Customer Service Teller or Operations Executive can use Customer Service to maintain
customer accounts and ancillary services and to enquire about
customer account balance.

1-5
 Chapter 1
Application Layout

Table 1-3 (Cont.) Menu Items – Description

Menu Description
Branch Dashboard Teller can use the Branch Dashboard to view the cash position,
transaction status, alerts, to access the frequently used transaction
screens, and to view the alerts and notifications.
Branch Maintenance Branch Maintenance covers a set of definitions maintained to perform
the branch-based operations, transactions, and services.
Customer/Account Search Used to query for a specific Customer ID or Customer Account
Number.

You can select an operation using any of the following methods:

• From the Homepage, navigate to the left menu and then click the necessary
operation.
• Click the Frequent Operations widget placed at the right side of the transaction
area.

1.3 Application Layout

The general layout of the Oracle Banking Branch application consists of the main
menu, customer search, transaction area including customer summary, and additional
widgets available to display the Current Till Position and frequently used
transaction icons.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Customer Search
The Customer Search is located in the Branch Dashboard and Teller
Transaction screens. It is used to query and find a specific customer account.
• About Transaction Area
The transaction area consists of a transaction panel, a Customer Information
widget, and additional widgets within the Teller Transaction screens.

1.3.1 Customer Search

The Customer Search is located in the Branch Dashboard and Teller Transaction
screens. It is used to query and find a specific customer account.
You can use Customer Search to query and find a specific customer account with one
of the following information:
• Customer ID
• Customer Name
• Account Number
To find a specific customer account:
1. On the Homepage or the transaction screen, in the Customer Search widget, click

the icon.

1-6
 Chapter 1
Application Layout

The Customer Search screen is displayed.

Figure 1-5 Customer Search

2. On the Customer Search screen, query the details. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Table 1-4 Customer Search - Field Description

Field Description
Customer ID Specify the customer ID which the details need to be queried.
Customer Name Specify the name of the customer for which the details need to be
queried.
Account Number Specify the account number for which the details need to be
queried.
Search Click Search to get the results for the specified Customer ID,
Customer Name, or Account Number.
Reset Click Reset to clear the search results.
Customer Results Displays the customer search results.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID.
Customer Name Displays the customer's name.
Account Details Displays the account search results.
Account Number Display the account number.
Account Name Display the description of the account.
Account Currency Display the currency of the account.

1.3.2 About Transaction Area

The transaction area consists of a transaction panel, a Customer Information widget, and
additional widgets within the Teller Transaction screens.
A sample of the transaction area is shown below:

1-7
 Chapter 1
Application Layout

Figure 1-6 Transaction Area

Transaction Header
The transaction header is specific to each transaction screen. The following details are
provided in the transaction header:

Table 1-5 Transaction Header

Item Description
Transaction Screen Name Displays the name of the selected transaction screen.
Customer Search For information on the Customer Search, refer to
Customer Search.
Branch Date Displays the current branch date.

Transaction Panel
The transaction panel consists of the data segments with the necessary input fields
and action buttons. Users need to specify the details in the fields to perform the
transactions.

Customer Information
The Customer Information widget provides the details about the customer that are
validated during transaction submission. For information on the amount-based
signature verification, refer to About Amount-Based Signature Verification.

Table 1-6 Customer Information

Field Description
Display Option The Customer Information widget is displayed only if this option
is selected.
Customer's Image Displays the image of the customer.
Customer's Name Displays the name of the customer.
KYC Status Displays the KYC status of the customer's details.

1-8
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-6 (Cont.) Customer Information

Field Description
Signature Displays the signature of the customer.
Account Details Displays the details of the customer account.
Address Details Displays the address details of the customer.
Contact Details Displays the contact details of the customer.

Additional Widgets
The additional widgets are located at the right side of the transaction area in the Teller
Transaction screens. The additional widgets include the following:

Table 1-7 Additional Widgets

Widget Description
Current Till Position Displays the cash position in the branch currency for the logged-in
Teller Id.
Memo Alerts Displays the instructions maintained in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking
for the specified account number.

Note:
To enable memo alerts, in transaction
schema the memo_enabled flag should
be set to ‘Y’ in
SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS and UBS
Entries should be maintained.

Alerts Displays the alerts/notifications specific to the Customer.

Frequent Customer Displays some frequently used transaction icons. Users can open the
Operations frequently used transaction screens through this widget.

Note:
The system displays an error message
stating that the User does not have rights
to access this screen if the user is trying
to access the restricted screen in the
widget.

1.4 Salient Features

Learn about the salient features of the Oracle Banking Branch application.
The salient features are as follows:

1-9
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-8 Salient Features

Feature Description
Generation of Teller The system generates a unique Teller Sequence Number and
Sequence Number displays an information message Teller Sequence
Number nnn indicating the generated number after submission
of each teller transaction. The generated sequence number is
also displayed at the following levels:
• Completion
• Authorization Submission
• Re-submission
• Reversal
• Rejection
Advice Generation for The system generates the transaction advice if it is enabled in the
Teller Transactions definition of function code. The advice includes the currency and
amount values involved in the transaction.
Transaction Approval When you perform a transaction for an amount greater than the
allowed limit, it needs approval from the Supervisor. Based on the
Assignment Mode in Function Code Preferences screen, the
following conditions apply:
• Manual – The system will show a list of approval if the
request status is Approval.
• Auto – The transaction is automatically assigned to the
default authorizer if the request status is Approval.
The transaction approval flow consists of the following steps:
• Initiation
• Pending Approval
• Pending
• Completed
For more information on transaction approval flow, refer to
Table 1-9.
Transaction Reversal A transaction can be reversed with auto-approval or approval from
with Approval the Supervisor. Based on the Assignment Mode in Function
Code Preferences screen, the following conditions apply:
• Manual – The system will show a list of approval if the
request status is Approval.
• Auto – The transaction is automatically assigned to the
default authorizer if the request status is Approval.
The transaction approval flow consists of the following steps:
• Completed
• Pending Approval
• Pending
• Reversed
For more information on transaction flow for reversal with
approval, refer to Table 1-10.

1-10
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-8 (Cont.) Salient Features

Feature Description
Transaction Reversal A transaction can be manually reversed only when it is authorized
and completed from the Journal Log.
When you reverse a transaction, the data remains in the system
with the status Reversed and the accounting entries are reversed
(negative amounts are posted into the accounts). Also, this will
update the Till Balance for the currencies (for cash transactions),
wherever applicable.
You can select the transaction to be reversed from the transaction
screen. If the reversal is applicable for the function code, the
Reversal icon will be enabled. When you click this icon, the
reversal request will be initiated.
If cash transactions are reversed, the system validates the
following:
• the Till used for the reversal is the same as that used in the
original transaction
• the denominations are input (If the transaction is reversed the
same day of its input, the denominations of the transaction
are altered.)
• a batch is open
Transaction Rejection You can manually reject the authorized customer transactions
from the Teller Journal Log.

Note:
When you reject a transaction, the
data remains in the system with the
contract status Discarded and no
further action is allowed on the
transaction.

UDF and MIS UDF and MIS are supported during accounting via common core
Additional Fields. MIS Codes can be sent from the Oracle
Banking Branch, which will be validated and processed as part of
accounting.

1-11
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-8 (Cont.) Salient Features

Feature Description
External API External APIs will be processed only if called by an external
system, which is maintained in Oracle Banking Branch. The
external system can be maintained using the External System
Maintenance screen. For more information on the External
System Maintenance screen, refer to External System
Maintenance. External APIs are supported for the following
transactions:
• Cash Deposit
• Cash Withdrawal
• Account Balance Inquiry
• Account Transfer

Note:
These transactions will work only if
OAuth is enabled.

Machine Learning For information on machine learning, refer to About Machine

Learning.
Oracle Digital Assistant For information on ODA, refer to About Oracle Digital Assistant.
(ODA)
Virtual Identifier For information on the virtual identifier, refer to About Virtual
Identifier.
Amount-Based Signature For information on amount-based signature verification, refer to
Verification About Amount-Based Signature Verification.

Table 1-9 Transaction Approval Flow

Stage Description
Initiation to Pending If the transaction amount exceeds the limit defined in Branch User
Approval Limits and on click of Submit, the system shows a popup
message Amount exceeds limit for this
transaction, and request status is shown as Approval.
If assignment mode is manual and on click of Confirm, the
system shows a list of approval based on branch code,
transaction amount, currency, and function code. The user can
give a narrative and click Submit for Approval button.
Pending Approval to The Approver/Supervisor needs to log in and fetch the transaction
Pending from Journal Log with transaction status as Pending Approval.
The Supervisor can approve the pending transaction by clicking
Approve/Reject with the supervisor comment.
Pending to Completed The user needs to fetch the transaction from Journal Log with
transaction status as Sent Back and click Submit.

1-12
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-9 (Cont.) Transaction Approval Flow

Stage Description
Override Flow (Initiation Based on the branch maintenance setup at certain levels like
to Completed) Function Code, Function Code Preferences, Branch User Limits,
and Branch role limits, if the transaction is validated with any
warning override, the system shows a popup message with
request status as Warning. Once the user confirms, the
transaction status will be shown as Completed.

Table 1-10 Transaction Reversal with Approval Flow

Stage Description
Completed to Pending The completed transaction can be selected from the Electronic
Approval Journal screen. Once you click Reverse, the system shows a popup
message Amount required for Reversal and requests
changes to Approval.
If assignment mode is manual and on click of Confirm, the system
shows a list of approval based on branch code, transaction amount,
currency, and function code. The user can give a narrative and click
Submit for Approval button.
Pending Approval to The Approver/Supervisor needs to log in and fetch the transaction from
Pending Journal Log with transaction status as Pending Approval. The
Supervisor can approve the pending transaction by clicking Approve/
Reject with the supervisor comment.
Pending to Reversed The user needs to fetch the transaction from Journal Log with
transaction status as Sent Back and click Submit.
Override Flow (Completed The user needs to select the completed transaction in the Electronic
to Approval) Journal screen and click Reverse. If the Reversal Requires
Authorization is enabled in the Function Code Definition screen, the
system displays an information message to select the Approver based
on Manual or Auto assignment mode. After selecting the approver
internally, reversal override will be called and request status will be
updated as Approval.

This topic contains the following subtopics:

• About Machine Learning
Oracle Banking Branch uses machine learning to process an email request from a
customer automatically.
• About Oracle Digital Assistant
The Oracle Digital Assistant (ODA) helps the Teller to reduce the time taken to access
the transaction screens through automatic text/voice processing.
• About Virtual Identifier
The virtual identifier is used to validate the specified account number of the customer.
• About Amount-Based Signature Verification
The Teller can use the "Amount-Based Signature Verification" feature to verify the
signature displayed in the Customer Information widget while performing the
transactions.

1-13
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

1.4.1 About Machine Learning

Oracle Banking Branch uses machine learning to process an email request from a
customer automatically.
When a customer sends an email request, the requirement is understood using
machine learning, and the transaction is processed. A sample email request is shown
in Figure 1-7. Based on pre-defined machine learning in External System
Maintenance, the transaction is processed automatically.

Figure 1-7 Sample Email Request

The following conditions apply to the machine learning use case for cheque book
requests:
• If sufficient details are provided in the email request, the transaction will be
processed until completion.
• If details are insufficient in the email request to process a transaction, it will be
assigned in the Servicing Journal for user correction. After the assigned user
does the correction, the transaction will be processed.

Figure 1-8 ML Correction Assistance – Extracted Information

1-14
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Figure 1-9 ML Correction Assistance – Enriched Data

View Request
In the Electronic Journal, you can view the details of the Cheque Book Request initiated
through the email request. The View Request button will be enabled for the transactions that
are submitted or completed. You can view the details of the email request by clicking the
View Request.

Figure 1-10 View Request (Completed Transaction)

Figure 1-11 View Request (Submitted Transaction)

1-15
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

If sufficient details are provided in the email request for card block, the transaction will
be processed until completion.

1.4.2 About Oracle Digital Assistant

The Oracle Digital Assistant (ODA) helps the Teller to reduce the time taken to access
the transaction screens through automatic text/voice processing.
The ODA can be enabled by navigating to the user menu and selecting Virtual
Assistant option.

Figure 1-12 Virtual Assistant

The virtual assistant supports the following use cases:

Table 1-11 ODA Use Cases

Use Case Description

Teller can either type/say, Cash Based on the input provided, the Cash Withdrawal
Withdrawal Account Number, Do screen will be opened automatically with the specified
Cash Withdrawal Account Number account number. For example, refer to Figure 1-13.
in ODA Chatbot.

Note:
Teller needs to type/say
the specific account
number while giving the
input text/voice.

1-16
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Table 1-11 (Cont.) ODA Use Cases

Use Case Description

Teller can either type/say, Cash Based on the input provided, the Cash Deposit screen
Deposit Account Number, Do will be opened with the specified account number. For
Cash Deposit Account Number in example, refer to Figure 1-13.
ODA Chatbot.
Teller can type/say the name of the If the Teller batch is closed, the ODA will check the
operation like Open Teller Batch or current Till balance and prompt for confirmation from
Open My Batch. Teller. Once the Teller confirms, then it will open the
teller batch. In case the Teller batch is already open, a
response message (Teller batch already open) will be
displayed. For example, refer to Figure 1-14.
Teller can type/say the name of the Based on the input, the following conditions apply:
operation like Check Batch Status, • If the Teller batch is open, the ODA will show the
What is my Batch Status, or Check message Your Teller Batch is Open.
Batch. • If the Teller batch is closed, the ODA will show the
message Your Teller Batch is Closed and
prompts Do you want to open your Batch with the
options (Yes – select to open the Teller batch or No
– select if it is not required to open the Teller batch).

Figure 1-13 Use Case with Account Number

1-17
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Figure 1-14 Use Case without Account Number

1.4.3 About Virtual Identifier

The virtual identifier is used to validate the specified account number of the customer.
The virtual identifier is supported for the following screens:
• Cash Deposit
• Miscellaneous Customer Credit
• Account Transfer
• In-House Cheque Deposit

Validations
If Virtual Identifier is enabled, the validation is performed as follows:
• After you specify the account number, and on tab out, the system will validate the
specified account number.
• If the account number is invalid, the system prompts an information message to
input the currency and amount.
• Once the currency and amount are entered, the virtual identifier service will be
invoked to validate if it is a valid virtual account or not.

Figure 1-15 Virtual Identifier – Information Message

1-18
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

1.4.4 About Amount-Based Signature Verification

The Teller can use the "Amount-Based Signature Verification" feature to verify the signature
displayed in the Customer Information widget while performing the transactions.
To enable/disable this feature, configure the value as Y or N in the AMOUNT_BASED_SV flag. This
flag is present in the srv_tm_bc_param_dtls table in the transaction domain.
The following use cases are applicable to this feature:

Table 1-12 Amount-Based Signature Verification

Use Case Description

Amount-based signature verification is When the user specifies the Account Number in a
disabled transaction screen and presses the Tab key, the system
displays the signature in the Customer Information widget.
Amount-based signature verification is When the user specifies the Account Number and Amount
enabled in a transaction screen and presses the Tab key, the system
displays the following details of signature in the Customer
Information widget:
• Signature
• Signature Type
• Group ID
• Number of Signatories

1-19
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Figure 1-16 Amount-based Signature Verification Disabled

1-20
 Chapter 1
Salient Features

Figure 1-17 Amount-based Signature Verification Enabled

1-21
 Chapter 1
Keyboard Navigation for Transaction Screens

1.5 Keyboard Navigation for Transaction Screens

The keyboard navigation can be used as an alternative method to navigate through
interactive elements on a screen – fields, buttons, data segments, tables, etc. It can be
used to navigate through the application, input the necessary values, and perform the
transactions.
The keyboard navigation for various operations and their descriptions are as follows:

Table 1-13 Keyboard Navigation

Operation Description of Navigation

Input Values in Fields After you launch the transaction screen, press the Tab key to
navigate to the desired field, and specify the value.
Select Date To select the appropriate date, perform the following steps:
1. Press Tab/Shift + Tab keys to navigate to the desired
calendar icon.
2. Use Arrow keys to navigate to the desired date.
3. Press Enter key or Spacebar to select the date.

Select from Drop-down To select a value from the drop-down list, perform the following
Lists steps:
1. Press Tab/Shift + Tab keys to navigate to the desired drop-
down list.
2. Use Arrow keys to navigate to the desired value.
3. Press Enter key to select the value.

Select from List of To select a value from the list of values, perform the following
Values steps:
1. Press Tab/Shift + Tab keys to navigate to the desired list of
values.
2. Press Enter key or Spacebar to enter into the list of values.
3. If the exact value is known, specify the value in the search
field, and press the Tab key to navigate to the Fetch button.
Press Enter key to select the Fetch button.
The results will be fetched based on the input value.
4. Press the Tab key to navigate to the results.
5. Use Arrow keys to navigate to the desired value.
6. Press Spacebar to select the value.

1-22
 Chapter 1
About Business Process Codes

Table 1-13 (Cont.) Keyboard Navigation

Operation Description of Navigation

Navigating through To specify/select value in the fields/cells of a table, perform the
Tables following steps:
1. Press Tab/Shift + Tab keys to navigate to the desired data
segment, and navigate to the desired table row.
2. Press Enter key to enter into the data fields/cells.
3. Specify the necessary value in the fields.
4. If there are more cells in the row, use the Tab key to navigate
to the other cells and specify the values.
5. After you specify the values in the cells, press the Esc key to
change the selection from cell to row.
6. Press the Tab key to navigate to the other tables/data
segments/fields/buttons.

Select Option Buttons/ To select option buttons, perform the following steps:
Icons
1. Press Tab/Shift + Tab keys to navigate to the desired option
button.
2. Press Enter key or Spacebar to select the desired option
button.

Perform Transaction To specify/select the necessary values and submit a transaction

using keyboard navigation, perform the following steps:
1. Use the appropriate shortcut keys to navigate to the fields,
buttons, data segments, tables, etc., and specify/select the
necessary values.
2. After you specify the necessary values, use appropriate
shortcut keys to select Submit button to complete a
transaction.

1.6 About Business Process Codes

Business Process Code defines the various stages for servicing transactions.
The screens available in the Oracle Banking Branch application use the conductor flow. As a
part of Oracle Banking Branch releases, a set of default process codes are factory-shipped
for the following customer servicing transactions:
• Customer Address Update
• Account Address Update
• Customer Contact Details Update

Note:
For more information on the business process, refer to the Servicing Configurations
User Guide.

1-23
2
Branch Operations
The Branch Manager, Vault Teller, or Teller can use branch operations to perform the internal
activities done at the branch where the customer is not involved.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• TC Denomination Enquiry
The TC Denomination Enquiry screen is used to enquire the currency-wise details of
the TCs in the branch vault.
• Open Branch Batch
The Open Branch Batch screen is used to initiate the branch operations for the posting
date. The Supervisor or Branch Manager with necessary access can open this screen.
• Open Vault Batch
The Vault Teller can use Open Vault Batch screen to open a vault batch on a specified
date.
• Open Teller Batch
The Open Teller Batch screen is used to open a teller batch on a specified date.
• Current Open Tills
The Current Open Tills screen is used to view the open tills or vault for the branch
during the day or before performing the end-of-day activity.
• Branch Breach Limits
The Branch Breach Limits screen helps to view the details of Till or Vault, which is
breaching the currency limits along with the current balance position.
• Till Vault Position
The Till Vault Position screen is used to view the cash position of all the currencies at
any time for the Teller ID or Vault ID, which is logged in for the current posting date. It
also shows the denomination details.
• Branch Total Position
The supervisor can use this screen to view the currency-wise cash position of all the
Tellers and Vault Teller on the posting date for the logged-in branch.
• Close Teller Batch
The Close Teller Batch screen is used to close the teller batch for the given posting
date.
• Close Vault Batch
The Close Vault Batch screen is used to close the vault batch for a specific date.
• Close Branch Batch
The Close Branch Batch screen is used to close the branch batch after confirming that
all the branch transactions have been accounted for in the account books.
• Book Shortage
The Teller or Vault Teller can use the Book Shortage screen to book the shortage if the
actual or physical cash present is less than the system cash.

2-1
 Chapter 2
TC Denomination Enquiry

• Book Overage
The Teller or Vault Teller can use this screen to book the physical cash held in a
particular currency, which exceeds the cash in that currency shown in the system.
• Teller Session
The teller can perform several transactions for a customer in a single session. All
the transactions done by the customer are grouped under a single session. At the
end of the session, the teller accepts the cumulative amount (of all the
transactions done in the session) from the customer.

2.1 TC Denomination Enquiry

The TC Denomination Enquiry screen is used to enquire the currency-wise details of
the TCs in the branch vault.
The currency-wise details include:
• Denomination
• Count
• Series
• Serial Number
• Amount
To enquire the TC denomination:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click TC
Denomination Enquiry or specify TC Denomination Enquiry in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The TC Denomination Enquiry screen is displayed.

Figure 2-1 TC Denomination Enquiry

2. On the TC Denomination Enquiry screen, specify the fields. For more

information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

2-2
 Chapter 2
Open Branch Batch

Table 2-1 TC Denomination Enquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
Posting Date Displays the current posting date of the branch.
Till Vault Indicator Select the Till Vault Indicator from the drop-down values (Till or
Vault).
Till ID Displays the Till ID.
TC Currency Click the search icon, and select the TC currency from the list of
values.
Issuer Code Click the search icon, and select the issuer code from the list of
values.
Refresh After you specify the TC Currency and Issuer Code fields, click
Refresh to fetch and display the details of the TC.
Denomination Code Displays the denomination code of the TC.
Description Displays the description of the denomination code.
System Count Displays the system count.
Series Displays the series.
Start Number Displays the start number.
End Number Displays the end number.
Amount Displays the amount.

2.2 Open Branch Batch

The Open Branch Batch screen is used to initiate the branch operations for the posting
date. The Supervisor or Branch Manager with necessary access can open this screen.
The Teller or Vault Teller can perform the branch operations only after the branch batch is
submitted for the posting date. When a branch batch is closed for the day, the system derives
the next working day automatically, based on the branch calendar.
To open a branch batch:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click Open
Branch Batch or specify Open Branch Batch in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Open Branch Batch screen is displayed.

Figure 2-2 Open Branch Batch

2-3
 Chapter 2
Open Vault Batch

2. On the Open Branch Batch screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-2 Open Branch Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the branch batch needs to be
opened.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

3. Click Submit.
The branch batch is opened for the specified posting date.

Note:
Opening branch batch indicates to the head office that the branch is
open for business operations on the specified posting date. You can
open a Teller batch for the posting date only after the branch batch is
opened.

2.3 Open Vault Batch

The Vault Teller can use Open Vault Batch screen to open a vault batch on a
specified date.
On the specified posting date, the Vault Teller can open only one vault batch. To open
another vault batch, the vault batch which is opened previously needs to be closed. All
the tellers buy additional cash and sell their excess cash to the Vault Teller. When this
screen is launched, the system will default the cash balances.
To open a vault batch:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Open Vault Batch or specify Open Vault Batch in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Open Vault Batch screen is displayed.

2-4
 Chapter 2
Open Vault Batch

Figure 2-3 Open Vault Batch

2. On the Open Vault Batch screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Table 2-3 Open Vault Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the vault batch needs to be opened.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Currency Displays the currency code.

Total Cash Specify the total cash for a particular currency, physically present in
the bank vault, at the beginning of the current posting date.
Cash Available Displays the system calculated cash for a particular currency, which
is available in the vault at the beginning of the current posting date.

Note:
The amount shown in this column depends on the cash
transactions that were carried out by the vault until the
last posting date.

2-5
 Chapter 2
Open Teller Batch

Table 2-3 (Cont.) Open Vault Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Shortage/Overage Displays the difference between the total cash and the cash
Amount available in the Vault, at the end of the current posting date.
Currency Displays the currency code.
Denomination Displays the denomination code.
Total Units Specify the total units available while closing the batch.
Total Value Displays the total value based on the total units.
System Units Displays the units available in the system.
System Total Displays the total value available in the system.
Shortage/Overage Units Displays the shortage/overage units.
Shortage/Overage Displays the shortage/overage amount.
Amount
Total Cash Amount Displays the total cash amount.
Denomination Total Displays the total denomination value with the currency.
Validate Denominations Click this button to calculate and display the Total Cash and
Shortage/Overage Amount fields based on the currency selected.

3. Click Submit.
The vault batch is opened for the specified posting date.

Note:
During the vault batch opening, the system will internally transfer the
available balance from the Primary vault of the branch to the current
open Vault ID. The Vault Teller can perform the relevant vault operations
for the posting date. The system does not allow to open the vault batch if
the physical cash entered is not the same as the system cash.

2.4 Open Teller Batch

The Open Teller Batch screen is used to open a teller batch on a specified date.
A Teller can initiate the teller batch with the current cash position that has been
retained from the previous day or start with zero cash and subsequently buy cash from
the vault. The system will default the cash balances on opening a teller batch.
To open a teller batch:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Open Teller Batch or specify Open Teller Batch in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Open Teller Batch screen is displayed.

2-6
 Chapter 2
Open Teller Batch

Figure 2-4 Open Teller Batch

2. On the Open Teller Batch screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Table 2-4 Open Teller Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the vault batch needs to be opened.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Currency Displays the currency code.

Total Cash Specify the total cash for a particular currency, physically present in
the bank teller, at the beginning of the current posting date.
Cash Available Displays the system calculated cash for a particular currency, which
is available in the vault at the beginning of the current posting date.

Note:
The amount shown in this column depends on the cash
transactions that were carried out by the vault until the
last posting date.

2-7
 Chapter 2
Current Open Tills

Table 2-4 (Cont.) Open Teller Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Shortage/ Overage Displays the difference between the total cash and the cash
Amount available with the Teller, at the end of the current posting date.
Based on this difference, the overage or the shortage amount is
displayed.

Note:
An overage indicates that the physical cash with the
Teller is more than the available cash as calculated by
the system. A shortage indicates that the available cash
calculated by the system is more than the physical cash
present with the Teller.

Currency Displays the currency code.

Denomination Displays the denomination code.
Total Units Specify the total units available while closing the batch.
Total Value Displays the total value based on the total units.
System Units Displays the units available in the system.
System Total Displays the total value available in the system.
Shortage/Overage Units Displays the shortage/overage units.
Shortage/Overage Displays the shortage/overage amount.
Amount
Total Cash Amount Displays the total cash amount.
Denomination Total Displays the total denomination value with the currency.
Validate Denominations Click this button to calculate and display the Total Cash and
Shortage/Overage Amount fields based on the currency selected.

3. Click Submit.
The teller batch is opened for the specified posting date.

Note:
The Teller can perform the relevant teller operations for the posting date.
The system does not allow to open the vault batch if the physical cash
entered is not the same as the system cash. The system also allows to
re-open the Teller batch for the current system date.

2.5 Current Open Tills

The Current Open Tills screen is used to view the open tills or vault for the branch
during the day or before performing the end-of-day activity.
The branch user can use this screen to view the list of logged-in Tellers and to view
the following transactions under each Teller or Vault Teller’s ID:

2-8
 Chapter 2
Current Open Tills

• Pending
• User Working
• Assigned
To view the open tills or vault:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click Current
Open Tills or specify Current Open Tills in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Current Open Tills screen is displayed.

Figure 2-5 Current Open Tills

2. On the Current Open Tills screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 2-5 Current Open Tills - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch.
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the current open tills need to be
enquired.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the details.

User ID Displays the list of Tellers or Vault Tellers of the branch.
Till/Vault Indicator Displays the checkbox if the User ID is a Vault Teller.
User Working Displays the user working as Y or N.
Pending Transactions Displays the number of pending transactions for the Teller or Vault
Teller.
Assigned Transactions Displays the number of assigned transactions for the Teller or Vault
Teller.

2-9
 Chapter 2
Branch Breach Limits

2.6 Branch Breach Limits

The Branch Breach Limits screen helps to view the details of Till or Vault, which is
breaching the currency limits along with the current balance position.
In addition, the branch supervisor can view the branch's total cash position and its
breaching limits for the posting date.
To view the branch breaching limits:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Branch Breach Limits or specify Branch Breach Limits in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Branch Breach Limits screen is displayed.

Figure 2-6 Branch Breach Limits

2. On the Branch Breach Limits screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-6 Branch Breach Limits - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch.
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the branch breaching limits needs
to be enquired.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Refresh Click this icon to refresh the details.

Tills Breaching Limit Specify the fields under this section.
User ID Displays the list of Tellers/Vault Tellers of the branch.

2-10
 Chapter 2
Till Vault Position

Table 2-6 (Cont.) Branch Breach Limits - Field Description

Field Description
Vault User Displays the checkbox if the User ID is a Vault Teller.
Currency Displays the list of currencies in which the User ID has
performed the transactions.
Minimum Limit Displays the minimum till balance that needs to be maintained
for the User ID and currency combination.
Maximum Limit Displays the maximum till balance that needs to be maintained
for the User ID and currency combination.
Current Till Balance Displays the current till balance based on the till cash position
for the specified currency.
Branch Breaching Limit Displays the values under this section.
Branch Code Displays the code of the logged-in branch.
Currency Displays the currency code.
Minimum Limit Displays the minimum limit that needs to be maintained for the
branch.
Maximum Limit Displays the maximum limit that needs to be maintained for the
branch.
Current Total Balance Displays the branch total cash position, currency-wise.

2.7 Till Vault Position

The Till Vault Position screen is used to view the cash position of all the currencies at any
time for the Teller ID or Vault ID, which is logged in for the current posting date. It also shows
the denomination details.
To view the cash position of all the currencies:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click Till Vault
Position or specify Till Vault Position in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Till Vault Position screen is displayed.

Figure 2-7 Till Vault Position

2-11
 Chapter 2
Branch Total Position

2. On the Till Vault Position screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-7 Till Vault Position - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch.
Branch Posting Date Displays the date on which the Till/Vault batch is opened.
Teller/Vault ID Displays the logged-in Teller ID or Vault Teller ID.
Currency Details Specify the fields under this section.
Currency Displays the currency code.
Opening Balance Displays the opening balance of the till or vault.
Incoming Cash Amount Displays the incoming cash in the till or vault for the current
posting date.
Outgoing Cash Amount Displays the outgoing cash in the till or vault for the current
posting date.
Total Cash Displays the total cash available in the till or vault.
Till Vault Indicator Displays whether the currency details apply to Till or Vault. (T
or V)
Denomination Details Displays the denomination details under this section.
Denomination Code Displays the denomination code maintained for the currency.
Denomination Value Displays the denominations maintained for the currency.
Opening Balance Displays the opening balance in the Till or vault in terms of
denominations.
Incoming Cash Amount Displays the incoming cash in the Till or vault in terms of
denominations.
Outgoing Cash Amount Displays the outgoing cash in the Till or vault in terms of
denominations.
Total Cash Displays the total cash currently available in the Till or vault for
the day in terms of denominations.
Units Displays the total units available for the specific denomination
code.

2.8 Branch Total Position

The supervisor can use this screen to view the currency-wise cash position of all the
Tellers and Vault Teller on the posting date for the logged-in branch.
To view the currency wise cash position:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Branch Total Position or specify Branch Total Position in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Branch Total Position screen is displayed.

2-12
 Chapter 2
Branch Total Position

Figure 2-8 Branch Total Position

2. On the Branch Total Position screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 2-8 Branch Total Position - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch.
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the teller totals position need to be
enquired.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Currency Displays the currency code for which the teller totals details needs
to be displayed.
Teller ID Displays the logged-in teller ID from the LOV.
All Till Select this radio button to display all the open Teller Till details of
the day.
All Vault Select this radio button to display all the open Vault details of the
day.
All Till and Vault Select this radio button to display all the open Till and open Vault
details of the day.
Query Displays the details if you click this icon.
Currency Displays the currency code for which the cash position is shown.
Teller ID Displays the Teller ID for which the cash position is shown.
Opening Balance Displays the opening balance of the Teller ID for the specific
currency.
Incoming Cash Displays the total incoming cash received in the Till.
Outgoing Cash Displays the outgoing cash moved out of the Till.
Closing Balance Displays the total amount pending in the Till.

2-13
 Chapter 2
Close Teller Batch

2.9 Close Teller Batch

The Close Teller Batch screen is used to close the teller batch for the given posting
date.
The system allows closing the teller batch only when the below conditions are met:
• Verify that all the transactions are successfully processed to a logical end. If there
are any pending transactions, the system prompts to either complete or reject the
transaction.
• Verify that there is a difference between the physical cash and the cash calculated
by the system. You need to book the overage or shortage accordingly, and then
each Teller can close the teller batch for that day.
• Verify that the teller cash position retains the minimum limit for every currency as
maintained in the User limits. If you breach the minimum limit, the system prompts
the error to maintain the required minimum balance.

Note:
The teller batch can be opened and closed only once for the posting date.

To close the teller batch:

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Close Teller Batch or specify Close Teller Batch in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Close Teller Batch screen is displayed.

Figure 2-9 Close Teller Batch

2. On the Close Teller Batch screen, specify the details. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

2-14
 Chapter 2
Close Teller Batch

Table 2-9 Close Teller Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the teller batch needs to be closed.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Currency Displays the currency code in which the Teller deals.

Total Cash Specify the total cash for a particular currency, physically present in
the bank Teller, at the end of the current posting date.
Cash Available Displays the system calculated cash for a particular currency, which
is available in the teller at the end of the current posting date.

Note:
The amount displayed in this column depends on the
cash transactions that were carried out by the Teller until
the last posting date.

Shortage/ Overage Displays the difference between the Total Cash and the Cash
Amount Available. Based on this difference, the overage or the shortage
amount is displayed.

Note:
An overage indicates that the physical cash with the
Teller is more than the available cash as calculated by
the system. A shortage indicates that the available cash
calculated by the system is more than the physical cash
present with the Teller.

Currency Displays the currency code.

Denomination Displays the denomination code.
Total Units Specify the total units available while closing the batch.
Total Value Displays the total value based on the total units.
System Units Displays the units available in the system.
System Total Displays the total value available in the system.
Shortage/Overage Units Displays the shortage/overage units.
Shortage/Overage Displays the shortage/overage amount.
Amount
Total Cash Amount Displays the total cash amount.
Denomination Total Displays the total denomination value with the currency.

2-15
 Chapter 2
Close Teller Batch

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denomination Details segment, refer to Add TC Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
The cash balance is updated, and the teller batch is closed for the posting date.

Note:
If there is any overage or shortage, the system displays an error
message stating that the cash/TC is not balanced for the Teller ID. Also,
if any of the conditions mentioned above fail, the system displays an
appropriate error message on submit.

• Add TC Denomination Details

The TC Denomination Details data segment provides the denomination details for
the Traveller’s Cheque. It is also used to validate the denominations.

2.9.1 Add TC Denomination Details

The TC Denomination Details data segment provides the denomination details for the
Traveller’s Cheque. It is also used to validate the denominations.

Figure 2-10 TC Denomination Details

Validate the TC denomination details. For more information on fields, refer to the field
description table.

Table 2-10 TC Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
TC Currency Displays the TC currency code in which the Teller deals.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount for a particular currency, physically
present in the bank Teller, at the end of the current posting date.

2-16
 Chapter 2
Close Teller Batch

Table 2-10 (Cont.) TC Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
TC Available Displays the TC for a particular currency, which is available in the
teller at the end of the current posting date.

Note:
The amount displayed in this
column depends on the cash
transactions that were carried out by
the Teller until the last posting date.

Shortage/ Overage Displays the difference between the total cash and the cash
Amount available with the Teller, at the end of the current posting date.
Based on this difference, the overage or the shortage amount is
displayed.

Note:
An overage indicates that the
physical cash with the Teller is more
than the available cash as
calculated by the system. A
shortage indicates that the available
cash calculated by the system is
more than the physical cash present
with the Teller.

Issuer Code Displays the issuer code.

TC Currency Displays the currency code of the TC.
TC Denomination Displays the denomination code of the TC.
TC Count Specify the TC count available with the Teller at the end of the
current posting date.
Series Displays the TC series.
Start Number Displays the start number.
End Number Displays the end number.
TC Amount Displays the total TC amount.
TC Denomination Value Displays the total denomination value with the TC currency.
System Count Displays the system count.
Shortage/Overage Units Displays the shortage/overage units.
Shortage/Overage Displays the shortage/overage amount.
Amount
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount.
TC Denominations Displays the TC denomination code.

2-17
 Chapter 2
Close Vault Batch

Table 2-10 (Cont.) TC Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
Validate TC Click this button to calculate and display the Total Cash and
Denominations Shortage/Overage Amount fields based on the currency
selected.

2.10 Close Vault Batch

The Close Vault Batch screen is used to close the vault batch for a specific date.
The Vault Teller can log in and close the vault batch only if the below conditions are
met:
• Verify if there is a difference in the physical cash and that calculated by the
system, the overage or shortage has to be booked accordingly. After the overage
or shortage is booked, the Vault Teller can close the vault batch for that day.
• Verify that the cash position of the Vault Teller retains the minimum limit for every
currency as maintained in the User limits. If the minimum limit is breached, the
system prompts the error to maintain the required minimum balance.

Note:
The Vault Teller can close the vault batch even if the Tills are open. When the
Vault Batch is closed, the user will not be able to post transactions like Buy
Cash from Vault that involve Vault.

To close the vault batch:

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Close Vault Batch or specify Close Vault Batch in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Close Vault Batch screen is displayed.

2-18
 Chapter 2
Close Vault Batch

Figure 2-11 Close Vault Batch

2. On the Close Vault Batch screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Table 2-11 Close Vault Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the vault batch needs to be closed.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

Currency Displays the currency code in which the Vault Teller deals.
Total Cash Specify the total cash for a particular currency, physically present in
the bank Vault Teller, at the end of the current posting date.
Cash Available Displays the system calculated cash for a particular currency, which
is available in the Vault Teller at the end of the current posting date.

Note:
The amount displayed in this column depends on the
cash transactions that were carried out by the Teller until
the last posting date.

Shortage/Overage Displays the difference between the total cash and the cash
Amount available in the Vault, at the end of the current posting date.
Currency Displays the currency code.
Denomination Displays the denomination code.

2-19
 Chapter 2
Close Branch Batch

Table 2-11 (Cont.) Close Vault Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Total Units Specify the total units available while closing the batch.
Total Value Displays the total value based on the total units.
System Units Displays the units available in the system.
System Total Displays the total value available in the system.
Shortage/Overage Units Displays the shortage/overage units.
Shortage/Overage Displays the shortage/overage amount.
Amount
Total Cash Amount Displays the total cash amount.
Denomination Total Displays the total denomination value with the currency.

3. Specify the denomination details for the Traveller’s Cheque. For information on the
fields in the TC Denomination Details segment, refer to Add TC Denomination
Details.
4. Click Submit.
The cash balance is updated and the vault batch is closed for the posting date.

Note:
During vault batch closure, the system will internally transfer the closing
balance from the current open Vault ID to the Primary vault of the
branch. If there is any overage or shortage, the system displays an error
message stating that the cash is not balanced for the Teller ID. Also, if
any of the conditions mentioned above fail, the system displays an
appropriate error on submit.

2.11 Close Branch Batch

The Close Branch Batch screen is used to close the branch batch after confirming
that all the branch transactions have been accounted for in the account books.
The posting date for closing a branch batch must be the same date on which the
respective branch batch was opened. You need to close all the teller batches and the
vault batches of the branch before closing the branch batch for that posting date.
Archiving is done as a part of Close Branch Batch as per the archival days set up for
the branch.
To close the branch batch:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Close Branch Batch or specify Close Branch Batch in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Close Branch Batch screen is displayed.

2-20
 Chapter 2
Book Shortage

Figure 2-12 Close Branch Batch

2. On the Close Branch Batch screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 2-12 Close Branch Batch - Field Description

Field Description
Posting Date Indicates the date on which the branch batch needs to be closed.

Note:
By default, the system displays the current date.

3. Click Submit.
The branch batch is closed for the specified posting date.

2.12 Book Shortage

The Teller or Vault Teller can use the Book Shortage screen to book the shortage if the
actual or physical cash present is less than the system cash.
While booking the shortage, the system lowers the cash balance to bring it in sync with the
physical cash balance of the Teller by sending the difference to a cash shortage GL. Once the
system cash and the physical cash are synchronized, the Teller can perform the cash
balancing and close the Teller/Vault Teller batch for the posting date.
To book the shortage:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Book
Shortage or specify Book Shortage in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Book Shortage screen is displayed.

2-21
 Chapter 2
Book Shortage

Figure 2-13 Book Shortage

2. On the Book Shortage screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 2-13 Book Shortage - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch.
Specify the amount that needs to be booked for the shortage.

Note:
The user can select another currency from the drop-
down values in which the shortage amount is to be
booked.

Narrative Displays the default narrative Book Shortage and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the system
reduces the cash balance by this transaction amount to synchronize with
physical cash held with Teller.

2-22
 Chapter 2
Book Shortage

• Add Denomination Details

The Denomination segment is used to view the denominations maintained for the
transaction currency and enter the denomination units.

2.12.1 Add Denomination Details

The Denomination segment is used to view the denominations maintained for the
transaction currency and enter the denomination units.
Make sure that the main transaction details are added to the transaction screen.
The denomination details for the withdrawal transactions (when cash is disbursed to the
Customer) will be populated automatically based on the cash availability in the Teller’s Till.

Figure 2-14 Denomination Details

Validate the denomination details. For more information on fields, refer to the field description
table.

Table 2-14 Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Displays the unique denomination codes for each currency.
Units Indicates the number of units for the specified denomination.

Note:
By default, the till contents are
incremented for inflow transactions such
as cash deposits and decremented for
outflow transactions such as cash
withdrawal. To reverse the transaction,
you can specify units in negative.

2-23
 Chapter 2
Book Overage

Table 2-14 (Cont.) Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
Value Displays the system-computed face value of the denomination based
on the number of units.

Note:
For example, if the denomination code
represents USD 100 and the unit is
specified as 3, the value will be displayed
as 300.

Denomination Amount Displays the system-computed value of the denomination by

multiplying the denomination value with the number of units.

Note:
For example, if the denomination code
represents USD 100 and the number of
units is 10, the denomination amount will
be 1000.

Total Cash Amount Displays the total cash amount.

Note:
The system computes the Denomination
Amount and validates the amount if it is
equal to the Total Cash Amount. It also
prompts an error during saving if there is
any difference.

2.13 Book Overage

The Teller or Vault Teller can use this screen to book the physical cash held in a
particular currency, which exceeds the cash in that currency shown in the system.
While booking a cash overage, the system passes the difference to a cash overage
liability GL and increases the cash balance, and brings it to synchronize with the
physical balance with the Teller. Once the system cash and the physical cash are
synchronized, the Teller can perform cash balancing and close the Teller/Vault Teller
batch for the posting date.
To book the overage:

2-24
 Chapter 2
Book Overage

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Book
Overage or specify Book Overage in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Book Overage screen is displayed.

Figure 2-15 Book Overage

2. On the Book Overage screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 2-15 Book Overage - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch.
Specify the amount that needs to be booked for the overage.

Note:
The user can select another currency from the drop-
down values in which the shortage amount is to be
booked.

Narrative Displays the default narrative Book Overage and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

2-25
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the system
increases the cash balance by this transaction amount to synchronize
with physical cash held with Teller.

2.14 Teller Session

The teller can perform several transactions for a customer in a single session. All the
transactions done by the customer are grouped under a single session. At the end of
the session, the teller accepts the cumulative amount (of all the transactions done in
the session) from the customer.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Start Teller Session
The Teller can use the Start Teller Session screen to start the teller session for a
customer.
• Stop Teller Session
The Teller can use the Stop Teller Session screen to stop the teller session for a
customer.

2.14.1 Start Teller Session

The Teller can use the Start Teller Session screen to start the teller session for a
customer.
To start a teller session:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click
Start Teller Session or specify Start Teller Session in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Start Teller Session screen is displayed.

Figure 2-16 Start Teller Session

2-26
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

2. On the Start Teller Session screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 2-16 Start Teller Session - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Number Specify the customer number.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values, which displays
all the open and authorized CIF IDs maintained in the
system.

Operation Type Select the operation types of the customer from the drop-down list.
The drop-down list shows the following values:
• Transaction
• Account/Contract
• Both

Note:
By default, the Transaction value is selected.

Incoming Cash Amount Specify the cash amount at the start of the teller session.
Remarks Enter remarks for the transaction.

3. On the Start Teller Session screen, click on the CIF Details data segment.
The CIF Details data segment is displayed with the fields.

2-27
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

Figure 2-17 CIF Details

4. Specify the CIF details. For more information on fields, refer to the field description
table.

Table 2-17 CIF Details - Field Description

Field Description
Executor CIF Number When you press the Tab key, the system defaults the value
which can be modified.
Executor CIF Name Displays the executor CIF.
Beneficial Owner CIF Select the desired value from the option list, which displays all
Number the open and authorized CIF IDs maintained in the system.
Beneficial Owner CIF Displays the beneficial owner's CIF number.
Number

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

2.14.2 Stop Teller Session

The Teller can use the Stop Teller Session screen to stop the teller session for a
customer.
To stop a teller session:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Operations, click Stop
Teller Session or specify Stop Teller Session in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Stop Teller Session screen is displayed.

2-28
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

Figure 2-18 Stop Teller Session

2. On the Stop Teller Session screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 2-18 Stop Teller Session - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Number Displays the customer number associated with the selected session
ID.

Note:
When you launch the Stop Teller Session, its
corresponding customer number will be populated in this
field.

Session ID The system defaults the session ID started.

Incoming Cash Amount Displays the incoming cash amount that was entered at the start of
the teller session.
Difference Amount Displays the difference amount by which the total transaction
amount in the session exceeds the incoming cash amount or is less
than the incoming cash amount.
Cash In/ Out Displays in/out based on the difference amount value as IN or OUT.

2-29
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

3. On the Stop Teller Session screen, click on the Teller Transaction Details data
segment.
The Teller Transaction Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 2-19 Teller Transaction Details

4. On the Teller Transaction Details segment, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-19 Teller Transaction Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Reference Displays the reference number of the transactions completed
No within the teller session.
Function Id Displays the Function ID of the transactions that occurred
within the teller session.
Teller Sequence Displays the unique sequence number generated for the teller
Number to check the transaction in EJ Log.
Transaction Amount Displays the Total Transaction Amount for the particular
Transaction Reference No.
Total Charge Amount Displays the Total Charge Amount for the specified
Transaction Reference No. Click on the eye button to view
the individual charges maintained for the transaction.

5. On the Stop Teller Session screen, click on the Teller Session Denomination
Details data segment.
The Teller Session Denomination Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 2-20 Teller Session Denomination Details

6. On the Teller Session Denomination Details segment, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-30
 Chapter 2
Teller Session

Table 2-20 Teller Session Denomination Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Currency Displays the currency for the Total Transaction Amount.
Total Transaction Amount Displays the total transaction amount for a particular currency within
the teller session.
Cash In/Out Displays the cash in/out value for the Total Transaction Amount.
Add Denomination Click Add to view the denominations maintained for the transaction
currency and to enter the denomination units. For more information
on this segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.

7. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

2-31
3
Till-Vault Operations
The Vault Teller or Teller can use Till-Vault operations to monitor the cash and currency boxes
for the day. It is also used to perform cash transfers from or to the Vault/Till.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Buy TC from Agent
The Buy TC from Agent screen is used to buy TC from agents into the branch’s vault.
Only a Vault user can access this screen.
• Buy TC from Head Office
The Buy TC from HO screen is used to buy TC from head office into branch’s vault. Only
a Vault user can access this screen.
• Buy TC from Vault
The Buy TC from Vault screen is used to buy TC from the vault to transfer TCs into
logged-in Teller’s Till. Only a Teller can access this screen.
• Return TC to Vault
The Teller can use the Return TC to Vault screen to return TC to the branch’s vault.
• Return TC to HO
The Return TC to HO screen is used to sell TC to the HO, and only a Vault Teller can
access this screen.
• Buy Cash from Currency Chest
The Vault Teller can use this screen to get cash from the currency chest after opening the
vault batch and deposit it into the vault. Once the cash is transferred from the currency
chest, the system updates the cash position.
• Sell Cash to Currency Chest
The Vault Teller can use this screen to sell cash to the Central Bank from the vault after
all the Tellers have sold the additional cash to the Vault Teller.
• Buy Cash from Vault
The Teller can use the Buy Cash from Vault screen to get cash from the vault.
• Sell Cash to Vault
The Teller can use the Sell Cash to Vault screen to sell cash to the vault. It is used only
when the cash held exceeds the limit set at the template level for any currency.
• Buy Cash from Till
The Teller can use this screen to transfer cash from another Teller in case of insufficient
funds available in the till to perform the customer cash transactions.
• Sell Cash to Till
The Teller can use the Sell Cash to Till screen to transfer cash to another Teller's Till in
case of excess funds available in the Till.
• Denomination Exchange
The Teller can use the Denomination Exchange screen to exchange the currency
denominations.

3-1
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Agent

• Inter Branch Transactions

The interbranch transactions are used to send a request from a bank branch to the
central cash depository, for pickup or delivery of cash.

3.1 Buy TC from Agent

The Buy TC from Agent screen is used to buy TC from agents into the branch’s vault.
Only a Vault user can access this screen.
To buy TC from agents:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Buy TC from Agent or specify Buy TC from Agent in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Buy TC from Agent screen is displayed.

Figure 3-1 Buy TC from Agent

2. On the Buy TC from Agent screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-1 Buy TC from Agent - Field Description

Field Description
TC Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify
the TC Amount.
Issuer Code Click the search icon, and select the issuer code from the list
of values.

Note:
The list of values provides the issuer codes
maintained in the Issuer Code Maintenance
screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified issuer code.

3-2
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Agent

Table 3-1 (Cont.) Buy TC from Agent - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the narrative as Buy TC From Agent, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Buy TC.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, the TC position
(TC Inflow) is updated to the branch vault (vault ID that is opened) for the
combination of Issuer code, TC Currency, TC Denom Code, and Series.
In addition, during transaction completion, the system creates individual TC
records for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code,
Series, and TC Number with TC status as Null.

• Add TC Denominations to Buy TC

You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data
segment.

3.1.1 Add TC Denominations to Buy TC

You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 3-2 TC Denominations

To add the denomination details:

On the TC Denominations data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

3-3
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Head Office

Table 3-2 TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Specify the TC denomination code from the list of values.
Currency Displays the default TC Currency.
Series Specify the series of TC denomination code that needs to be
purchased from the agent.

Note:
This field accepts alphanumeric
values.

Count Specify the units.

Start Number Specify the start number of the series.
End Number Displays the end number, which is the sum of the start number
and the count.
TC Amount Displays the TC Amount, which is the product of the
denomination and the count.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount along with the currency.
Denomination Amount Displays the denomination amount along with the currency.

3.2 Buy TC from Head Office

The Buy TC from HO screen is used to buy TC from head office into branch’s vault.
Only a Vault user can access this screen.
To buy TC from head office:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Buy TC from HO or specify Buy TC from HO in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Buy TC from HO screen is displayed.

Figure 3-3 Buy TC from HO

2. On the Buy TC from HO screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

3-4
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Vault

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-3 Buy TC from HO - Field Description

Field Description
TC Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify the TC
Amount.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the issuer codes maintained in
the Issuer Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified issuer code.
Narrative Displays the narrative as Buy TC From HO, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Buy TC.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, the TC position
(TC Inflow) is updated to the branch vault (vault ID that is opened) for the
combination of Issuer code, TC Currency, TC Denom Code, and Series.
In addition, during transaction completion, the system creates individual TC
records for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code,
Series, and TC Number with TC status as Null.

3.3 Buy TC from Vault

The Buy TC from Vault screen is used to buy TC from the vault to transfer TCs into logged-
in Teller’s Till. Only a Teller can access this screen.
To buy TC from the vault:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Buy TC
from Vault or specify Buy TC from Vault in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Buy TC from Vault screen is displayed.

3-5
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Vault

Figure 3-4 Buy TC from Vault

2. On the Buy TC from Vault screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-4 Buy TC from Vault - Field Description

Field Description
TC Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify
the TC Amount.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the issuer codes
maintained in the Issuer Code Maintenance
screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified issuer code.
Narrative Displays the narrative as Buy TC From Vault, and it can be
modified.

3. Click on the TC Denominations segment.

The TC Denominations segment is displayed.

Figure 3-5 TC Denominations

4. In the TC Denominations segment, specify the fields. For more information on

fields, refer to the field description table.

3-6
 Chapter 3
Buy TC from Vault

Table 3-5 TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Specify the TC denomination code from the list of values.
Currency Displays the default TC Currency.
Series Specify the series of the TC denomination code that needs to be
purchased from the Vault.

Note:
The list of values contains the valid TC series that are
available with Vault. On click of LOV, the search criterion
field will have Series, and the result criterion will display
the Series and Start Number.

Count Specify the count of the TC.

Start Number Displays the starting number of the series.

Note:
Based on the series selected, the system will populate
the start number available for the combination of
Currency, TC Denom Code, and Series.

End Number Displays the end number, which is the sum of the start number and
the count.
TC Amount Displays the TC Amount, which is the product of the denomination
and the count.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount along with the currency.
Denomination Amount Displays the denomination amount along with the currency.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, the TC position
(TC Outflow) is updated to the branch vault, and TC Inflow is updated to the
logged-in Teller for the combination of Issuer Code, TC Currency, TC denom
Code, and Series to the extent of TC denomination units being purchased.
In addition, during transaction completion, the system updates the TC status as
Unused for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code,
Series, and TC Number.

3-7
 Chapter 3
Return TC to Vault

3.4 Return TC to Vault

The Teller can use the Return TC to Vault screen to return TC to the branch’s vault.
To sell TC to the branch’s vault:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Return TC to Vault or specify Return TC to Vault in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Return TC to Vault screen is displayed.

Figure 3-6 Return TC to Vault

2. On the Return TC to Vault screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-6 Return TC to Vault - Field Description

Field Description
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and
specify the TC Amount.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the
logged-in branch and the issuer codes maintained
in the Issuer Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
Narrative Displays the narrative as Sell TC to Vault, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Return TC.

3-8
 Chapter 3
Return TC to Vault

4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the TC position (TC outflow) is decreased for logged-in Teller
ID, and the TC Position (TC Inflow) is incremented for Vault ID of the branch. It is
performed for the combination of Issuer Code, TC Currency, TC Denom code, and Series
to the extent of TC denomination units being purchased.
In addition, during transaction completion, the system updates the TC Status as Null for
the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code, Series, and TC Number.
• Add TC Denominations to Return TC
You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data
segment.

3.4.1 Add TC Denominations to Return TC

You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 3-7 TC Denominations

To add the denomination details:

On the TC Denominations data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 3-7 TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Specify the TC denomination code from the list of values.
Currency Displays the default TC currency.
Series Specify the series of the TC Denom Code that is being purchased from
the agent.
Count Specify the count of the TC that needs to be sold.

3-9
 Chapter 3
Return TC to HO

Table 3-7 (Cont.) TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Start Number Display the starting number of the series.

Note:
Based on the series selected, the system
will populate the Start Number available
for the combination of Currency, TC
Denom Code, and Series.

End Number Displays the end number, which is the sum of start number and the
count.
TC Amount Displays the TC Amount, which is the product of the denomination and
the count.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount along with the currency.
Denomination Amount Displays the denomination amount along with the currency.

3.5 Return TC to HO
The Return TC to HO screen is used to sell TC to the HO, and only a Vault Teller can
access this screen.
To sell TC to the HO:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Return TC to HO or specify Return TC to HO in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Sale TC to HO screen is displayed.

Figure 3-8 Sale TC to HO

2. On the Sale TC to HO screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3-10
 Chapter 3
Buy Cash from Currency Chest

Table 3-8 Sale TC to HO - Field Description

Field Description
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and specify the
TC Amount.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the logged-in
branch and the issuer codes maintained in the Issuer
Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
Narrative Displays the narrative as Return TC to HO, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Return TC.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, the TC position
(TC outflow) is decreased for the Vault ID for the combination of Issuer Code,
TC Currency, TC Denom code, and Series to the extent of TC denomination
units being purchased.

3.6 Buy Cash from Currency Chest

The Vault Teller can use this screen to get cash from the currency chest after opening the
vault batch and deposit it into the vault. Once the cash is transferred from the currency chest,
the system updates the cash position.
To buy cash from the currency chest:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Buy
Cash from Ccy Chest.
The Buy Cash from Currency Chest screen is displayed.

3-11
 Chapter 3
Buy Cash from Currency Chest

Figure 3-9 Buy Cash from Currency Chest

2. On the Buy Cash from Currency Chest screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-9 Buy Cash from Currency Chest - Field Description

Field Description
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to buy from Currency
Chest.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of
the branch. You can select another currency from
the drop-down values in which cash needs to be
bought from the currency chest.

Narrative Displays the default narrative Buy Cash from Currency

Chest, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash
balance of the Vault Teller is updated successfully.

3-12
 Chapter 3
Sell Cash to Currency Chest

3.7 Sell Cash to Currency Chest

The Vault Teller can use this screen to sell cash to the Central Bank from the vault after all
the Tellers have sold the additional cash to the Vault Teller.
The Vault Teller can close the batch only if the excess cash is not available at the end of the
day.
To sell cash to currency chest:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Sell Cash
to Ccy Chest or specify Sell Cash to Ccy Chest in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Sell Cash to Currency Chest screen is displayed.

Figure 3-10 Sell Cash to Currency Chest

2. On the Sell Cash to Currency Chest screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-10 Sell Cash to Currency Chest - Field Description

Field Description
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to sell to the Currency Chest.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of the
branch. The user can select another currency from the
drop-down values in which cash needs to be sold to the
currency chest.

3-13
 Chapter 3
Buy Cash from Vault

Table 3-10 (Cont.) Sell Cash to Currency Chest - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the default narrative Sell Cash to Currency
Chest, and it can be modified.
3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash
balance of the Vault Teller is updated successfully.

3.8 Buy Cash from Vault

The Teller can use the Buy Cash from Vault screen to get cash from the vault.
To get cash from the vault:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Buy Cash from Vault or specify Buy Cash from Vault in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Buy Cash from Vault screen is displayed.

Figure 3-11 Buy Cash from Vault

2. On the Buy Cash from Vault screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3-14
 Chapter 3
Sell Cash to Vault

Table 3-11 Buy Cash from Vault - Field Description

Field Description
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to transfer from the vault to the
till of the logged-in Teller.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of the
branch. The user can select another currency from the
drop-down values in which cash needs to be transferred
from the vault.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Transfer Cash from Vault, and it
can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the accounting entries (for
example, Dr Teller Cash GL & Cr Vault Cash GL) for the transaction will be
handed off to FCUBS based on the settlement definition maintained for the
function code. Also, the cash positions of the Teller are increased and the Vault
Teller is decreased successfully.
If the cash position of the Vault Teller is less than the total cash requested by
the Teller:
• The system displays an error message
• The Teller needs to perform this transaction after the vault is replenished
sufficiently

3.9 Sell Cash to Vault

The Teller can use the Sell Cash to Vault screen to sell cash to the vault. It is used only
when the cash held exceeds the limit set at the template level for any currency.
For transferring cash to the vault, the Teller batch and the Vault batch need to be opened for
the posting date.
To sell cash to the vault:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Sell Cash
to Vault or specify Sell Cash to Vault in the search icon bar and select the screen.

3-15
 Chapter 3
Sell Cash to Vault

The Sell Cash to Vault screen is displayed.

Figure 3-12 Sell Cash to Vault

2. On the Sell Cash to Vault screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-12 Sell Cash to Vault - Field Description

Field Description
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to transfer to the vault
from the till of the logged-in Teller.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of
the branch. The user can select another currency
from the drop-down values in which cash needs to
be transferred to the vault.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Transfer Cash to Vault, and

it can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

3-16
 Chapter 3
Buy Cash from Till

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the accounting entries (for
example, Dr Vault Cash GL & Cr Teller Cash GL) for the transaction will be
handed off to FCUBS based on the settlement definition maintained for the
function code. Also, the cash balance of the Teller is decreased and the Vault
Teller is increased successfully.

3.10 Buy Cash from Till

The Teller can use this screen to transfer cash from another Teller in case of insufficient funds
available in the till to perform the customer cash transactions.
Teller can request the required cash in a specific currency, and on completing this
transaction, the system updates the cash position of both the Tellers to the extent of the
transaction amount.
To transfer cash from another Teller's till:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click Buy
Cash from Till or specify Buy Cash from Till in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Buy Cash from Till screen is displayed.

Figure 3-13 Buy Cash from Till

2. On the Buy Cash from Till screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3-17
 Chapter 3
Sell Cash to Till

Table 3-13 Buy Cash from Till - Field Description

Field Description
Teller ID Displays the Teller ID from where the cash needs to be
transferred.
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to transfer from the
specified Teller ID to the till of logged-in Teller.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of
the branch. You can select another currency from
the drop-down values in which cash needs to be
transferred.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Transfer Cash from Till, and
it can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash
balance of both the Tellers is updated successfully.

3.11 Sell Cash to Till

The Teller can use the Sell Cash to Till screen to transfer cash to another Teller's Till
in case of excess funds available in the Till.
In addition, the Teller can request to transfer from the Till in a specific currency. Once
the transaction is completed, the system updates the cash position of both the Tellers
to the extent of the transaction amount.
To sell cash to the Till:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Sell Cash to Till or specify Sell Cash to Till in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Sell Cash to Till screen is displayed.

3-18
 Chapter 3
Sell Cash to Till

Figure 3-14 Sell Cash to Till

2. On the Sell Cash to Till screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-14 Sell Cash to Till - Field Description

Field Description
Teller ID Displays the Teller ID from which the cash needs to be transferred.
Total Required Cash Specify the total cash that you need to transfer to the specified
Teller ID from the till of the logged-in Teller.

Note:
By default, the system displays the local currency of the
branch. The user can select another currency from the
drop-down values in which the cash needs to be
transferred.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Transfer Cash to Till, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash balance of both the
Tellers is updated successfully.

3-19
 Chapter 3
Denomination Exchange

3.12 Denomination Exchange

The Teller can use the Denomination Exchange screen to exchange the currency
denominations.
The exchange can be performed for the internal purpose of the bank or based on the
customer’s request. This transaction involves only denomination exchange from the
Till. The total value in the Till remains the same, and accounting entries are not posted
for this exchange. However, the denomination count in the Till changes, and hence it
needs to be updated.
To exchange the currency denominations:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Denomination Exchange or specify Denomination Exchange in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Denomination Exchange screen is displayed.

Figure 3-15 Denomination Exchange

2. On the Denomination Exchange screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-15 Denomination Exchange - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
Transaction Currency Specify the currency for which the denominations are to be
exchanged.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

3-20
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash balance of both the
Tellers is updated successfully.

3.13 Inter Branch Transactions

The interbranch transactions are used to send a request from a bank branch to the central
cash depository, for pickup or delivery of cash.
A branch can request delivery of cash when it is having a shortage of cash and request for
pickup of cash when it has excess cash. The process steps to request cash delivery and
pickup are explained below.
The process steps for cash delivery are as follows:
1. The requesting branch sends a request for delivery of cash using the 1409 screen.
2. The remitting branch queries for the requests and accepts the request using the 1409
screen.
3. On the delivery date, the remitting branch books a transaction using the 1410 screen with
the denominations being sent and generated.
4. On the delivery date, the remitting branch books a transaction input using the 1410
screen, generates advice, and sends money to the requesting branch.
5. On receiving money and advice, the requesting branch uses the 1411 screen to verify the
denominations and save the liquidation.
The process steps for cash pickup are as follows:
1. The requesting branch sends a request for the pickup of cash using the 1409 screen.
2. The receiving branch queries for the requests and accepts the request using the 1409
screen.
3. On the date of cash pickup, the receiving branch generates advice and sends it to
requesting branch.
4. The requesting branch receives the advice and books the transaction using the 1410
screen.
5. The requesting branch generates the advice and sends money and advice to the
receiving branch.
6. The receiving branch receives the money and advice and verifies and liquidates the
request using the 1411 screen.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Inter Branch Transaction Request
The Inter Branch Transaction Request screen is used to create the inter-branch cash
pickup or cash delivery requests.
• Inter Branch Transaction Input
The Inter Branch Transaction Input screen is used for a branch to act as a remitting
branch to book an input transaction for cash delivery.

3-21
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

• Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation

The receiving branch can use the Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation screen
to receive the cash, verify the advice with denomination units, and liquidate the
request.

3.13.1 Inter Branch Transaction Request

The Inter Branch Transaction Request screen is used to create the inter-branch
cash pickup or cash delivery requests.
To create the inter-branch transaction request:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Inter Branch Txn Req or specify Inter Branch Txn Req in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Inter Branch Transaction Request screen is displayed.

Figure 3-16 Inter Branch Transaction Request

2. On the Inter Branch Transaction Request screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-16 Inter Branch Transaction Request - Field Description

Field Description
New Click this button to create a new inter branch transaction and
generate the inter branch request reference number.
Query Click Query to enable the field Inter Branch Request
Reference.

3-22
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

Table 3-16 (Cont.) Inter Branch Transaction Request - Field Description

Field Description
Inter Branch Request The following conditions apply to this field:
Reference • If you click New, the request reference number for the
inter branch transaction is displayed.
• If you click Query, select the inter branch request
reference from the list of values. The list of values fetches
only the reference numbers that are saved and not
submitted.
Transaction Amount Select the transaction currency from the option list. Specify the
amount that needs to be transferred.
Requesting Branch Displays the branch code of requesting branch.
Requesting Branch Displays the name of the branch code specified.
Description
To Branch Select the branch code to which the request is being made.
To Branch Description Displays the name of the specified To Branch.
Request Type Select from the following request types:
• Cash Delivery - when the branch is in short of cash.
• Cash Pickup - when the branch has excess cash.
Request Date Displays the current date as the request date.
Cash Delivery/Pickup Specify the date of cash delivery/pickup.
Date

Note:
By default, the current system date is displayed,
and it can be modified.

Request Status Select the status of the request. The drop-down list shows the
following options:
• Request - to create a new request.
• Accept - to accept a request received.
• Pending - system-defined status indicating that the
request has been sent but not accepted.
• Initiated - system-defined status indicating that the
request has been accepted and initiated.
• Liquidated - system-defined status indicating that the
request has been processed and liquidated.
Narrative Specify the remarks, if any.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
The request is sent to the receiving/remitting branch for further processing.

3-23
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

Note:
The destination branch can access the same screen to accept or reject
the request.

3.13.2 Inter Branch Transaction Input

The Inter Branch Transaction Input screen is used for a branch to act as a remitting
branch to book an input transaction for cash delivery.
It is also used for the branch to act as a receiving branch to generate the advice and
send it to the requesting branch. This option is allowed only after the destination
branch has accepted the inter-branch transaction request.
To book an inter-branch transaction input:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Inter Branch Txn Input or specify Inter Branch Txn Input in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Inter Branch Transaction Input screen is displayed.

Figure 3-17 Inter Branch Transaction Input

2. On the Inter Branch Transaction Input screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3-24
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

Table 3-17 Inter Branch Transaction Input - Field Description

Field Description
Inter Branch Request Select the request reference from the list of values.
Reference
Query Click Query to fetch and populate the request details.
From Branch Displays the branch code of From Branch. The following values are
applied based on the request type in the Inter Branch Transaction
Request screen:
• For Cash Delivery, the To Branch in the Inter Branch
Transaction Request screen is populated in this field.
• For Cash Pickup, the Requesting Branch in the Inter
Branch Transaction Request screen is populated in this field.
From Branch Description Displays the description of the From Branch.
From Vault ID Displays the Vault user of the specified From Branch.
To Branch Displays the branch code of To Branch. The following values are
applied based on the request type in the Inter Branch Transaction
Request screen:
• For Cash Delivery, the Requesting Branch in the Inter
Branch Transaction Request screen is populated in this field.
• For Cash Pickup, the To Branch in Inter Branch
Transaction Request screen is populated in this field.
To Branch Description Displays the description of specified To Branch.
To Vault ID Displays the Vault user of To Branch.
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and transaction amount based on
the request reference.
Requested Date Displays the date on which the transaction is requested.
Narrative Specify the remarks, if any.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
The request is sent to the requesting branch for further processing.

Note:
The request status in the Inter Branch Transaction Request screen will be
internally updated to Initiated for the related request reference number. In
addition, the system will post the accounting entries (for example, Dr Sending
Branch Inter Branch Transit GL & Cr Sending Branch Vault GL) for the Inter
Branch Input transaction as per the settlement definition maintained for the
function code, and advice will be generated on transaction completion.

3-25
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

3.13.3 Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation

The receiving branch can use the Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation screen to
receive the cash, verify the advice with denomination units, and liquidate the request.
This screen can be accessed by:
• The requesting branch for cash delivery
• The receiving branch for cash pickup
To perform the inter-branch transaction liquidation:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Till-Vault Operations, click
Inter Branch Txn Liq or specify Inter Branch Txn Liq in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation screen is displayed.

Figure 3-18 Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation

2. On the Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 3-18 Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation - Field Description

Field Description
Inter Branch Request Select the request reference from the list of values.
Reference
Query Click Query to fetch and populate the request details.
From Branch Displays the branch code of From Branch.

3-26
 Chapter 3
Inter Branch Transactions

Table 3-18 (Cont.) Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation - Field Description

Field Description
From Branch Displays the description of the From Branch.
Description
From Vault ID Displays the Vault user of the specified From Branch.
To Branch Displays the branch code of To Branch.
To Branch Description Displays the description of specified To Branch.
To Vault ID Displays the Vault user of To Branch.
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and transaction amount
based on the request reference.
Requested Date Displays the date on which the transaction is requested.
Narrative Specify the remarks, if any.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
The system updates the request reference as Liquidated in the Inter Branch
Transaction Request screen for the related request reference.

Note:
The system will post the accounting entries (for example, Dr Receiving Branch
Vault Transit GL & Cr Sending Branch Inter Branch Transit GL) for the Inter
Branch Input transaction as per the settlement definition maintained for the
function code.
As the liquidation transaction accounting involves two different branches, the
corresponding IB position entries will be processed by FCUBS accordingly.

3-27
4
Customer Transactions
The Teller can use Customer Transactions to perform financial transactions for customer
accounts.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cash Deposit
The Cash Deposit screen is used to deposit the cash in a CASA. Cash can be deposited
in either account currency or any foreign currency that is allowed.
• Cash Withdrawal
The Cash Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw funds from the CASA account of the
customer.
• Cheque Withdrawal
The Cheque Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw cash from the CASA account of the
customer against the in-house cheque.
• FX Sale Against Account
The Foreign Exchange (FX) Sale Against Account screen is used to sell the foreign
currency from the branch through the CASA account.
• FX Sale Against Walk-in
The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is used to sell a foreign currency to a walk-in
customer in return for the equivalent amount received in the local currency.
• FX Purchase Against Account
The FX Purchase Against Account screen is used to purchase foreign currency from
the branch through the CASA account.
• FX Purchase Against Walk-in
The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is used to buy a foreign currency from a walk-
in customer in return for the equivalent amount in the local currency.
• Close Out Withdrawal
The Close Out Withdrawal screen to initiate an account closure and close the CASA
account by either dispersing the cash to the customer or by account transfer or by issuing
Bankers Cheque.
• Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode
The Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode screen is used to close the CASA account by
multi-mode payout options, which include cash, account transfer, and BC. This screen
can be used only when the closeout withdrawal needs to be done in multiple payout
modes.
• Safe Deposit Rental By Cash
The Teller can use the Safe Deposit Rental By Cash screen to make payment by cash
for the safe deposit locker of the customer.
• Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash
The Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash screen is used to make payment for the
Recurring Deposit (RD) account of the customer by cash.

4-1
 Chapter 4
Cash Deposit

• F23C Tax Payment by Cash

The F23C Tax Payment By Cash screen is used to capture data related to the
F23C tax document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from
the customer.
• F24C Tax Payment By Cash
The F24C Payment Details screen is used to capture data related to the F24C tax
document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from the
customer.
• F23 Tax Payment by Account
The F23 Tax Payment by Account screen is used to capture data related to the
F23 tax document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from
the customer.
• F24 Tax Payment By Account
The F24 Tax Payment By Account screen is used to capture data related to the
F24 tax document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by account
from the customer.

4.1 Cash Deposit

The Cash Deposit screen is used to deposit the cash in a CASA. Cash can be
deposited in either account currency or any foreign currency that is allowed.
Whenever any transaction in foreign currency is posted to the account, it is converted
to the account currency based on the maintained exchange rate for the transaction.
To deposit cash:
1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Customer
Transaction, click Cash Deposit or specify the Cash Deposit in the search icon
bar.
The Cash Deposit screen is displayed.

4-2
 Chapter 4
Cash Deposit

Figure 4-1 Cash Deposit

2. On the Cash Deposit screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-1 Cash Deposit - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify a valid account number for the customer. When you press
the Tab key, the corresponding account information will be displayed
in the Customer Information widget.

Note:
In addition, you can use Oracle Banking Virtual
Accounts. These Virtual Accounts are used as a routing
account to credit the underlying physical account.
The system displays an override or error message on the
tab out of Account Number based on the account
dormancy parameters.

4-3
 Chapter 4
Cash Deposit

Table 4-1 (Cont.) Cash Deposit - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch. You can also select other
transaction currencies from the drop-down values.
Specify the transaction amount that needs to be credited to the
customer account.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate, if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into account currency and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the transaction amount converted in terms of account

amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

4-4
 Chapter 4
Cash Deposit

Table 4-1 (Cont.) Cash Deposit - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Deposit, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
Once you submit the transaction, the system validates the following:
• Mandatory fields
• Allowed minimum/maximum limit amount for the user ID
• Allowed currency for Teller user ID
• Till balance and branch breaching limit
• Function code preferences
• Duplicate transactions
If any of the validation fails, the system will prompt appropriate information, warning, or
error message. For more information, refer to the following steps:
• If an information message is prompted, click OK to confirm and complete the
transaction.
• If a warning message is prompted, the system will move the transaction for
authorization. Once approved, the transaction is moved to Teller Electronic Journal
for completion. Refer to authorization procedures to know more about authorization
processing.
• If any validation error is prompted, you need to update the details to fix the error and
re-submit the transaction.
• If any other error message is prompted, the transaction is discarded and does not get
saved.
• If you click Close or Cancel after specifying the transaction details, then the data will
not persist.
When the Teller completes the transaction, the corresponding Teller's cash position is
updated.
The Transaction Completed Successfully information message is displayed.

4-5
 Chapter 4
Cash Deposit

• Add Charge Details

The Charge Details segment is used to view the computed charge details based
on the charge maintenance defined for the function code.

4.1.1 Add Charge Details

The Charge Details segment is used to view the computed charge details based on
the charge maintenance defined for the function code.
Make sure that the main transaction details are added to the transaction screen.
This segment is applicable for all Financial Customer transactions. If no charge is
maintained for the combination, then the transaction is saved without any charges.

Figure 4-2 Charge Details

You can view or waive the computed charges. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Table 4-2 Charge Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charges in transaction currency (TCY) and
branch local currency (LCY).
Detailed View Displays the following charge details of each charge code:
• Charge Code
• Currency
• Charge Amount
• Waiver
• Charge By Cash
• Charge TCY
• Charge LCY
• Basis
• Min Charge
• Max Charge
• Price Rule Id
• Credit Account
• Debit Account
Charge Code The system defaults the charge components applicable to the
transaction.
Currency Displays the currency in which the charge has to be deducted.

4-6
 Chapter 4
Cash Withdrawal

Table 4-2 (Cont.) Charge Details - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Amount Displays the charge amount that needs to be deducted for the
corresponding charge component.

Note:
The charge amount can be modified
only if the field is enabled in the
Function Code Preferences
screen. The modified charge
amount will be validated against the
minimum and maximum charge
amount that can be configured at
the Charge Maintenance screen.
When an individual charge amount
is modified, the system will
recalculate all the dependent
charges.

Waiver If necessary, check this box against the charge component to

waive a certain charge for the customer.

Note:
When the Waiver is enabled, the
value under Charge Amount will be
waived and no charge accounting
entries will be passed. The charge
waiver can be enabled at individual
charge level without impacting other
linked charges. The minimum
charge amount configured at the
charge maintenance level, will not
be validated when the charge is
waived.

Charge By Cash Indicates whether the charges are to be collected by cash.

4.2 Cash Withdrawal

The Cash Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw funds from the CASA account of the
customer.
The withdrawal is subject to the availability of a sufficient balance or available credit limit.
When the transaction is performed, it updates the available balance in the CASA account
immediately.
To withdraw cash:

4-7
 Chapter 4
Cash Withdrawal

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
Cash Withdrawal or specify Cash Withdrawal in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Withdrawal screen is displayed.

Figure 4-3 Cash Withdrawal

2. On the Cash Withdrawal screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

4-8
 Chapter 4
Cash Withdrawal

Table 4-3 Cash Withdrawal - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify a valid customer account number.

Note:
When you press the Tab key, the corresponding account
information will be displayed in the Customer
Information widget.
The system displays an override or error message on the
tab out of Account Number based on the account
dormancy parameters.

Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch. You can also select
another currency from the drop-down values. Specify the
transaction amount that needs to be debited from the customer
account.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

4-9
 Chapter 4
Cash Withdrawal

Table 4-3 (Cont.) Cash Withdrawal - Field Description

Field Description
Account Amount Displays the transaction amount converted in terms of account
amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Withdrawal, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the cash is withdrawn successfully from the customer account. For more
information on transaction submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in
Cash Deposit.

4-10
 Chapter 4
Cheque Withdrawal

4.3 Cheque Withdrawal

The Cheque Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw cash from the CASA account of the
customer against the in-house cheque.
The withdrawal is subject to the availability of a sufficient balance or available credit limit. To
verify the signature for the transactions, you can click Verify button in the Customer
Information Widget. The signature verification is applicable for the transactions, which have
the Signature Verification Required option selected as Y at the Function Code
Preference level.
To withdraw cash through the in-house cheque:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click Cheque
Withdrawal or specify Cheque Withdrawal in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cheque Withdrawal screen is displayed.

Figure 4-4 Cheque Withdrawal

2. On the Cheque Withdrawal screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

4-11
 Chapter 4
Cheque Withdrawal

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-4 Cheque Withdrawal - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify a valid account number for the customer.

Note:
When you press the Tab key, the corresponding
account information will be displayed in the
Customer Information widget.
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch. You can also select
another currency from the drop-down list. Specify the
transaction amount that needs to be debited from the
customer account.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the customer account as
provided by the Customer.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Select the date on which the cheque has been issued from the
calendar option.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

4-12
 Chapter 4
Cheque Withdrawal

Table 4-4 (Cont.) Cheque Withdrawal - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Reject Code Select the reject code from the list of values, which are
maintained in the Reject Code Maintenance screen.

Note:
If the cheque withdrawal transaction needs to be
rejected, you can reject it by specifying the
appropriate reject code in this field. The transaction
can be rejected for one of the following reasons:
• Insufficient funds
• Signature mismatch
• Stale cheque

Reject Code Displays the description of the specified reject code.

Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into account currency and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the transaction amount converted in terms of account

amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Withdrawal, and it

can be modified.

4-13
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Account

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the cash is withdrawn successfully against the customer cheque. For
more information on transaction submission and validations, refer to
Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.4 FX Sale Against Account

The Foreign Exchange (FX) Sale Against Account screen is used to sell the foreign
currency from the branch through the CASA account.
This transaction is performed by debiting the corresponding account currency from the
CASA account.
To sell the foreign currency against CASA account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
FX Sale - Account or specify FX Sale - Account in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The FX Sale Against Account screen is displayed.

4-14
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Account

Figure 4-5 FX Sale Against Account

2. On the FX Sale Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

4-15
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Account

Table 4-5 FX Sale Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the CASA account to be debited for the foreign
currency sale from the adjacent option list.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Amount Sold Specify the currency and amount sold against the CASA
account. You can select the appropriate code from the
adjoining option list that displays all the currency codes
maintained in the system. The system also displays the
amount that is being sold.
Allow Denom Variance Select if the denomination-wise variance needs to be applied
for the transaction.

Note:
If the parameter at the function code indicator is set
as Y, this option will be selected by default and it
can be modified. If the parameter at the function
code indicator is set as N, then this option will be
disabled.

Beneficiary Name Displays the name of the beneficiary customer based on the
account number selected.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the type of identification provided by the customer from
the drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number provided by the customer.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate, if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

4-16
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Account

Table 4-5 (Cont.) FX Sale Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
(sale) currency into account currency and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Amount Received Displays the amount received and currency from the CASA
account.

Note:
The currency of the amount received defaults from
the CASA account currency. The amount received
will be calculated based on the Amount Sold and
the Exchange Rate. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount which is computed by the
system in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as FX Sale Against Account,

and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the FX Out Denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.

4-17
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Walk-in

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the foreign currency cash is withdrawn and the equivalent account
amount is debited. For more information on transaction submission and
validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.5 FX Sale Against Walk-in

The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is used to sell a foreign currency to a walk-in
customer in return for the equivalent amount received in the local currency.
To sell a foreign currency to the walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
FX Sale - Walk-in or specify FX Sale - Walk-in in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 4-6 FX Sale Against Walk-in

2. On the FX Sale Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

4-18
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Walk-in

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-6 FX Sale Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Amount Sold Select the applicable currency from the drop-down list and specify
the amount that needs to be sold to the walk-in customer.
Currency Received Select the currency that you have received from the customer in
return for the currency sold. You can select the appropriate code
from the adjoining option list that displays all the currency codes
maintained in the system.
Allow Denom Variance Select if the denomination-wise variance needs to be applied for the
transaction.

Note:
If the parameter at function code indicator is set as Y,
this option will be selected by default, and it can be
modified. If the parameter at the function code indicator
is set as N, then this option will be disabled.

Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary customer.

Beneficiary Address 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Beneficiary Address 4
Identification Type Select the type of identification provided by the customer from the
drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number provided by the customer.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

4-19
 Chapter 4
FX Sale Against Walk-in

Table 4-6 (Cont.) FX Sale Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Amount Received Displays the amount received and currency from the customer.

Note:
The currency of the amount received will be defaulted
from Currency Received. The amount received will be
calculated based on the Amount Sold and the
Exchange Rate. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as FX Sale (Walk-in), and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the FX In Denomination details. For information on the fields in the FX In
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Specify the FX Out Denomination details. For information on the fields in the FX
Out Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

4-20
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Account

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the teller cash
position to the equivalent of "Sold currency" is deducted, and "Received
currency" is incremented. For more information on transaction submission and
validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.6 FX Purchase Against Account

The FX Purchase Against Account screen is used to purchase foreign currency from the
branch through the CASA account.
This transaction is performed by crediting the corresponding amount to the CASA account.
To purchase foreign currency against the CASA account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click FX
Purchase - Account or specify FX Purchase - Account in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The FX Purchase Against Account screen is displayed.

4-21
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Account

Figure 4-7 FX Purchase Against Account

2. On the FX Purchase Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

4-22
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Account

Table 4-7 FX Purchase Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the CASA account number to be credited for the foreign
currency purchase.

Note:
In addition, you can use Oracle Banking Virtual
Accounts. These Virtual Accounts are used as a routing
account to credit the underlying physical account.
The system displays an override or error message on the
tab out of Account Number based on the account
dormancy parameters.

Amount Bought Select the applicable currency from the drop-down list, and specify
the amount that needs to be bought from the customer.
Allow Denom Variance Select if the denomination-wise variance needs to be applied for the
transaction.

Note:
If the parameter at the function code indicator is set as Y,
this option will be selected by default, and it can be
modified. If the parameter at function code indicator is set
as N, then this option will be disabled.

Beneficiary Name Displays the name of the beneficiary customer based on the
account number provided.
Beneficiary Address 1 to Displays the address of the beneficiary.
Beneficiary Address 4
Identification Type Select the type of identification provided by the customer from the
drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number provided by the customer.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

4-23
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Account

Table 4-7 (Cont.) FX Purchase Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Amount Paid Displays the amount paid and currency to the CASA account.

Note:
The currency of the amount paid is defaulted from the
account currency. The Amount Paid will be calculated
based on the Amount Bought and the Exchange Rate.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as FX Purchase Against Account,

and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the FX In Denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.

4-24
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Walk-in

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the teller's cash
position gets incremented based on the amount bought.
In addition, the corresponding foreign currency cash is deposited for an
equivalent amount of credit in the customer's account. For more information on
transaction submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.7 FX Purchase Against Walk-in

The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is used to buy a foreign currency from a walk-in
customer in return for the equivalent amount in the local currency.
To buy a foreign currency from a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click FX
Purchase - Walk-in or specify FX Purchase - Walk-in in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 4-8 FX Purchase Against Walk-in

4-25
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Walk-in

2. On the FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-8 FX Purchase Against Walk-in

Field Description
Amount Bought Select the applicable currency from the drop-down list, and
specify the amount bought from the walk-in customer.
Currency Paid Select the currency that you have paid to the walk-in customer.

Note:
You can select the appropriate code from the list of
values that displays all the currency codes
maintained in the system.

Allow Denom Variance Select if the denomination-wise variance needs to be applied

for the transaction.

Note:
If the parameter at function code indicator is set as
Y, this option will be selected by default, and it can
be modified. If the parameter at the function code
indicator is set as N, then this option will be
disabled.

Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary walk-in customer.

Beneficiary Address 1 Specify the address of the beneficiary walk-in customer.
to Beneficiary Address
4
Identification Type Select the type of identification provided by the walk-in
customer from the drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number provided by the walk-in
customer.

4-26
 Chapter 4
FX Purchase Against Walk-in

Table 4-8 (Cont.) FX Purchase Against Walk-in

Field Description
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Amount Paid Displays the amount paid and currency to the customer.

Note:
The currency of the amount paid is defaulted from
the received currency. The Amount Paid will be
calculated based on the Amount Bought and the
Exchange Rate. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

4-27
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Table 4-8 (Cont.) FX Purchase Against Walk-in

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as FX Purchase (Walk-in), and

it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the FX In Denomination details. For information on the fields in the FX In
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Specify the FX Out Denomination details. For information on the fields in the FX
Out Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the teller cash position is updated based on the currency of the Amount
Bought and the Amount Paid fields. For more information on
transaction submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.8 Close Out Withdrawal

The Close Out Withdrawal screen to initiate an account closure and close the CASA
account by either dispersing the cash to the customer or by account transfer or by
issuing Bankers Cheque.
The balance amount displayed is only the available balance from FLEXCUBE
Universal Banking and Oracle Banking Branch does not consider the closeout
withdrawal charges configured in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking. In case charges are
required to be displayed in Oracle Banking Branch, Oracle Banking Branch also
supports charges which can be configured.
To close the CASA account by either dispersing the cash to the customer or by
account transfer or by issuing Bankers Cheque:

4-28
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click Close
Out Withdrawal or specify Close Out Withdrawal in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Close Out Withdrawal screen is displayed.

Figure 4-9 Close Out Withdrawal - New

2. On the Close Out Withdrawal screen, specify fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 4-9 Close Out Withdrawal - New

Field Description
Customer Account Specify the account number for which the account closure to be
requested.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message on the
tab out of Account Number based on the account
dormancy parameters.

Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.

IC Liquidate Click this button to fetch the details of account amount.
Account Amount Displays the account balance in account currency.
Narrative Displays the default narrative Close Out Withdrawal and it can be
modified.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

4-29
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, it
will verify if IC liquidation is completed for the account. Once the IC
liquidation is done, the transaction details are handed off to the CASA
module in the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the account closure
process. During account closure process, the closure amount will be
parked in the intermediary suspense GL specified during transaction
request handoff.
Maintain Close mode as CASH and linked product as ZRCD in Account
Closing Maintenance (STDCLSMD) in FCUBS. This maintenance will
ensure the funds are parked to the respective suspense GL during the
account closure process at FCUBS.

4. Click Query.
The Close Out Withdrawal - Query screen is displayed.

Figure 4-10 Close Out Withdrawal - Query Transaction

5. On the Close Out Withdrawal screen, specify fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-10 Close Out Withdrawal

Field Description
Transaction Reference Specify the transaction reference number for which the closure
Number is initiated.
Customer Account Displays the customer account number.
Account Amount Displays the account balance in account currency.

4-30
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Table 4-10 (Cont.) Close Out Withdrawal

Field Description
Close Mode Select the close mode from the following drop-down values:
• Account
For more information, refer to Figure 4-11
• Cash
For more information, refer to Figure 4-12
• Bankers Cheque
For more information, refer to Figure 4-13
Narrative Displays the default narrative Close Out Withdrawal and it
can be modified.

Figure 4-11 Close Out Withdrawal by Account

On the Close Out Withdrawal by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-11 Close Out Withdrawal by Account Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Reference Displays the transaction reference number for which the closure is
Number initiated.
Close Account Displays the customer account number.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message on the
tab out of Account Number based on the account
dormancy parameters.

Account Amount Displays the account balance in account currency.

Close Mode Displays the close mode as By Account.

4-31
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Table 4-11 (Cont.) Close Out Withdrawal by Account Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Credit Account Specify the account number to which the funds need to be
transferred during the account closure.
Credit Account Branch Displays the branch code of the offset account.
Credit Account Name Displays the name of the offset account.
Credit Account Amount Displays the offset account amount along with account currency.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate based on the Account Currency and
Offset Account Currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Close Out Withdrawal, and it can
be modified.

Figure 4-12 Close Out Withdrawal by Cash

On the Close Out Withdrawal by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-12 Close Out Withdrawal by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Reference Displays the transaction reference number for which the
Number closure is initiated.

4-32
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Table 4-12 (Cont.) Close Out Withdrawal by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Account Displays the account number for which the account closure is
to be requested.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Account Amount Displays the account balance in account currency.

Close Mode Displays the close mode as By Cash.
Transaction Amount Specify the currency in which the customer requested the
cash. The system displays the derived transaction amount
based on the exchange rate fetched using account currency
and transaction currency. The transaction amount is the
account amount deducted with total charges.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate based on the account currency
and offset account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Close Out Withdrawal, and it

can be modified.

Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.

4-33
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal

Figure 4-13 Close Out Withdrawal - Bankers Cheque

On the Close Out Withdrawal by Bankers Cheque screen, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-13 Close Out Withdrawal by Bankers Cheque - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Reference Displays the transaction reference number for which the
Number closure is initiated.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Account Number Displays the account number for which the account closure is
to be requested.
Account Amount Displays the account balance in account currency.
Close Mode Displays the close mode as By Bankers Cheque.
Issue Branch Displays the issuing branch of the banker's cheque.
BC Amount Displays the account currency and account balance. You can
also modify the account currency.
Instrument Number Specify the instrument number.
MICR Number Specify the MICR number.
Payee Name Specify the payee name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4

4-34
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode

Table 4-13 (Cont.) Close Out Withdrawal by Bankers Cheque - Field

Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Close Out Withdrawal, and it

can be modified.

Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.

4.9 Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode

The Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode screen is used to close the CASA account by
multi-mode payout options, which include cash, account transfer, and BC. This screen can be
used only when the closeout withdrawal needs to be done in multiple payout modes.
The balance amount displayed is only the available balance from FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking and Oracle Banking Branch does not consider the closeout withdrawal charges
configured in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking. In case charges are required to be displayed in
Oracle Banking Branch, Oracle Banking Branch also supports charges which can be
configured.
To close the CASA account by multi-mode payout options:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click Close
Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode or specify Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode screen is displayed.

4-35
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode

Figure 4-14 Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode

2. On the Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-14 Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode - Field Description

Field Description
Close Account Specify the account number, which needs to be closed.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Fetch Balance Click Fetch Balance to fetch and display the account amount.
Account Amount Displays the account amount.
Payout Type Select the payout type from the following drop-down values:
• Account – If this option is selected, the user needs to
specify the Offset Account, to which the transfer is to be
made. Based on the specified offset account number, the
system will default the Offset Branch and Offset
Currency fields.
• Cash – If this option is selected, the user needs to
disburse the cash in the account currency.
• Bankers Cheque - If this option is selected, either the
field Instrument Number is populated or the teller can
input the value. On submission, the system will validate
the instrument number if inputted or derive the instrument
number in case of a null value. In addition, the user needs
to capture the BC-related details in the Bankers Cheque
Details data segment. This data segment is mandatory
only if the Payout Type is selected as Bankers Cheque.

4-36
 Chapter 4
Close Out Withdrawal by Multi-Mode

Table 4-14 (Cont.) Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode - Field Description

Field Description
Percentage Specify the amount of redemption for the payout type selected.

Note:
Based on the percentage input, the system will
derive the amount to be paid out.

Amount Specify the amount that needs to be withdrawn in the payout

type selected.
Instrument Number Specify the BC number.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Payout Type is
selected as Bankers Cheque.

Issuing Branch Displays the branch code of the specified account number.
Offset Account Specify the account number to which the payout amount
needs to be transferred.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Payout Type is
selected as Account.

Offset Branch Displays the branch of the specified offset account number.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Payout Type is
selected as Account.

Offset Currency Displays the currency of the specified offset account number.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Payout Type is
selected as Account.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Close Out Withdrawal by

Multimode, and it can be modified.

4-37
 Chapter 4
Safe Deposit Rental By Cash

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the transaction details are handed off to the CASA module in the
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the account closure process.
If the account balance is credited to an intermediary bridge GL, the
transaction status will be changed from Pending to Completed.
Based on the payout options, the corresponding transaction will be
completed successfully.

4.10 Safe Deposit Rental By Cash

The Teller can use the Safe Deposit Rental By Cash screen to make payment by
cash for the safe deposit locker of the customer.
To make payment for the safe deposit locker:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
Safe Deposit Rental By Cash or specify Safe Deposit Rental By Cash in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Safe Deposit Rental By Cash screen is displayed.

4-38
 Chapter 4
Safe Deposit Rental By Cash

Figure 4-15 Safe Deposit Rental By Cash

2. On the Safe Deposit Rental By Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-15 Safe Deposit Rental By Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Deposit Locker Specify the deposit locker number. When you press the Tab key, the
customer details and deposit locker details will be displayed in the
Customer Information widget.
Rental Amount Select the rental amount currency and specify the amount.

Note:
By default, the rental currency is displayed as locker
currency. If the Multi-Currency Configuration at
Function Code indicator level is set as Y, it can be
modified, and if it is N, then the default value cannot be
modified.

4-39
 Chapter 4
Safe Deposit Rental By Cash

Table 4-15 (Cont.) Safe Deposit Rental By Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the rental amount in locker account currency. This amount
will be derived based on the Rental Amount and Exchange Rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Safe Deposit Rental By Cash, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

4-40
 Chapter 4
Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the system will
hand off the details to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to create a
‘Payment’ transaction in the SD module. After the handoff status is successful
in the Oracle Banking Branch, the system will update the transaction status as
Completed and update the Till cash position (by increasing the till balance).

4.11 Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash

The Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash screen is used to make payment for the
Recurring Deposit (RD) account of the customer by cash.
To make payment against the RD account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click RD
Payment – Cash or specify RD Payment – Cash in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 4-16 Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash

2. On the Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

4-41
 Chapter 4
Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-16 Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
RD Account Specify a valid RD account number. When you press the Tab
key, the corresponding account information will be displayed in
the Customer Information widget.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Installments Specify the number of installments.

Transaction Amount Displays the local currency of the branch. Specify the payment
amount.

Note:
The user can select another currency from the drop-
down values.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

4-42
 Chapter 4
F23C Tax Payment by Cash

Table 4-16 (Cont.) Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Account Amount Displays the transaction amount converted in terms of account
amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as RD Payment by Cash, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash is
withdrawn successfully from the customer account. For more information on
transaction submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

4.12 F23C Tax Payment by Cash

The F23C Tax Payment By Cash screen is used to capture data related to the F23C tax
document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from the customer.
To perform F23C tax payment by cash:

4-43
 Chapter 4
F23C Tax Payment by Cash

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
F23C Tax Payment - Cash or specify F23C Tax Payment - Cash in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The F23C Tax Payment By Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 4-17 F23C Tax Payment By Cash

2. On the F23C Tax Payment By Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-17 F23C Tax Payment By Cash Screen - Field Description

Field Description
Reference Number Type Select the reference number types from the drop-down list.
The drop-down list shows the following values:
• Reference Number Available
• Reference Number Not Available
Reference Number Specify the reference number of the payment provided by the
Public Authority.
Office or Institute Code Specify the office or institute code that receives the payment.
Office or Institute Sub Specify the office or institute subcode that receives the
code payment.
Litigation Specify the kind of litigation.
For a Total Amount Displays the total tax amount.
Total Charge Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system in the local currency of the branch.

4-44
 Chapter 4
F23C Tax Payment by Cash

Table 4-17 (Cont.) F23C Tax Payment By Cash Screen - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate based on the Account Currency
and Offset Account Currency.
Payment Amount Displays the amount paid by the customer.

Note:
The currency of the amount paid defaults from the
received currency.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as F23 Tax by Cash, and it can
be modified.

3. Click on the Payment Data Details data segment.

The Payment Data Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 4-18 Payment Data Details

4. On the Payment Data Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-18 Payment Data Details - Field Description

Field Description
Tax Code Specify the Tax Code.
Amount Specify the tax amount.
Beneficiary Code Specify the beneficiary institute code.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
7. After you specify the Reference Number, click Pickup.
The system defaults the Elaboration Date in the section Reference Number Available
with the current system date. In case you do not specify the Reference Number, then
the Principal Fiscal Code needs to be specified. After which the system defaults the

4-45
 Chapter 4
F23C Tax Payment by Cash

Elaboration Date in the section Reference Number Not Available with the
current system date. It then adds up the Amounts in the Payment Data Details
block and defaults the sum in the For a total Amount field.
The system posts the following accounting entries on save and authorization of the
record:

Table 4-19 Accounting Entries Posted for Payment Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account For a Total Amount
Cr Account maintained in ARC of the For a Total Amount
associated product

Table 4-20 Accounting Entries Posted for Charge Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Charges amount computed as per
ARC maintenance
Cr Account maintained in ARC of the Charges amount computed as per
associated product ARC maintenance

The following validations are performed by the system:

• The system allows you to maintain a minimum of one row and a maximum of
eight rows in the Payment Data Details multi-entry block. If you do not
maintain the minimum row or exceed the maximum row, then the system
displays an appropriate error message.
• If the Principal Fiscal Code and Secondary Fiscal Code fields have a value
of 16 characters that is for non-individual customers the system validates the
last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for Fiscal Code. If
the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate error message. In
the case of individual customers, where the Principal Fiscal Code and
Secondary Fiscal Code field has a value of 11 characters, the system
validates the last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for a
VAT number. If the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate
error message.
• The system validates only the data format of the fields specified.
• If the computed value for Payment Amount field value is less than or equal to
0, on pickup, the system displays an appropriate error message.
8. Once Pickup is completed, click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the deposit of tax amount is completed successfully.

4-46
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

4.13 F24C Tax Payment By Cash

The F24C Payment Details screen is used to capture data related to the F24C tax document
for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from the customer.
To perform F24C tax payment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click F24C
Tax Payment - Cash or specify F24C Tax Payment - Cash in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The F24C Payment Details screen is displayed.

Figure 4-19 F24C Payment Details

2. On the F24C Payment Details screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 4-21 F24C Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Tax Amount Displays the total tax amount.
Payment Amount Displays the amount to pay.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as F24 Tax by Cash, and it can be
modified.
Total Charge Displays the total charge.

3. Specify the details in the F24 Tax – By Cash segment. For information on the fields
based on the value selected for the Form Type, refer to the table.

Table 4-22 F24 Tax by Cash - Form Types and their References

Form Type Reference Topic

Standard Add Standard Details
Simplified Add Simplified Details
Elements Identification Add Element Identification Details

4-47
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Table 4-22 (Cont.) F24 Tax by Cash - Form Types and their References

Form Type Reference Topic

Predefined Add Predefined Details

On selection of an appropriate value from the Form Type, only the corresponding
tab will be enabled for input. For example, if you select F24 Standard as the Form
Type then only the tab F24 Standard will be enabled and all other tabs will be
disabled. The Principal Fiscal Code needs to be specified.
4. After entering all the form details, click Refresh in the F24 Payment Details.
The system adds up the Amounts and defaults the sum in the Payment Amount
field. The system posts the following accounting entries on save and authorization
of the record.

Table 4-23 Accounting Entries Posted for Payment Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Final Section Amount of the corresponding
tab which has been entered.
Cr Account maintained in Final Section Amount of the corresponding
ARC of the associated tab which has been entered.
product

Table 4-24 Accounting Entries Posted for Charge Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Charges amount computed as per ARC
maintenance
Cr Income Account Charges amount computed as per ARC
maintenance

The system validates only the data format of the fields specified. If any such
validations fail, the system displays an appropriate error message. If you maintain
more than the specified number of rows in any of the below blocks, then the
system displays an appropriate error message. The following list shows the
number of rows, which can be maintained for each Form Type:

4-48
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Table 4-25 Maintenance for Form Type

Form Type Maintenance

Standard In the F24 Standard tab, the system allows you to maintain only the
following number of records:
• up to a maximum of 6 rows in the Tax multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the INPS multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the Region multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the IMU and Other Local Taxes
multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the Insurance multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 3 rows in the Other Bodies multi-record
block.
• up to a maximum of 7 rows in the Excise multi-record block.
Simplified In the F24 Simplified tab, up to a maximum of 10 rows in the Tax
Details multi-record block.
Elements Identification In the F24 Elements Identification tab, up to a maximum of 28
rows in the Tax Details multi-record block.
Predefined In the F24 Predefined tab, up to a maximum of 1 row in the Tax
Details multi-record block.

If the computed value for Payment Amount field value is less than or equal to 0, the
system displays an appropriate error message. If the Principal Fiscal Code and
Secondary Fiscal Code fields have a value of 16 characters that is for non-individual
customers, the system validates the last character in the value as per the checksum
algorithm for Fiscal Code. If the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate
error message. In the case of individual customers, where the Principal Fiscal Code
and Secondary Fiscal Code field has a value of 11 characters, the system validates the
last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for a VAT number. If the
validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate error message.
5. Once Pickup is completed, click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission, the deposit of
tax amount is completed successfully.

• Add Standard Details

You can add the F24 standard details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.
• Add Simplified Details
You can add the F24 simplified details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.
• Add Element Identification Details
You can add the details of the element identification in the F24 Tax – By Cash data
segment.
• Add Predefined Details
You can add the F24 predefined details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.

4-49
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

4.13.1 Add Standard Details

You can add the F24 standard details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 4-20 F24 Tax By Cash - F24 Standard

To add the F24 standard details:

1. On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-26 F24 Standard - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Standard tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Standard Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.
Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.
Identity Code Specify the Identity code secondary fiscal code.
Secondary Fiscal Code
Total Final Payment Specify the total amount to be paid.
Different Tax Year Specify if the tax being paid is related to the current year or
not.

4-50
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Table 4-26 (Cont.) F24 Standard - Field Description

Field Description
Final Payment Fields The system displays the total tax amount of each segment:
• Tax Institution
• INPS Institution
• Region Institution
• Local Institution
• Insurance Institution
• Other Institution
• Excise

2. Specify the tax details. For information on the fields in the Tax Details, refer to Add Tax
Details.
3. Specify the INPS details. For information on the fields in the INPS, refer to Add INPS
Details.
4. Specify the region details. For information on the fields in the Region, refer to Add
Region Details.
5. Specify the details of the IMU and other local taxes. For information on the fields in the
IMU and Other Local Taxes, refer to Add IMU and Other Local Taxes.
6. Specify the insurance details. For information on the fields in the Insurance Details, refer
to Add Insurance Details.
7. Specify the details of the other bodies. For information on the fields in the Other Bodies,
refer to Add Other Bodies.
8. Specify the excise details. For information on the fields in the Excise, refer to Add Excise
Details.
• Add Tax Details
You can add the details of the tax in the Tax Details segment.
• Add INPS Details
You can add the details of the INPS in the INPS Details segment.
• Add Region Details
You can add the details of the region in the Region segment.
• Add IMU and Other Local Taxes
You can add the details of IMU and other local taxes in the IMU and Other Local Taxes
segment.
• Add Insurance Details
You can add the details of the insurance in the Insurance Details segment.
• Add Other Bodies
You can add the details of the other bodies in the Other Bodies segment.
• Add Excise Details
You can add the details of the excise in the Excise segment.

4.13.1.1 Add Tax Details

You can add the details of the tax in the Tax Details segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-51
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-21 Tax Details

To add the tax details:

On the Tax Details segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-27 Tax Details - Field Description

Field Description
Tax Code Specify the reason.
Instal.Reg/Prov Specify the Instal.Reg/ Prov.
Year Specify the year.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Total Debit Amount (A) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (B) Displays the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (A- Displays the final section amount.
B)

4.13.1.2 Add INPS Details

You can add the details of the INPS in the INPS Details segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-52
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-22 INPS Details

To add the INPS details:

On the INPS Details segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to the
field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-28 INPS Details - Field Description

Field Description
Office Specify the office.
Reason Specify the reason.
INPS Office Code Specify the INPS office code.
Period (From) Specify the date from when the amount is paid.
Period (To) Specify the date till when the amount is paid.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Total Debit Amount (C) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (D) Displays the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (C-D) Displays the final section amount.

4.13.1.3 Add Region Details

You can add the details of the region in the Region segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-53
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-23 Region

To add the region details:

On the Region segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to the
field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-29 Region - Field Description

Field Description
Region Code Specify the region code.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Installment Specify the installment amount.
Year Specify the year.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Total Debit Amount (E) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (F) Displays the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (E- Displays the final section amount.
F)

4.13.1.4 Add IMU and Other Local Taxes

You can add the details of IMU and other local taxes in the IMU and Other Local
Taxes segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-54
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-24 IMU and Other Local Taxes

To add the details of IMU and other local taxes:

On the IMU and Other Local Taxes segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-30 IMU and Other Local Taxes - Field Description

Field Description
Institution Code/Town Specify the institution/town code.
Code
Late Payment Specify if the payment is late.
Bounding Var. Specify the Bounding Var.
Down Payment Specify the down payment.
Final Payment Specify the final payment.
Building Nr Specify the building number.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Installment Specify the installment amount.
Deduction Specify the deduction amount.
Total Debit Amount (G) Displays the Total Debit Amount.
Building Reference Specify the building reference number.
Number
Total Credit Amount (H) Displays the Total Compensation Amount.
Final Section Amount (G-H) Displays the Final Section Amount.

4.13.1.5 Add Insurance Details

You can add the details of the insurance in the Insurance Details segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-55
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-25 Insurance Details

To add the insurance details:

On the Insurance Details segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-31 Insurance Details - Field Description

Field Description
Office Code Specify the office code.
Insurance Number Specify the insurance number.
Insurance Account Code Specify the insurance account code.
Reference Number Specify the reference number.
Reason Specify the reason.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Total Debit Amount (I) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (L) Displays the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (I- Displays the final section amount.
L)

4.13.1.6 Add Other Bodies

You can add the details of the other bodies in the Other Bodies segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-56
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-26 Other Bodies

To add the details of the other bodies:

On the Other Bodies segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to the
field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-32 Other Bodies - Field Description

Field Description
Institution Code Specify the institution code.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Reason Specify the reason.
Insurance Reference Specify the insurance reference number.
Number
Period (From) Specify the date from when the amount is paid.
Period (To) Specify the date till when the amount is paid.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Total Debit Amount (M) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (N) Displays the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (M-N) Displays the final section amount.

4.13.1.7 Add Excise Details

You can add the details of the excise in the Excise segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added, and the Form Type is selected as
Standard.

4-57
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-27 Excise Details

To add the details of the excise:

On the Tax Details segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-33 Excise - Field Description

Field Description
Institution Specify the institution.
Province Specify the province.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Company Identification Specify the company identification number.
Installment Specify the installment amount.
Period/Month Specify the month of tax payment.
Period/Year Specify the year of tax payment.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Total Debit Amount (O) Displays the total debit amount.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Final Section Amount Displays the final section amount.

4.13.2 Add Simplified Details

You can add the F24 simplified details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

4-58
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-28 F24 Tax By Cash - F24 Simplified

To add the F24 simplified details:

On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-34 F24 Simplified - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Simplified tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Simplified Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

4-59
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Table 4-34 (Cont.) F24 Simplified - Field Description

Field Description
Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Section Specify the section.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Institution Code Specify the institution code.
Late Payment Specify if the payment is late.
Bounding Var. Specify the Bounding Var.
Down Payment Specify the down payment.
Final Payment Specify the final payment.
Building Nr Specify the building number.
Installment Specify the installment amount.
Year Specify the year.
Deduction Specify the deduction amount.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Building Reference Specify the building reference number.
Number
Total Debit Amount (G) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (H) Specify the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (G-H) Displays the final section amount.

4.13.3 Add Element Identification Details

You can add the details of the element identification in the F24 Tax – By Cash data
segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

4-60
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-29 F24 Tax By Cash - Elements Identification

To add the details of the element identification:

On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 4-35 F24 Tax By Cash with Elements Identification - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Elements Identification tax category from the drop-down
list.
F24 Elide Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

4-61
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Table 4-35 (Cont.) F24 Tax By Cash with Elements Identification - Field Description

Field Description
Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Type of Vehicle/ Element Specify the vehicle type.
Vehicle/ Element ID Specify the vehicle ID.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Year Specify the year.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Total Debit Amount Displays the total amount to pay.
Final Section Amount Displays the final section amount.

4.13.4 Add Predefined Details

You can add the F24 predefined details in the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

4-62
 Chapter 4
F24C Tax Payment By Cash

Figure 4-30 F24 Tax By Cash - F24 Predefined

To add the F24 predefined details:

On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-36 F24 Predefined - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Predefined tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Predefined Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

4-63
 Chapter 4
F23 Tax Payment by Account

Table 4-36 (Cont.) F24 Predefined - Field Description

Field Description
Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Tax Institution Displays the tax Institution.
Payment ID Specify the payment ID.
Amount to Pay Specify the amount to be paid.
Total Debit Amount Displays the total debit amount.
Final Section Amount Displays the final section amount.

4.14 F23 Tax Payment by Account

The F23 Tax Payment by Account screen is used to capture data related to the F23
tax document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by cash from the
customer.
To perform F23 tax payment by account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click
F23 Tax Payment by Account or specify F23 Tax Payment by Account in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The F23 Tax Payment by Account screen is displayed.

4-64
 Chapter 4
F23 Tax Payment by Account

Figure 4-31 F23 Tax Payment by Account

2. On the F23 Tax Payment by Account screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-37 F23 Tax Payment By Account - Field Description

Field Description
Reference Number Type Select the reference number types from the drop-down list. The
drop-down list shows the following values:
• Reference Number Available
• Reference Number Not Available
Reference Number Specify the reference number of the payment provided by the public
authority.
Office or Institute Code Specify the office or institute code that receives the payment.
Office or Institute Sub Specify the office or institute subcode that receives the payment.
code
Litigation Specify the kind of litigation.
For a Total Amount Displays the total tax amount.
Total Charge Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate based on the Account Currency and
Offset Account Currency.

4-65
 Chapter 4
F23 Tax Payment by Account

Table 4-37 (Cont.) F23 Tax Payment By Account - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Amount Displays the amount paid by the customer.

Note:
The currency of the amount paid defaults from the
received currency.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as F23 Tax by Account, and it can be
modified.

3. Click on the Account Details data segment.

The Account Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 4-32 Account Details

4. On the Account Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-38 Account Details - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the customer account number from which the tax is
being paid.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

4-66
 Chapter 4
F23 Tax Payment by Account

Table 4-38 (Cont.) Account Details - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Displays the branch code.
Account Description Displays the description of the account number specified.
Account Amount Displays the amount available in the account.
Net Amount Displays the amount, which is the net total amount levied to
the customer.

5. Click on the Payment Data Details data segment.

The Payment Data Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 4-33 Payment Data Details

6. On the Payment Data Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-39 Payment Data Details - Field Description

Field Description
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Amount Specify the tax amount.
Beneficiary Code Specify the beneficiary institute code.

7. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
8. After you specify the Reference Number, corresponding fields are displayed for the user
to input the details. Once you specify the Payment Details and click Refresh.
The system computes the total amount, which can be with or without charges.
If the Reference Number is not specified, the relevant fields are displayed for input in the
section Reference Number Not Available. Once you specify the Payment Details and
click Refresh, the system posts the following accounting entries on saving and
authorization of the record:

4-67
 Chapter 4
F23 Tax Payment by Account

Table 4-40 Accounting Entries Posted for Payment Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account For a Total Amount
Cr Account maintained in ARC of the For a Total Amount
associated product

Table 4-41 Accounting Entries Posted for Charge Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Charges amount computed as per
ARC maintenance
Cr Account maintained in ARC of the Charges amount computed as per
associated product ARC maintenance

The following validations are performed by the system:

• The system allows you to maintain a minimum of one row and a maximum of
eight rows in the Payment Data Details multi-entry block. If you do not
maintain the minimum row or exceed the maximum row, then the system
displays an appropriate error message.
• If the Principal Fiscal Code and Secondary Fiscal Code fields have a value
of 16 characters that is for non-individual customers the system validates the
last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for Fiscal Code. If
the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate error message. In
the case of individual customers, where the Principal Fiscal Code and
Secondary Fiscal Code field has a value of 11 characters, the system
validates the last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for a
VAT number. If the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate
error message.
• The system validates only the data format of the fields specified.
• If the computed value for Payment Amount field value is less than or equal to
0, on pickup, the system displays an appropriate error message.
9. Once the pickup is completed, click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the deposit of tax amount is completed successfully.

4-68
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

4.15 F24 Tax Payment By Account

The F24 Tax Payment By Account screen is used to capture data related to the F24 tax
document for a customer and collect the corresponding tax by account from the customer.
To perform F24 tax payment by account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Transaction, click F24 Tax
Payment By Account or specify F24 Tax Payment By Account in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The F24 Tax Payment By Account screen is displayed.

Figure 4-34 F24 Tax Payment By Account

2. On the F24 Tax Payment By Account screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-42 F24 Tax Payment By Account - Field Description

Field Description
Total Tax Amount Displays the total tax amount.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as F24 Tax by Account, and it can be
modified.
Total Charge Displays the total charge.
Payment Amount Displays the amount to pay.

3. Click on the Account Details data segment.

The Account Details data segment is displayed.

4-69
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Figure 4-35 Account Details

4. On the Account Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-43 Account Details - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the customer account number from which the tax is
being paid.

Note:

The system displays an override or error message

on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Branch Displays the branch code.

Account Description Displays the description of the account number specified.
Account Amount Displays the amount available in the account.
Net Amount Displays the amount, which is the net total amount levied to
the customer.

5. Specify the details in the F24 Tax By Account segment. For information on the
fields based on the value selected for the Form Type, refer to the table.

Table 4-44 F24 Tax By Account - Form Types and their References

Form Type Reference Topic

Standard Add Standard Details
Simplified Add Simplified Details
Elements Identification Add Element Identification Details
Predefined Add Predefined Details

4-70
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

On selection of an appropriate value from the Form Type, only corresponding fields of
the form will be displayed for input. For example, if you select F24 Standard as the Form
Type, then only the fields of F24 Standard will be available. The Principal Fiscal Code
needs to be specified.
6. After entering all the form details, click Refresh in the F24 Payment Details.
The system adds up the Amounts and defaults the sum in the Payment Amount field.
The system posts the following accounting entries on save and authorization of the
record.

Table 4-45 Accounting Entries Posted for Payment Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Final Section Amount of the corresponding tab,
which has been entered.
Cr Account maintained in ARC Final Section Amount of the corresponding tab
of the associated product which has been entered.

Accounting entries posted for the charge amount:

Table 4-46 Accounting Entries Posted for Charge Amount

Dr/Cr Description Amount

Dr Cash Account Charges amount computed as per ARC
maintenance
Cr Income Account Charges amount computed as per ARC
maintenance

The system validates only the data format of the fields specified. If any of such
validations fail, the system displays an appropriate error message. If you maintain more
than the specified number of rows in any of the below blocks, then the system displays
an appropriate error message. The following list shows the number of rows, which can be
maintained for each Form Type:

Table 4-47 Maintenance for Form Type

Form Type Maintenance

Standard In the F24 Standard tab, the system allows you to maintain only the
following number of records:
• up to a maximum of 6 rows in the Tax multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the INPS multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the Region multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the IMU and Other Local Taxes
multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 4 rows in the Insurance multi-record block.
• up to a maximum of 3 rows in the Other Bodies multi-record
block.
• up to a maximum of 7 rows in the Excise multi-record block.
Simplified In the F24 Simplified tab, up to a maximum of 10 rows in the Tax
Details multi-record block.

4-71
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Table 4-47 (Cont.) Maintenance for Form Type

Form Type Maintenance

Elements Identification In the F24 Elements Identification tab, up to a maximum of 28
rows in the Tax Details multi-record block.
Predefined In the F24 Predefined tab, up to a maximum of 1 row in the Tax
Details multi-record block.

If the computed value for the Payment Amount field value is less than or equal to
0, the system displays an appropriate error message. If the Principal Fiscal Code
and Secondary Fiscal Code fields have a value of 16 characters that is for non-
individual customers the system validates the last character in the value as per the
checksum algorithm for Fiscal Code.
If the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate error message. In
the case of individual customers, where the Principal Fiscal Code and
Secondary Fiscal Code field has a value of 11 characters, the system validates
the last character in the value as per the checksum algorithm for a VAT number. If
the validation fails, then the system displays an appropriate error message.
7. Once Pickup is completed, click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the deposit of tax amount is completed successfully.

• Add Standard Details

You can add the F24 standard details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.
• Add Simplified Details
You can add the F24 simplified details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.
• Add Element Identification Details
You can add the details of the element identification in the F24 Tax By Account
data segment.
• Add Predefined Details
You can add the F24 predefined details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.

4.15.1 Add Standard Details

You can add the F24 standard details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

4-72
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Figure 4-36 F24 Tax By Account - F24 Standard

To add the F24 standard details:

1. On the F24 Tax By Account data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-48 F24 Standard - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Standard tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Standard Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.

4-73
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Table 4-48 (Cont.) F24 Standard - Field Description

Field Description
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed principal fiscal
code is 16 characters and for non-individual customers,
this will be an 11-character VAT number.

Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed secondary fiscal
code is 16 characters and for non-individual customers,
this will be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the Identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Total Final Payment Specify the total amount to be paid.
Different Tax Year Specify if the tax being paid is related to the current year or not.
Final Payment Fields The system displays the total amount of each segment:
• Tax Institution
• INPS Institution
• Region Institution
• Local Institution
• Insurance Institution
• Other Institution
• Excise

2. Specify the tax details. For information on the fields in the Tax Details, refer to
Add Tax Details.
3. Specify the INPS details. For information on the fields in the INPS, refer to Add
INPS Details.
4. Specify the region details. For information on the fields in the Region, refer to Add
Region Details.
5. Specify the details of the IMU and other local taxes. For information on the fields in
the IMU and Other Local Taxes, refer to Add IMU and Other Local Taxes.
6. Specify the insurance details. For information on the fields in the Insurance
Details, refer to Add Insurance Details.
7. Specify the details of the other bodies. For information on the fields in the Other
Bodies, refer to Add Other Bodies.
8. Specify the excise details. For information on the fields in the Excise, refer to Add
Excise Details.

4-74
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

4.15.2 Add Simplified Details

You can add the F24 simplified details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 4-37 F24 Tax By Account - F24 Simplified

To add the F24 simplified details:

On the F24 Tax By Account data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-49 F24 Simplified - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Simplified tax category from the adjoining drop-down list.
F24 Simplified Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.

4-75
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Table 4-49 (Cont.) F24 Simplified - Field Description

Field Description
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the Identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Section Specify the section.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Institution Code Specify the institution code.
Late Payment Specify if the payment is late.
Bounding Var. Specify the Bounding Var.
Down Payment Specify the down payment.
Final Payment Specify the final payment.
Building Nr Specify the building number.
Installment Specify the installment amount.
Year Specify the year.
Deduction Specify the deduction amount.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Credit Amount Specify the compensation amount.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Building Reference Specify the building reference number.
Number
Total Debit Amount (G) Displays the total debit amount.
Total Credit Amount (H) Specify the total compensation amount.
Final Section Amount (G-H) Displays the final section amount.

4-76
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

4.15.3 Add Element Identification Details

You can add the details of the element identification in the F24 Tax By Account data
segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 4-38 F24 Tax By Account - Elements Identification

To add the details of the element identification:

On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-50 F24 Tax By Cash with Elements Identification - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Elide tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Elide Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.

4-77
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Table 4-50 (Cont.) F24 Tax By Cash with Elements Identification - Field Description

Field Description
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Total Final Payment Specify the total final payment.
Type of Vehicle/ Element Specify the vehicle type.
Vehicle/ Element ID Specify the vehicle ID.
Tax Code Specify the tax code.
Year Specify the year.
Debit Amount Specify the amount to be paid.
Office Code Specify the office code.
Document Code Specify the document code.
Total Debit Amount Displays the total amount to pay.
Final Section Amount Displays the final section amount.

4.15.4 Add Predefined Details

You can add the F24 predefined details in the F24 Tax By Account data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the screen.

4-78
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Figure 4-39 F24 Tax by Account - F24 Predefined

To add the F24 predefined details:

On the F24 Tax – By Cash data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 4-51 F24 Predefined - Field Description

Field Description
Form Type Select the Predefined tax category from the drop-down list.
F24 Predefined Specify the fields.
Elaboration Date Displays the elaboration date.
Principal Fiscal Code Specify the debtor fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
principal fiscal code is 16 characters and
for non-individual customers, this will be
an 11-character VAT number.

4-79
 Chapter 4
F24 Tax Payment By Account

Table 4-51 (Cont.) F24 Predefined - Field Description

Field Description
Secondary Fiscal Code Specify the secondary fiscal code.

Note:
For Individual customers, the allowed
secondary fiscal code is 16 characters
and for non-individual customers, this will
be an 11-character VAT number.

Identity Code Secondary Specify the identity code secondary fiscal code.
Fiscal Code
Erario Institution Displays the Erario Institution.
Payment ID Specify the payment ID.
Amount to Pay Specify the amount to be paid.
Total Debit Amount Displays the total amount to pay.
Final Section Amount Displays the final section amount.

4-80
5
Miscellaneous Transactions
The Teller can use Miscellaneous Transactions to perform GL transactions against a
customer’s CASA account and GL account.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Miscellaneous Customer Debit
The Miscellaneous Customer Debit screen is used to transfer funds from the customer
account to GL.
• Miscellaneous Customer Credit
The Miscellaneous Customer Credit screen is used to transfer funds from GL to the
customer account.
• Miscellaneous GL Debit
The Miscellaneous GL Debit screen is used to debit an amount from a GL account of
the transaction branch and pay out the equivalent amount in cash.
• Miscellaneous GL Credit
The Miscellaneous GL Credit screen is used to credit an amount to a GL account of the
transaction branch by pay-in of equivalent amount in cash.
• Miscellaneous GL Transfer
The Miscellaneous GL Transfer screen is used to transfer the amount from a GL
account to another GL account.
• Miscellaneous Transfer
The Miscellaneous Transfer screen is used to facilitate transfer between the two
different GLs or customer accounts.

5.1 Miscellaneous Customer Debit

The Miscellaneous Customer Debit screen is used to transfer funds from the customer
account to GL.
The customer account can be debited for various reasons, with a corresponding credit to a
GL belonging to the transaction branch.
To transfer funds from the customer account to GL:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click Misc Customer
Debit or specify Misc Customer Debit in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Miscellaneous Customer Debit screen is displayed.

5-1
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Debit

Figure 5-1 Miscellaneous Customer Debit

2. On the Miscellaneous Customer Debit screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 5-1 Miscellaneous Customer Debit - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number from which the funds need to be
debited.

Note:
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Account Amount Displays the account currency based on the account number
specified. Specify the amount that needs to be debited from
the account currency.

5-2
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Debit

Table 5-1 (Cont.) Miscellaneous Customer Debit - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Specify the GL account to which the funds need to be credited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account
from the list of values that displays all the valid GL
accounts.

GL Branch Displays the branch code of the transaction branch, and it can
be modified.
GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.
GL Currency By default, the account currency is displayed, and it can be
modified.
GL Amount Displays the amount in terms of GL currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is required to

Rate perform the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Miscellaneous Customer Debit,

and it can be modified.
Reference Number Specify the reference number for the transaction, which is the
original transaction reference or any invoice number.

5-3
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Credit

Table 5-1 (Cont.) Miscellaneous Customer Debit - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into GL currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves.

5.2 Miscellaneous Customer Credit

The Miscellaneous Customer Credit screen is used to transfer funds from GL to the
customer account.
The customer account can be credited for various reasons, with the corresponding
debit to a GL belonging to the transaction branch.
To perform the miscellaneous customer credit:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click Misc
Customer Credit or specify Misc Customer Credit in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Miscellaneous Customer Credit screen is displayed.

5-4
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Credit

Figure 5-2 Miscellaneous Customer Credit

2. On the Miscellaneous Customer Credit screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

5-5
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Credit

Table 5-2 Miscellaneous Customer Credit - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number from which the funds need to be
credited.

Note:
In addition, you can use Oracle Banking Virtual
Accounts. These Virtual Accounts are used as a
routing account to credit the underlying physical
account.
The system displays an override or error message
on the tab out of Account Number based on the
account dormancy parameters.

Account Amount Displays the account currency based on the account number
specified. Specify the amount to be credited from the account
currency.
GL Account Specify the GL account from which the funds need to be
debited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account
from the list of values that displays all the valid GL
accounts.

GL Branch Displays the branch code of the transaction branch and allows
to modify.
GL Currency By default, the account currency is displayed, and it can be
modified.
GL Amount Displays the amount in terms of GL currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.

5-6
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Customer Credit

Table 5-2 (Cont.) Miscellaneous Customer Credit - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Miscellaneous Customer Credit,

and it can be modified.
Reference Number Specify the reference number for the transaction, which is the
original transaction reference or any invoice number.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into GL currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

5-7
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Debit

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the GL account is debited, and the customer account is credited to the
extent of the Account Amount.

5.3 Miscellaneous GL Debit

The Miscellaneous GL Debit screen is used to debit an amount from a GL account of
the transaction branch and pay out the equivalent amount in cash.
To perform miscellaneous GL debit:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click Misc GL
Debit or specify Misc GL Debit in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Miscellaneous GL Debit screen is displayed.

Figure 5-3 Miscellaneous GL Debit

2. On the Miscellaneous GL Debit screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

5-8
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Debit

Table 5-3 Miscellaneous GL Debit - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Specify the GL account from which the funds need to be debited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account from the
list of values that displays all the valid GL accounts.

GL Currency Displays the branch account currency and allows to modify if

required.
GL Amount Displays the amount which is credited to the GL account.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.

Transaction Amount Specify the appropriate currency and the amount that has to be
credited to the cash account in the specified currency.

Note:
By default, the local currency of the branch is displayed.
You can select another currency if required.

Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

5-9
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Credit

Table 5-3 (Cont.) Miscellaneous GL Debit - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Miscellaneous GL Debit, and it

can be modified.
Reference Number Specify the reference number for the transaction.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into GL currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash
balance of the Teller is updated successfully.

5.4 Miscellaneous GL Credit

The Miscellaneous GL Credit screen is used to credit an amount to a GL account of
the transaction branch by pay-in of equivalent amount in cash.
To perform miscellaneous GL credit:

5-10
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Credit

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click Misc GL Credit
or specify Misc GL Credit in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Miscellaneous GL Credit screen is displayed.

Figure 5-4 Miscellaneous GL Credit

2. On the Miscellaneous GL Credit screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 5-4 Miscellaneous GL Credit - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Specify the GL account to which the funds need to be credited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account from the
list of values that displays all the valid GL accounts.

5-11
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Credit

Table 5-4 (Cont.) Miscellaneous GL Credit - Field Description

Field Description
GL Amount Displays the branch account currency and allows to modify if
required. It also displays the amount which is credited to the GL
account.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.

Transaction Amount Specify the appropriate currency and the amount that has to be
debited from the cash account in the specified currency.

Note:
By default, the local currency of the branch is displayed.
You can select another currency if required.

Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Miscellaneous GL Credit, and it

can be modified.
Reference Number Specify the reference number for the transaction.

5-12
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Transfer

Table 5-4 (Cont.) Miscellaneous GL Credit - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction currency
into GL currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the cash balance of the Teller
gets updated successfully.

5.5 Miscellaneous GL Transfer

The Miscellaneous GL Transfer screen is used to transfer the amount from a GL account to
another GL account.
This transaction can be carried out in various allowed currencies.
To perform miscellaneous GL transfer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click Misc GL
Transfer or specify Misc GL Transfer in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Miscellaneous GL Transfer screen is displayed.

5-13
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Transfer

Figure 5-5 Miscellaneous GL Transfer

2. On the Miscellaneous GL Transfer screen, specify the fields. For more

information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 5-5 Miscellaneous GL Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
From GL Account Specify the GL account to which the funds need to be debited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account
from the list of values that displays all the valid GL
accounts.

From GL Amount Displays the branch account currency and allows to modify if
required. It also displays the amount, which is debited from the
GL account.
From GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the branch currency and allows to modify if required.
From GL Branch Click the search icon, and select the From GL Branch from
the list of values.

5-14
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous GL Transfer

Table 5-5 (Cont.) Miscellaneous GL Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
To GL Account Specify the GL account to which the funds need to be credited.

Note:
You can also select the appropriate GL account
from the list of values that displays all the valid GL
accounts.

To GL Amount Displays the branch account currency and allows to modify if

required. It also displays the amount, which is credited to the
GL account.
To GL Description Displays the description of the selected GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the branch currency and allows to modify if required.
To GL Branch Click the search icon, and select the To GL Branch from the
list of values.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Miscellaneous GL Transfer,
and it can be modified.
Reference Number Specify the reference number for the transaction.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into GL currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

5-15
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Transfer

5.6 Miscellaneous Transfer

The Miscellaneous Transfer screen is used to facilitate transfer between the two
different GLs or customer accounts.
This transaction can be carried out between:
• GL to GL
• Customer Account to Customer Account
• GL to Customer Account
• Customer Account to GL
To perform miscellaneous transfer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Miscellaneous, click
Miscellaneous Transfer or specify Miscellaneous Transfer in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Miscellaneous Transfer screen is displayed.

Figure 5-6 Miscellaneous Transfer

2. On the Miscellaneous Transfer screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

5-16
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Transfer

Table 5-6 Miscellaneous Transfer

Field Description
Function Code Click the search icon, and select the function code from the list of
values, which contains only non-cash transactions.
Currency Click the search icon, and select the currency from the list of values.

Note:
By default, the currency field will default to the local
branch currency, and it can be modified.

Query Click Query to fetch the details.

Note:
Based on the specified values of Function Code and
Currency, the system populates Debit Account and
Credit Account details. You can also modify the values.

Debit Account Details Specify the fields under this section.

Debit Account Click the search icon, and select the debit account number from the
list of values.
Debit Account Name Displays the name of the specified debit account.
Debit Account Branch Click the search icon, and select the debit account branch from the
list of values.
Debit Currency Click the search icon, and select the debit currency from the list of
values.
Debit Amount Specify the amount that needs to be debited.
Credit Account Details Specify the fields under this section.
Credit Account Click the search icon, and select the credit account number from the
list of values.
Credit Account Name Displays the name of the specified credit account.
Credit Account Branch Click the search icon, and select the credit account branch from the
list of values.
Credit Currency Click the search icon, and select the credit currency from the list of
values.
Credit Amount Displays the credit amount based on the exchange rate pickup.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

5-17
 Chapter 5
Miscellaneous Transfer

Table 5-6 (Cont.) Miscellaneous Transfer

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transfer currency
into transaction currency and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transfer currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Additional Details Specify the fields under this section.

Reference Number Specify the reference number of the transaction.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Miscellaneous Transfer, and it
can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

5-18
6
Transfers
The Teller can use Transfers to perform inter-bank transfers, intra-bank transfers, and cross-
border transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Account to Account Transfer
The Account to Account Transfer screen is used to transfer funds from one account to
another account within the bank.
• In-House Cheque Deposit
The In House Cheque Deposit screen is used to capture in-house cheque deposit
transactions for the customers.
• Domestic Transfer Against Account
The Domestic Transfer Against Account screen is used to transfer funds from an
account held with the bank to an account held with another bank, within the same
country.
• Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in
The Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in screen is used to accept cash from the walk-in
customer and transfer funds to the account held with another bank within the same
country.
• International Transfer Against Account
The International Transfer Against Account screen is used to facilitate international
transfer by debiting the account holder of the bank.
• International Transfer Against Walk-in
The International Transfer Against Walk-in screen is used to facilitate international
transfer by accepting cash from the walk-in customer.

6.1 Account to Account Transfer

The Account to Account Transfer screen is used to transfer funds from one account to
another account within the bank.
The funding account and beneficiary account can be in different currencies and belong to
different branches.
To perform account transfer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click Account to Account
Transfer or specify Account to Account Transfer in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Account Transfer screen is displayed.

6-1
 Chapter 6
Account to Account Transfer

Figure 6-1 Account Transfer

2. On the Account Transfer screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-1 Account Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Debit Account Specify the customer account from which the funds need to be
debited.
Debit Amount Displays the transaction account currency. Specify the
transaction amount that needs to be debited from the
customer account.

6-2
 Chapter 6
Account to Account Transfer

Table 6-1 (Cont.) Account Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the customer account as
provided by the Customer.

Note:
If the cheque number of the customer account is
specified, the cheque status update will be done as
part of the handoff to FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking.
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Click the calendar icon and select the date on which the
cheque has been issued.
Credit Account Specify the account to which the funds need to be credited.

Note:
In addition, you can use Oracle Banking Virtual
Accounts. These Virtual Accounts are used as a
routing account to credit the underlying physical
account.

Credit Account Name Displays the description of the account number specified.
Credit Account Branch Displays the branch code of the account number specified.
Credit Amount Displays the amount in terms of the credit account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

6-3
 Chapter 6
Account to Account Transfer

Table 6-1 (Cont.) Account Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
account currency into credit account currency and it can be
modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge (LCY) Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Account Transfer, and it can

be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.

6-4
 Chapter 6
In-House Cheque Deposit

A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed

Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the UBS for accounting.

6.2 In-House Cheque Deposit

The In House Cheque Deposit screen is used to capture in-house cheque deposit
transactions for the customers.
To capture in-house cheque deposit transactions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click In House Cheque
Deposit or specify In House Cheque Deposit in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The In House Cheque Deposit screen is displayed.

Figure 6-2 In House Cheque Deposit

6-5
 Chapter 6
In-House Cheque Deposit

2. On the In House Cheque Deposit screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-2 In House Cheque Deposit - Field Description

Field Description
Debit Account Specify the account number of the drawer.
Debit Account Name Displays the name of the account.
Debit Account Branch Displays the branch code of the account number specified.
Cheque Amount Specify the currency and amount as mentioned in the cheque.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the date of issue as mentioned in the cheque.

Credit Account Specify the account number that needs to be credited with the
cheque amount.
Credit Amount Displays the transaction amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction
currency into account currency and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

6-6
 Chapter 6
In-House Cheque Deposit

Table 6-2 (Cont.) In House Cheque Deposit - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Reject Code Select the reject code from the list of values, which are
maintained in the Reject Code Maintenance screen.

Note:
If the cheque withdrawal transaction needs to be
rejected, you can reject it by specifying the
appropriate reject code in this field. The transaction
can be rejected for any of the following reasons:
• Insufficient funds
• Signature mismatch
• Stale cheque

Reject Code Displays the description of the specified reject code.

Description
Narrative Displays the default narrative as In-House Cheque Deposit,
and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to UBS for accounting.

6-7
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Account

6.3 Domestic Transfer Against Account

The Domestic Transfer Against Account screen is used to transfer funds from an
account held with the bank to an account held with another bank, within the same
country.
Based on the payment type selected, the transaction is routed to the corresponding
transaction network.
To perform domestic transfer against account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click Domestic Trf -
Account or specify Domestic Trf - Account in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Domestic Transfer Against Account screen is displayed.

Figure 6-3 Domestic Transfer Against Account

2. On the Domestic Transfer Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

6-8
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Account

Table 6-3 Domestic Transfer Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Remitter Account Specify the customer account from which the funds need to be
debited.
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction account currency and it allows to select
from drop-down values. Specify the transaction amount that needs
to be debited from the customer account.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the customer account as provided by
the customer.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or Stopped
or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Click the calendar icon and select the date on which the cheque has
been issued.
Account Amount Displays the amount in terms of the remitter account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transaction account
currency into credit account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

6-9
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Account

Table 6-3 (Cont.) Domestic Transfer Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Domestic Transfer Against
Account, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the payment details. For information on the fields in the Payment Details
segment, refer to Add Payment Details for Domestic Transfer.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for outgoing payment creation and processing with external
system status as Pending. After the transaction is processed and responded from
the Oracle Banking Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the
transaction from Journal Log and completes the transaction.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from
Journal log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle
Banking Payments based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS. (When Auto Processing
is ‘N’, then Maker-Checker-Maker-Maker and when Auto Processing is Y
then Maker-Checker-Maker).

• Add Payment Details for Domestic Transfer

You can add the payment details for the domestic transfer in the Payment Details
data segment.

6.3.1 Add Payment Details for Domestic Transfer

You can add the payment details for the domestic transfer in the Payment Details
data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the screen.

6-10
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Account

Figure 6-4 Payment Details

To add the payment details:

On the Payment Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-4 Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Remitter Details Specify the fields.
Remitter Name Displays the remitter description based on the remitter account number
specified.
Address Line 1 to Address Displays the remitter address details.
Line 4
Communication Mode Specify the mode of communication for the transaction. The drop-down
values are E-Mail and Phone.

6-11
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in

Table 6-4 (Cont.) Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Mobile No Specify the mobile number if the mode of communication is selected as
Phone.
Email ID Specify the email address if the mode of communication is selected as
E-Mail.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Payment Type Select the payment type from the drop-down values.
Beneficiary Bank Code Select the beneficiary bank code from the list of values.

Note:
The LOV display all valid clearing bank
codes maintained in the system.

Beneficiary Bank Name Specify the name of the beneficiary bank. If the beneficiary bank code
is selected, the system displays the description.
Beneficiary Account Specify the account number of the beneficiary.
Account Type Select the account type of the beneficiary from the drop-down list.
Account Name Specify the account name of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Address Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Line 4
Remittance Information Specify the fields.
Remittance Information Specify the remittance information in free text format.
Line 1 to Remittance
Information Line 4

6.4 Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in

The Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in screen is used to accept cash from the
walk-in customer and transfer funds to the account held with another bank within the
same country.
Based on the payment type selected, the transaction is routed to the corresponding
transaction network.
To perform domestic transfer against walk-in:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click Domestic Trf -
Walkin or specify Domestic Trf - Walkin in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

6-12
 Chapter 6
Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in

Figure 6-5 Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in

2. On the Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-5 Domestic Transfer Against Walkin - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down list. Specify the
transaction amount that needs to be transferred.
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Domestic Transfer Against

Walkin, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the payment details. For information on the fields in the Payment Details
segment, refer to Add Payment Details for Domestic Transfer.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

6-13
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for outgoing payment creation and processing with external
system status as Pending. After the transaction is processed and responded from
the Oracle Banking Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the
transaction from Journal Log and completes the transaction.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from
Journal log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle
Banking Payments based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS. (When Auto Processing
is ‘N’, then Maker-Checker-Maker-Maker and when Auto Processing is Y
then Maker-Checker-Maker).

6.5 International Transfer Against Account

The International Transfer Against Account screen is used to facilitate international
transfer by debiting the account holder of the bank.
You can remit in the currency of the customer account and transfer in another currency
based on the request from the customer. If the transaction currency differs from the
transfer currency, the exchange rate is populated to calculate the equivalent amount.
To perform international transfer against account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click International -
Account or specify International - Account in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The International Transfer Against Account screen is displayed.

6-14
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

Figure 6-6 International Transfer Against Account

2. On the International Transfer Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-6 International Transfer Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Remitter Account Specify the customer account from which the funds need to be
debited.
Transfer Amount Specify the transfer account currency and the transfer amount that
needs to be debited from the customer account.

6-15
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

Table 6-6 (Cont.) International Transfer Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform the
Rate transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency. If this option is selected, the Negotiated
Reference Number field will become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction involves
cross currency.

Transaction Amount Displays the remitter account currency based on the account
number selected and the transaction amount based on the
exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transfer account
currency into credit account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transfer currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

6-16
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

Table 6-6 (Cont.) International Transfer Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as International Transfer Against

Account, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the payment details. For information on the fields in the Payment Details
segment, refer to Add Payment Details for International Transfer.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking Payments
system for outgoing payment creation and processing with external system status as
Pending. After the transaction is processed and responded from Oracle Banking
Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log
and completes the transaction.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from Journal
log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle Banking Payments
based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS. (When Auto Processing is ‘N’,
then Maker-Checker-Maker-Maker and when Auto Processing is Y then Maker-
Checker-Maker).

• Add Payment Details for International Transfer

You can add the payment details for the international transfer in the Payment Details
data segment.

6-17
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

6.5.1 Add Payment Details for International Transfer

You can add the payment details for the international transfer in the Payment Details
data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the screen.

Figure 6-7 Payment Details

6-18
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

To add the payment details:

On the Payment Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-7 Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Remitter Details Specify the fields.
Remitter Name Displays the remitter description based on the remitter account number
specified.
Address Line 1 to Address Displays the remitter address details.
Line 4
Communication Mode Specify the mode of communication for the transaction. The drop-down
values are E-Mail and Mobile No.
Mobile No Specify the mobile number.

Note:
This field is mandatory if the
Communication Mode is selected as
Mobile No.

Email ID Specify the email address.

Note:
This field is mandatory if the
Communication Mode is selected as E-
Mail.

Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.

Beneficiary Bank BIC Code Select the beneficiary BIC code from the list of values.

Note:
The LOV display all valid swift BIC codes
maintained in the system.

6-19
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Account

Table 6-7 (Cont.) Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Beneficiary Bank Code Select the beneficiary bank code from the list of values.

Note:
The LOV display all valid clearing bank
codes maintained in the system.

Beneficiary Bank Name Specify the name of the beneficiary bank.

Note:
If the beneficiary bank code is selected,
the system displays the description.

Receiver BIC Code Specify the receiver BIC code from the list of values.

Note:
The LOV displays all the valid swift BIC
codes maintained in the system.

Beneficiary Account Specify the account number of the beneficiary.

Account Type Select the account type of the beneficiary from the drop-down list.
Account Name Specify the account name of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Address Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Line 4
Remittance Information Specify the fields.
Remittance Information Specify the remittance information in free text format.
Line 1 to Remittance
Information Line 4
Instruction Details Specify the details under this section.

6-20
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Walk-in

Table 6-7 (Cont.) Payment Details - Field Description

Field Description
Instruction Code 1 to Select the instruction codes from the drop-down list, and specify the
Instruction Code 6 additional information. The drop-down values are as follows:
• CHQB – Cheque, Pay beneficiary customer by cheque only.
• HOLD – Hold, Beneficiary customer/claimant will call; pay upon
identification.
• PHOB – Phone Beneficiary, Advise/contact beneficiary/claimant
by phone.
• PHOI – Phone Intermediary, Advise the intermediary institution by
phone.
• PHON – Telephone, Advise account with institution by phone.
• REPA – Related Payment, Payment has a related e-Payments
reference.
• TELB – Telecommunication, Advise/contact beneficiary/claimant
by the most efficient means of telecommunication.
• TELE – Telecommunication, Advise the account with the institution
by the most efficient means of telecommunication.
• TELI – Telecommunication, Advise the intermediary institution by
the most efficient means of telecommunication.
• INTC – Intra-Company Payment, A payment between two
companies belonging to the same group.
• SDVA – Same Day Value, Payment must be executed with same-
day value to the beneficiary.
• CORT – Corporate Trade, Payment is made in settlement of a
trade, for example, foreign exchange deal, securities transaction.

Note:
The field for additional information is
disabled for the following codes:
• CHQB
• INTC
• SDVA
• CORT

6.6 International Transfer Against Walk-in

The International Transfer Against Walk-in screen is used to facilitate international transfer
by accepting cash from the walk-in customer.
You can remit funds in transaction currency and transfer them in another currency based on
the customer’s request. If the transaction currency differs from the transfer currency, the
exchange rate is populated to calculate the equivalent amount.
To perform international transfer against walk-in:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Transfers, click International - Walk-
in or specify International - Walk-in in the search icon bar and select the screen.

6-21
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Walk-in

The International Transfer Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 6-8 International Transfer Against Walk-in

2. On the International Transfer Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 6-8 International Transfer Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Specify the currency in which the cash is accepted from the
walk-in customer and the transaction amount as requested by
the customer.
Transfer Currency Specify the currency in which the funds are to be transferred.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

6-22
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Walk-in

Table 6-8 (Cont.) International Transfer Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Transfer Amount Displays the transfer amount based on the exchange rate
pickup.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the transfer
currency into transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transfer currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as International Transfer

Against Walk-in, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the payment details. For information on the fields in the Payment Details
segment, refer to Add Payment Details for International Transfer.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.

6-23
 Chapter 6
International Transfer Against Walk-in

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for outgoing payment creation and processing with external
system status as Pending. After the transaction is processed and responded from
Oracle Banking Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the
transaction from Journal Log and completes the transaction.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from
Journal log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle
Banking Payments based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS. (When Auto Processing
is ‘N’, then Maker-Checker-Maker-Maker and when Auto Processing is Y
then Maker-Checker-Maker).

6-24
7
Clearing Transactions
The Teller can use screens under Clearing to perform the clearing transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cheque Deposit
You can use the Cheque Deposit screen to capture the cheque deposit request
submitted by the customer.
• Cheque Return
The Teller can use the Cheque Return screen to initiate manual return of inward or
outward clearing cheques.
• Inward Clearing Data Entry
The Teller can use the Inward Clearing Data Entry screen to initiate the inward
processing of bulk instruments.
• Outward Clearing Data Entry
The Teller can use the Outward Clearing Data Entry screen to initiate the bulk deposit
of instruments.

7.1 Cheque Deposit

You can use the Cheque Deposit screen to capture the cheque deposit request submitted by
the customer.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cheque Deposit Against Account
The Teller can use the Cheque Deposit screen to carry out the cheque deposit
transaction for a customer.
• Cheque Deposit Against GL
The Teller can use the Cheque Deposit screen to carry out the cheque deposit
transaction for credit of a GL account.

7.1.1 Cheque Deposit Against Account

The Teller can use the Cheque Deposit screen to carry out the cheque deposit transaction
for a customer.
To capture the cheque deposit request:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Clearing, click Cheque Deposit or
specify Cheque Deposit in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cheque Deposit screen is displayed.

7-1
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

Figure 7-1 Cheque Deposit

2. On the Cheque Deposit screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 7-1 Cheque Deposit (Account Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Cheque Amount Specify the currency and amount mentioned in the cheque that
needs to be deposited in the account.
Cheque Date Specify the cheque issued date.
Deposit Mode Select the deposit mode as Account from the drop-down
values.

7-2
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

Table 7-1 (Cont.) Cheque Deposit (Account Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Payee Account Specify the customer account number in which the cheque
needs to be deposited. When you press the Tab key, the
following details are displayed:
• Customer ID
• Image
• Signature
• KYC Status
• Account Balance
• Address

Note:
If the specified account number is a joint account
holder, the joint holder details of the account can be
viewed in the Customer Information Widget along
with the mode of operation.

Cheque Number Specify the MICR number displayed on the cheque.

Drawer Account Specify the account number on which the cheque is drawn.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer account.
Network Code Specify the network code.

Note:
You can also select from the list of maintained
clearing codes.

Routing Number Specify the routing number for cheque clearance. The list of
values will call the Oracle Banking Payments service to fetch
the list of routing numbers based on the Clearing Network
Code selected.
Cheque Deposit Date Displays the current posting date as the cheque deposit date.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

7-3
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

Table 7-1 (Cont.) Cheque Deposit (Account Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the cheque
currency into transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transfer currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Deposit, and it can

be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

7-4
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking Payments
system for Outward Clearing transaction processing with external system status as
Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from the Oracle Banking Payments
with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log and
completes the transaction.
OBBRN will only do data capture and populate the request to OBPM for main leg
accounting. Charge accounting will be posted to UBS from OBBRN.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from Journal
log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle Banking Payments
based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS.

7.1.2 Cheque Deposit Against GL

The Teller can use the Cheque Deposit screen to carry out the cheque deposit transaction
for credit of a GL account.
To capture the cheque deposit request:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Clearing, click Cheque Deposit or
specify Cheque Deposit in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cheque Deposit screen is displayed.

7-5
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

Figure 7-2 Cheque Deposit

2. On the Cheque Deposit screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 7-2 Cheque Deposit (GL Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Cheque Amount Specify the currency and amount mentioned in the cheque that
needs to be deposited in the account.
Cheque Date Specify the cheque issued date.
Deposit Mode Select the deposit mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Payee GL Specify the customer GL number in which the cheque needs
to be deposited.
GL Description Displays the description of the specified Payee GL.
GL Currency Select the GL currency from the list of values.
Cheque Number Specify the MICR number displayed on the cheque.

7-6
 Chapter 7
Cheque Deposit

Table 7-2 (Cont.) Cheque Deposit (GL Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Drawer Account Specify the account number on which the cheque is drawn.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer account.
Network Code Specify the network code.

Note:
You can also select from the list of maintained
clearing codes.

Routing Number Specify the routing number for cheque clearance. The list of
values will call the Oracle Banking Payments service to fetch
the list of routing numbers based on the Network Code
selected.
Cheque Deposit Date Displays the current posting date as the cheque deposit date.
Negotiated Exchange Specify the negotiated exchange rate if it is needed to perform
Rate the transaction using negotiated value.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency. If this option is selected,
the Negotiated Reference Number field will
become mandatory.

Negotiated Reference Specify the reference number for the negotiated cost rate.
Number

Note:
This field is applicable only if the transaction
involves cross currency.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the cheque
currency into transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transfer currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

7-7
 Chapter 7
Cheque Return

Table 7-2 (Cont.) Cheque Deposit (GL Mode) - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Deposit, and it can

be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for Outward Clearing transaction processing with external
system status as Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from the Oracle Banking
Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal
Log and completes the transaction.

7.2 Cheque Return

The Teller can use the Cheque Return screen to initiate manual return of inward or
outward clearing cheques.
An inward cheque transaction may not be processed successfully for funds needed in
the drawer account or due to stop payment of the cheque. In addition, an outward
cheque transaction may get returned if the same is returned from the clearing house.
To perform cheque return:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Clearing, click Cheque Return
or specify Cheque Return in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cheque Return screen is displayed.

7-8
 Chapter 7
Cheque Return

Figure 7-3 Cheque Return

2. On the Cheque Return screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 7-3 Cheque Return - Field Description

Field Description
Drawer Account Specify the drawer account number.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.
Query Click Query to fetch cheque details.
Clear Click Clear to clear the cheque details.
Drawer Account Displays the drawer account number.
Drawer Routing No Displays the routing number of the specified drawer account.
Cheque Number Displays the cheque number.
Cheque Amount Displays the cheque amount.
Cheque Date Displays the cheque date.

7-9
 Chapter 7
Inward Clearing Data Entry

Table 7-3 (Cont.) Cheque Return - Field Description

Field Description
Payee Account Displays the payee account number.
Payee Name Displays the payee name.
Payee Routing No. Displays the payee routing number.
Return Type Displays the return type (Inward and Outward).
Reject Code Select the reject code from the list of values.
Reject Reason Displays the reason to reject.
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Return, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

7.3 Inward Clearing Data Entry

The Teller can use the Inward Clearing Data Entry screen to initiate the inward
processing of bulk instruments.
This screen supports to capture of bulk input of inward clearing transactions for
multiple instrument types – Cheque, Bankers Cheque, and Demand Draft. It also
supports bulk data entry of inward clearing transactions for single and multiple
customer accounts.
To initiate the inward processing of bulk instruments:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Clearing, click Inward
Clearing Data Entry or specify Inward Clearing Data Entry in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Inward Clearing Data Entry screen is displayed.

Note:
Charges are not supported for this screen.

7-10
 Chapter 7
Inward Clearing Data Entry

Figure 7-4 Inward Clearing Data Entry

2. On the Inward Clearing Data Entry screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 7-4 Inward Clearing Data Entry - Field Description

Field Description
New Click New to create a new clearing transaction and generate the
batch reference number.
Fetch Click Fetch to enable the field Batch Reference Number and input
or select from the list of values. The list of values fetches only the
batches that are saved and not submitted.
Hold Click Hold to save the data entry made as part of the specified
batch number.
Batch Reference Number Displays the unique batch number, which is system generated.
Instrument Currency Displays the current logged branch currency.

Note:
You can also select the instrument currency from the
drop-down values.

7-11
 Chapter 7
Inward Clearing Data Entry

Table 7-4 (Cont.) Inward Clearing Data Entry - Field Description

Field Description
Total Amount Displays the total batch amount in instrument currency.
Entry Details Specify the fields.
Instrument Type Select the instrument type from the drop-down values.
Drawer Account Specify the drawer account number.
Account Name Displays the name of the account number specified.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the account number specified.
Account Currency Displays the currency of the account number specified.
Payee Account Specify the payee account number.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values.

Instrument No Specify the instrument number.

Instrument Date Specify the date of the instrument.
Instrument Amount Specify the amount of the instrument.
Clearing Type Specify the clearing type.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values.

Drawer Routing No Specify the routing number.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values.

Payee Routing Number Specify the routing number of the cheque.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Inward Clearing Data Entry, and
it can be modified.
Add Entry Click Add Entry to add multiple records in the table and allow
modifying or deleting if required.

7-12
 Chapter 7
Outward Clearing Data Entry

Table 7-4 (Cont.) Inward Clearing Data Entry - Field Description

Field Description
Reset Click Reset to clear the inputted entry details before you add the
entries.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On submission of data entry, the individual instrument details will be handed off to Oracle
Banking Payments using Inward Clearing Service.
In case of reject notification of any transaction from Oracle Banking Payments, the teller
can either modify the data and resubmit the transaction or discard the data entry.

7.4 Outward Clearing Data Entry

The Teller can use the Outward Clearing Data Entry screen to initiate the bulk deposit of
instruments.
This screen supports to capture of bulk input of outward clearing transactions for multiple
instrument types – Cheque, Bankers Cheque, and Demand Draft. It also supports bulk data
entry of outward clearing transactions for single and multiple customer accounts.
To initiate the bulk deposit of instruments:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Clearing, click Outward Clearing
Data Entry or specify Outward Clearing Data Entry in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Outward Clearing Data Entry screen is displayed.

Note:
Charges are not supported for this screen.

7-13
 Chapter 7
Outward Clearing Data Entry

Figure 7-5 Outward Clearing Data Entry

2. On the Outward Clearing Data Entry screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 7-5 Outward Clearing Data Entry - Field Description

Field Description
New Click New to create a new clearing transaction and generate
the batch reference number.
Fetch Click Fetch to enable the field Batch Reference Number and
input or select from the list of values. The list of values fetches
only the batches that are saved and not submitted.
Hold Click Hold to save the data entry made as part of the specified
batch number.
Batch Reference Displays the unique batch number, which is system generated.
Number
Instrument Currency Displays the current logged branch currency.

Note:
You can also select the instrument currency from
the drop-down values.

Total Amount Displays the total batch amount in instrument currency.

7-14
 Chapter 7
Outward Clearing Data Entry

Table 7-5 (Cont.) Outward Clearing Data Entry - Field Description

Field Description
Entry Details Specify the fields.
Payee Account Specify the payee account number.
Account Name Displays the name of the payee account number specified.
Account Currency Displays the currency of the payee account number specified.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the payee account number
specified.
Instrument Type Select the instrument type from the drop-down values.
Drawer Account Specify the drawer account number.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer account.
Instrument No Specify the instrument number.
Instrument Date Specify the date of the instrument.
Instrument Amount Specify the amount of the instrument.
Clearing Type Select the clearing type for the deposited instrument.
Drawer Routing No Specify the routing number of the cheque.

Note:
You can also select from the list of values.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Outward Clearing Data

Entry, and it can be modified.
Add Entry Click Add Entry to add multiple records in the table, and it
allows modifying or deleting if required.
Reset Click Reset to clear the inputted entry details before you add
the entries.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On submission of data entry, the individual instrument details will be handed off to the
Oracle Banking Payments using Outward Clearing Service.
In case of reject acknowledgment of any transaction from the Oracle Banking Payments,
the teller can retry the individual record from the EJ screen until the batch is in Pending
status.

7-15
8
Remittances
The Teller can use Remittances to issue demand drafts and banker's cheques, perform
payment or cancellation of the issued remittances and perform further operations on the
issued remittances.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Banker's Cheque
The screens related to the Banker's Cheque (BC) can be used to issue BC, perform
payment or cancellation of the issued BC, and perform further operations on the issued
BC.
• Demand Drafts
The screens related to the Demand Drafts (DD) can be used to issue DD, perform
payment or cancellation of the issued DD, and perform further operations on the issued
DD.
• Cash Remittance
The screens related to the Cash Remittance can be used to issue remittance, perform
payment or cancellation of the issued remittance, and perform further operations on the
issued remittance.
• Travellers Cheque
This sub-section describes the various screens used to perform the remittances related
to Travellers Cheque. The screens are described in the following topics:

8.1 Banker's Cheque

The screens related to the Banker's Cheque (BC) can be used to issue BC, perform payment
or cancellation of the issued BC, and perform further operations on the issued BC.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• BC Issue Against Account
The Teller can use the BC Issue Against Account screen to issue a BC against the
CASA of a customer.
• BC Issue Against Walk-in
The Teller can use the BC Issue Against Walk-in screen to issue a BC by cash to the
walk-in customers.
• BC Issue Against GL
The Teller can use the BC Issue Against GL screen to issue a BC against a GL account.
• BC Print and Reprint
The Teller can use the BC Print-Reprint screen to print a BC. It is also used to re-print
the BC if it is not properly printed or to issue duplicate instruments.
• BC Operations
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to handle the life cycle processing of
Banker's Cheque (BC) that is already issued.

8-1
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

• Multi BC Issuance
The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue banker's cheques
against multiple beneficiaries.

8.1.1 BC Issue Against Account

The Teller can use the BC Issue Against Account screen to issue a BC against the
CASA of a customer.
To issue a BC against the savings account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Issue -
Account or specify BC Issue - Account in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Issue Against Account screen is displayed.

Figure 8-1 BC Issue Against Account

2. On the BC Issue Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

8-2
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-1 BC Issue Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the code of the logged-in branch.
Branch Name Displays the description of issuing branch.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the bank
codes maintained using the External Bank Code Maintenance
screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the logged-in
bank code as payable bank code. To remit funds across
banks, select the necessary bank code as payable bank
code. The Payable Branch Code and Payable Branch
Name fields will be enabled after you specify the Payable
Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
BC Amount Select the BC currency from the drop-down list and specify the BC
amount.
BC Date Select the date that needs to be mentioned in the BC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

MICR No Specify the MICR number and validate. If not specified, the system
generates the MICR number based on the maintenance setup.
BC No Displays the BC number.
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values (Account or
Other Account).

8-3
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-1 (Cont.) BC Issue Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Account Specify the charge account number. The following conditions apply
based on the value selected for Mode of Charge:
• If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the user needs
to capture the account from which the charges are to be
deducted.

Note:
If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the
system displays the Drawer Account by default. Else,
this field is kept blank and the user can input the
valid account number.

• If Mode of Charge is selected as Other Account, the user

needs to capture another account number.
Payee Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the BC is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down list.
Payee Identification Specify the identification number of the payee.
Number
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Issuance Account, and it can
be modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-2 Funding Details

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

8-4
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-2 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Drawer Account Specify the account number of the customer who has requested the
BC.
Drawer Name Displays the name of the specified drawer account number.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the drawer account.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or Stopped
or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the date as mentioned in the cheque.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the BC currency into
account currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the transaction amount converted in terms of account

amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the following drop-down values
(Account or Other Account).
Charge Account This field is populated based on the following criteria:
• If Account is selected as Mode of Charge, the drawer account
number will be selected as charge account.
• If Other Account is selected as Mode of Charge, specify the
other account number in this field.

8-5
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-2 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the BC issuance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for instruments processing with external system status as
Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from the Oracle Banking
Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal
Log and completes the transaction.

Note:
System shall automate the completion of payment transactions from
Journal log, once the ‘Success’ notification is received from Oracle
Banking Payments based on the flag Auto Processing as Y in
TRANSACTION.SRV_TM_BC_PARAM_DTLS. (When Auto Processing
is ‘N’, then Maker-Checker-Maker-Maker and when Auto Processing is Y
then Maker-Checker-Maker).

8.1.2 BC Issue Against Walk-in

The Teller can use the BC Issue Against Walk-in screen to issue a BC by cash to the
walk-in customers.
To issue a BC to the walk-in customers:

8-6
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Issue - Walk-
in or specify BC Issue - Walk-in in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Issue Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 8-3 BC Issue Against Walk-in

2. On the BC Issue Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-3 BC Issue Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the code of the logged-in branch.
Branch Name Displays the description of issuing branch.

8-7
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-3 (Cont.) BC Issue Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the bank
codes maintained using the External Bank Code Maintenance
screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the logged-in
bank code as payable bank code. To remit funds across
banks, select the necessary bank code as payable bank
code. The fields Payable Branch Code and Payable
Branch Name will be enabled after you specify the
Payable Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
BC Amount Select the BC currency from the drop-down list and specify the BC
amount.
BC Date Select the date that needs to be mentioned in the BC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

BC No Specify the instrument number and validate. If not specified, the

system generates the BC number based on the maintenance setup.
MICR Number Displays the MICR number.
Payee Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the BC is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down list.
Payee Identification Specify the identification number of the payee.
Number
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Issuance Against Walk-in,
and it can be modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

8-8
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-4 Funding Details

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-4 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency in which the walk-in customer
deposits the cash.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the payee.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

8-9
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-4 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the BC issuance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
7. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for instruments processing with external system status as
Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from the Oracle Banking
Payments with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal
Log and completes the transaction.

8.1.3 BC Issue Against GL

The Teller can use the BC Issue Against GL screen to issue a BC against a GL
account.
To issue a BC against a GL account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Issue -
GL or specify BC Issue - GL in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Issue Against GL screen is displayed.

8-10
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-5 BC Issue Against GL

2. On the BC Issue Against GL screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-5 BC Issue Against GL - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
Branch Name Displays the description of issuing branch.

8-11
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-5 (Cont.) BC Issue Against GL - Field Description

Field Description
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the bank
codes maintained using the External Bank Code Maintenance
screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the logged-in
bank code as payable bank code. To remit funds across
banks, select the necessary bank code as payable bank
code. The fields Payable Branch Code and Payable
Branch Name will be enabled after you specify the
Payable Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
BC Amount Select the BC currency from the drop-down list and the BC amount.
BC Date Select the date that needs to be mentioned in the BC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

BC No Specify the instrument number and validate.

Note:
If not specified, the system generates the BC number
based on the maintenance setup.

MICR Number Displays the MICR number.

Payee Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the BC is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down list.
Payee Identification Specify the identification number of the payee.
Number
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Issuance Against GL, and it
can be modified.

8-12
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-6 Funding Details

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-6 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Select the account number of the GL against which the BC is issued
from the LOV.
GL Description Displays a brief description of the general ledger.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the payee.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking Payments
system for instruments processing with external system status as Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from the Oracle Banking Payments
with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log and
completes the transaction.

8-13
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

8.1.4 BC Print and Reprint

The Teller can use the BC Print-Reprint screen to print a BC. It is also used to re-print
the BC if it is not properly printed or to issue duplicate instruments.
The system keeps a track of such reprints so that the bank officials or auditors can
determine the reasons and validity of multiple instrument printing.
To print or reprint a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Print-
Reprint or specify BC Print-Reprint in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Print-Reprint screen is displayed.

Figure 8-7 BC Print-Reprint

2. On the BC Print-Reprint screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-7 BC Print-Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Bankers Cheque No Specify the BC number of the instrument that you need to print
or re-print.
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Print Type Select the type Print or Reprint from the drop-down list.

8-14
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-7 (Cont.) BC Print-Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Query Click Query to fetch details of the BC transaction.
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
BC Date Displays the date mentioned in the BC.
BC Amount Displays the BC currency and the BC amount.
Drawer Name Displays the name of the drawer.
BC Status Displays the status of the BC.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Details Displays the identification details of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Reprint Count Specify the count of the current reprint operation.

Note:
This is applicable only for the reprint option.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Print/Reprint, and it can be

modified.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

8.1.5 BC Operations
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to handle the life cycle processing of Banker's
Cheque (BC) that is already issued.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• BC Inquiry
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to inquire about the details of BC.
• BC Revalidation
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to revalidate an instrument that is in
expired status.

8-15
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

• BC Duplicate Issue
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to issue the instrument if the
customer or banker lost the instrument or if the instrument is damaged.
• BC Payment Reversal
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make the reversal of payment for
BC. Reversal of BC Payment is not supported through Electronic Journal/Service
Journal.
• BC Payment by Account
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
• BC Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
• BC Payment by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
• BC Refund by Account
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
• BC Refund by Cash
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
• BC Refund by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
• Cancel BC by Account
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.
• Cancel BC by Cash
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.
• Cancel BC by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.

8.1.5.1 BC Inquiry
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to inquire about the details of BC.
To inquire the details of BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC
Operations or specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

8-16
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-8 BC Operations - Inquiry

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-8 BC Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Inquiry from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV. After you specify the Issue Branch Code and Bankers
Cheque No, press the Tab key. The system will make a service call
to the Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the banker's cheque
details.
BC Currency Specify BC Currency to query instrument details.
Query Click this icon to fetch instrument details.
BC Details Displays the details of BC under this segment.
Issue Branch Displays the logged-in branch code.
Payable Bank Code Displays the payable bank code.
Payable Branch Displays the payable branch for the BC.
BC Amount Displays the BC currency and the BC amount.
MICR No Displays the MICR number.
Issue Date Displays the issue date mentioned in the BC.
Issue Mode Displays the issue mode of the BC.
Bankers Cheque Status Displays the status of the BC.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Inquiry, and it can be modified.

8-17
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-8 (Cont.) BC Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Revalidation Date Displays the date of BC revalidation.
Duplicate Issue Date Displays the duplicate issue date of BC.
Liquidation Date Displays the liquidation date of BC.
Liquidation Mode Displays the liquidation mode of BC.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Customer ID Displays the Customer ID.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.

Credit Amount Displays the credit amount.

Beneficiary Address 1 and Displays the address of the beneficiary.
Beneficiary Address 2
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the beneficiary.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the beneficiary.
Funding Details Funding details are displayed under this segment.
Drawer Name Displays the drawer name.
Drawer Account Displays the account number of the drawer.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the drawer.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.
Debit Amount Displays the amount that needs to be debited from the drawer
account.
Cheque Number Displays the cheque number.
Cheque Date Displays the date mentioned in the cheque.
Drawer Address 1 and Displays the address of the drawer.
Drawer Address 2
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the drawer.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the drawer.

8-18
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

8.1.5.2 BC Revalidation
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to revalidate an instrument that is in expired
status.
When a customer requests for revalidation of an instrument that is in expired status, Teller
can validate the instrument details and initiate revalidation of BC. The system will allow for
revalidation only if:
• Revalidation is allowed at the Instrument type level
• The instrument is not liquidated, canceled, or refunded
• The instrument is issued, revalidated, or duplicate issued but not liquidated/refunded/
canceled
• Rule based authorization is not supported for revalidation
To revalidate an instrument:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-9 BC Operations - Revalidate

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-19
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-9 BC Operations (Revalidate) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Revalidate from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Revalidation Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Revalidation Date Select the revalidation date.

Note:
By default, the system date is displayed as the
revalidation date.

New Expiry Date Displays the new expiry date based on the specified
revalidation date.
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values
(Account or Cash).
Charge Account Specify the charge account number. The following conditions
apply based on the value selected for Mode of Charge:
• If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the user
needs to capture the account from which the charges are
to be deducted.

Note:
If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account,
the system displays the Drawer Account by
default. Else, this field is kept blank and the
user can input the valid account number.

• If Mode of Charge is selected as Cash, the user needs to

capture Charge Currency, and denomination details to be
picked up based on the charge currency specified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Revalidation, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the
BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

8-20
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.3 BC Duplicate Issue

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to issue the instrument if the customer or
banker lost the instrument or if the instrument is damaged.
In case of a request raised by the customer, additional charges will be deducted while issuing
again. The system will allow for duplicate issue only if:
• The duplicate issue is allowed at the instrument type level
• The instrument is not liquidated, canceled, or refunded
• The instrument is issued or revalidated but not liquidated/refunded/canceled
• Rule based authorization is not supported for duplicate issue
To issue a duplicate instrument:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

8-21
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-10 BC Operations - Duplicate Issue

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-10 BC Operations (Duplicate Issue) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Duplicate Issue from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Duplicate Issue Details Specify the details under this segment.
Duplicate Issue Date By default, the current system date is displayed as a duplicate
issue date, and it can be modified.
Duplicate BC No Specify the duplicate banker's cheque number.
Duplicate MICR No Specify the duplicate MICR number.
Requested By Select from the drop-down values (Customer or Bank).
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values
(Account or Cash).

8-22
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-10 (Cont.) BC Operations (Duplicate Issue) - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Account Specify the charge account number. The following conditions
apply based on the value selected for Mode of Charge:
• If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the user
needs to capture the account from which the charges are
to be deducted.

Note:
If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account,
the system displays the Drawer Account by
default. Else, this field is kept blank and the
user can input the valid account number.

• If Mode of Charge is selected as Cash, the user needs to

capture Charge Currency, and denomination details to be
picked up based on the charge currency specified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Duplication, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

8.1.5.4 BC Payment Reversal

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make the reversal of payment for BC.
Reversal of BC Payment is not supported through Electronic Journal/Service Journal.
To make the reversal of payment for BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

8-23
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-11 BC Operations - Payment Reversal

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-11 BC Operations (Payment Reversal) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment Reversal from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Reversal Details Specify the details under this segment.
Liquidation Mode Select the liquidation mode from the drop-down values.
Liquidation Date Select the liquidation date.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Payment Reversal, and it
can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the
BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

8-24
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.5 BC Payment by Account

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
The BC payment is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the operation mode is
Account.
To make payment against a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-12 BC Operations - Payment by Account

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

8-25
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-12 BC Operations (Payment by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down
values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

8-26
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-12 (Cont.) BC Operations (Payment by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Payment by Account,

and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.6 BC Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
The BC payment is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation mode is Cash.
To make payment against a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.

8-27
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-13 BC Operations - Payment by Cash

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-13 BC Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down
values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-28
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-13 (Cont.) BC Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Payment by Cash, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status

8-29
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting
is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle
Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.7 BC Payment by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to make payment against a BC.
The BC payment is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is GL.
To make payment against a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC
Operations or specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-14 BC Operations - Payment by GL

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-14 BC Operations (Payment by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.

8-30
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-14 (Cont.) BC Operations (Payment by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Displays the branch code of the specified GL account.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Payment by GL, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

8-31
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from the Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the
transaction.

8.1.5.8 BC Refund by Account

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
The BC refund amount is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the
operation mode is Account.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC
Operations or specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

8-32
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-15 BC Operations - Refund by Account

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-15 BC Operations (Refund by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-33
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-15 (Cont.) BC Operations (Refund by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Refund by Account, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the
BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the

8-34
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction
accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the
Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.9 BC Refund by Cash

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
The BC refund is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation mode is Cash.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-16 BC Operations - Refund by Cash

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-16 BC Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.

8-35
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-16 (Cont.) BC Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Refund by Cash, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the
BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.

8-36
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed

Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.10 BC Refund by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to refund the amount against a BC.
The BC payment is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is GL.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-17 BC Operations - Refund by GL

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

8-37
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-17 BC Operations (Refund by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Displays the branch code of the specified GL account.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Refund by GL, and it can

be modified.

8-38
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from the Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.1.5.11 Cancel BC by Account

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.
The BC cancellation amount is credited to a customer account when the operation mode is
Account.
To cancel a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC Operations or
specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

8-39
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-18 BC Operations - Cancel by Account

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-18 BC Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down
values.
Cancel Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-40
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-18 (Cont.) BC Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Cancel by Account, and

it can be modified.

3. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-41
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from the Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the
transaction.

8.1.5.12 Cancel BC by Cash

The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.
The BC cancellation amount is paid by cash to the beneficiary when the operation
mode is Cash.
To cancel a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC
Operations or specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-19 BC Operations - Cancel by Cash

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

8-42
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-19 BC Operations (Cancel by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down values.
Cancel Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Cancel by Cash, and it can be

modified.

3. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

8-43
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from the Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the
transaction.

8.1.5.13 Cancel BC by GL
The Teller can use the BC Operations screen to cancel a BC.
The BC cancellation amount is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is
GL.
To cancel a BC:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click BC
Operations or specify BC Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The BC Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-20 BC Operations - Cancel by GL

8-44
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

2. On the BC Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-20 BC Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
BC No Specify the BC number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Cancel Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Displays the branch code of the specified GL account.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

8-45
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-20 (Cont.) BC Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as BC Cancel by GL, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View BC Details data segment to view the additional details of the
BC.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from the Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the
transaction.

8.1.6 Multi BC Issuance

The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue banker's cheques against
multiple beneficiaries.
This topic contains the following subtopics:

8-46
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

• Multi BC Issuance Against Account

The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue BCs against multiple
beneficiaries for a single remitter account.
• Multi BC Issuance Against Cash
The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue BC against Cash GL for walk-
in customers.

8.1.6.1 Multi BC Issuance Against Account

The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue BCs against multiple beneficiaries
for a single remitter account.
To issue BC against multiple beneficiaries:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Multi BC
Issuance or specify Multi BC Issuance in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Multi BC Issuance Account screen is displayed.

Figure 8-21 Multi BC Issuance - Account

8-47
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

2. On the Multi BC Issuance Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-21 Multi BC Issuance Account - Field Description

Field Description
New Click New to generate a batch reference number.
Batch Reference Displays the auto-generated batch reference number.
BC Currency Select the BC currency from the LOV.
Issue Mode Select the issue mode as Account from the drop-down values.
Drawer Account Specify the remitter account number. When you press the Tab
key, the Account Description, Remitter Name, and Address
of the remitter account will be populated.
Drawer Name Displays the name of the specified remitter account number.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the specified remitter account number.
Address Line 4
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the issue date of the cheque.

Total BC Amount Displays the total sum of the multiple BC amount inputs, which
is computed by the system.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

8-48
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-21 (Cont.) Multi BC Issuance Account - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Charge Account Specify the charge account number.

Note:
By default, the drawer account number will be
displayed as a charge account, and it can be
modified.

Total (Account Amount) Displays the total amount available in the specified charge
account.
Entry Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the name of the payee.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code from the list of values.
Payable Bank Name Displays the bank name of the specified payable bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the payable branch code from the list of values.
Payable Branch Name Displays the bank name of the specified payable branch code.
BC Amount Specify the BC amount.
MICR Number Specify the MICR number.
BC Number Specify the BC number.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Multi BC Issuance, and it
can be modified.
Add Entry After filling the necessary fields, click Add Entry to add a new
entry.
Reset Click Reset to reset the added entries.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-49
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system creates an individual BC transaction and

hand-off individual BC issue requests to Oracle Banking Payments system. Once
the individual BC transaction is created in Oracle Banking Payments, the system
will hand off the consolidated accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking by
debiting Customer Account/Cash GL for the total consolidated amount and
crediting the intermediary bridge GL. In case of any rejection from Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will not consider the transaction for accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking during console entry.

8.1.6.2 Multi BC Issuance Against Cash

The Teller can use the Multi BC Issuance screen to issue BC against Cash GL for
walk-in customers.
To issue BC against cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Multi BC
Issuance or specify Multi BC Issuance in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Multi BC Issuance Cash screen is displayed.

8-50
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Figure 8-22 Multi BC Issuance Cash

2. On the Multi BC Issuance Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-22 Multi BC Issuance Cash - Field Description

Field Description
New Click New to generate a batch reference number.
Batch Reference Displays the auto-generated batch reference number.
BC Currency Select the BC currency from the list of values.
Issue Mode Select the issue mode as Cash from the drop-down values.
Transaction Currency Select the transaction currency from the list of values.

8-51
 Chapter 8
Banker's Cheque

Table 8-22 (Cont.) Multi BC Issuance Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the drawer.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type from the drop-down values.
Payee Identification Specify the identification number of the Payee.
Number
Total BC Amount Displays the total sum of the multiple BC amount inputs, which is
computed by the system.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total (Account Amount) Displays the total amount available in the specified charge account.
Entry Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the payee name.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code from the list of values.
Payable Bank Name Displays the bank name of the specified payable bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the payable branch code from the list of values.
Payable Branch Name Displays the bank name of the specified payable branch code.
BC Amount Specify the BC amount and currency.
MICR Number Specify the MICR number.
BC Number Specify the BC number.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Multi BC Issuance, and it can be
modified.
Add Entry After filling the necessary fields, click Add Entry to add a new entry.

8-52
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-22 (Cont.) Multi BC Issuance Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Reset Click Reset to reset the added entries.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system creates an individual BC transaction and hand-off

individual BC issue requests to Oracle Banking Payments system. Once the individual
BC transaction is created in Oracle Banking Payments, the system will hand off the
consolidated accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking by debiting Customer
Account/Cash GL for the total consolidated amount and crediting the intermediary bridge
GL. In case of any rejection from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will not consider
the transaction for accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking during console entry.

8.2 Demand Drafts

The screens related to the Demand Drafts (DD) can be used to issue DD, perform payment
or cancellation of the issued DD, and perform further operations on the issued DD.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• DD Issue Against Account
The Teller can use the DD Issue Against Account screen to issue a DD against the
CASA of a customer.
• DD Issue Against Walk-in
The Teller can use the DD Issue Against Walk-in screen to issue a DD by cash to the
walk-in customers.
• DD Issue Against GL
The Teller can use the DD Issue Against GL screen to issue a DD against a GL account.
• DD Print and Reprint
The Teller can use the DD Print-Reprint screen to print a DD. It is also used to reprint
the DD if it is not properly printed or to issue duplicate instruments.
• DD Operations
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to handle the life cycle processing of DD
that is already issued.

8-53
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

8.2.1 DD Issue Against Account

The Teller can use the DD Issue Against Account screen to issue a DD against the
CASA of a customer.
To issue a DD against the savings account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Issue -
Account or specify DD Issue - Account in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Issue Against Account screen is displayed.

Figure 8-23 DD Issue Against Account

2. On the DD Issue Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-23 DD Issue Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.

8-54
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-23 (Cont.) DD Issue Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Name Displays the branch description of issuing branch.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the
bank codes maintained using the External Bank Code
Maintenance screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the
logged-in bank code as payable bank code. To remit
funds across banks, select the necessary bank
code as payable bank code. The fields Payable
Branch Code and Payable Branch Name will be
enabled after you specify the Payable Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
DD Amount Specify the DD currency and DD amount.
DD Date Specify the date that needs to be mentioned in the DD.
MICR No Displays the MICR number.
DD No Specify the instrument number and validate. If not specified,
the system generates the DD number based on the
maintenance setup.
Payee Details Specify the fields.
Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the DD is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Narrative Displays the narrative as DD Issuance Account and it can be
modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

8-55
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-24 Funding Details

4. On the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-24 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Drawer Account Specify the account number of the customer who has
requested the DD.
Drawer Name Displays the name of the specified drawer account number.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the drawer account.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the date as mentioned in the cheque.

8-56
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-24 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount in account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the following drop-down
values (Account or Other Account).
Charge Account This field is populated based on the following criteria:
• If Account is selected as Mode of Charge, the drawer
account number will be selected as charge account.
• If Other Account is selected as Mode of Charge, specify
the other account number in this field.
Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the DD issuance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-57
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for instruments processing with external system status as
Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from Oracle Banking Payments
with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log and
completes the transaction.

8.2.2 DD Issue Against Walk-in

The Teller can use the DD Issue Against Walk-in screen to issue a DD by cash to the
walk-in customers.
To issue a DD to a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Issue -
Walk-in or specify DD Issue - Walk-in in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Issue Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 8-25 DD Issue Against Walk-in

8-58
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

2. On the DD Issue Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-25 DD Issue Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
Branch Name Displays the branch description of issuing branch.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the bank
codes maintained using the External Bank Code Maintenance
screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the logged-in
bank code as payable bank code. To remit funds across
banks, select the necessary bank code as payable bank
code. The fields Payable Branch Code and Payable
Branch Name will be enabled after you specify the
Payable Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
DD Amount Specify the DD currency and DD amount.
DD Date Specify the date that needs to be mentioned in the DD.
MICR No Displays the serial number.
DD No Specify the instrument number and validate.

Note:
If not specified, the system generates the DD number
based on the maintenance setup.

Payee Details Specify the fields.

Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the DD is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4

8-59
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-25 (Cont.) DD Issue Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the narrative as DD Issuance against Walk-in, and it can
be modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-26 Funding Details

4. On the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-26 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency, the currency in which the
walk-in customer deposit the cash.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down
list.
Identification Number Specify the identification details of the payee.

8-60
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-26 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the DD issuance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

5. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
6. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
7. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking Payments
system for instruments processing with external system status as Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from Oracle Banking Payments with
appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log and completes the
transaction.

8.2.3 DD Issue Against GL

The Teller can use the DD Issue Against GL screen to issue a DD against a GL account.
To issue a DD against a GL:

8-61
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Issue -
GL or specify DD Issue - GL in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Issue Against GL screen is displayed.

Figure 8-27 DD Issue Against GL

2. On the DD Issue Against GL screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-27 DD Issue Against GL - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
Branch Name Displays the branch description of issuing branch.

8-62
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-27 (Cont.) DD Issue Against GL - Field Description

Field Description
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code. The list of values contains the
bank codes maintained using the External Bank Code
Maintenance screen.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the
logged-in bank code as payable bank code. To remit
funds across banks, select the necessary bank
code as payable bank code. The fields Payable
Branch Code and Payable Branch Name will be
enabled after you specify the Payable Bank Code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branch codes maintained using the
Bank Code Maintenance screen.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
DD Amount Specify the DD currency and DD amount.
DD Date Specify the date that needs to be mentioned in the DD.
MICR No Displays the serial number.
DD No Specify the instrument number and validate.

Note:
If not specified, the system generates the DD
number based on the maintenance setup.

Payee Details Specify the fields.

Payee Name Specify the payee name on which the DD is drawn.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the payee.
Address Line 4
Narrative Displays the narrative as DD Issuance Against GL, and it can
be modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

8-63
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-28 Funding Details

4. On the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-28 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Select the account number of the GL against which the BC is
issued from the LOV.
GL Description Displays a brief description of the general ledger.
Drawer Name Specify the name of the drawer.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the payee from the drop-down
list.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the payee.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

When you submit, the transaction details are handed off to the Oracle Banking
Payments system for instruments processing with external system status as
Pending.
After the transaction is processed and responded from Oracle Banking Payments
with appropriate status, the Teller selects the transaction from Journal Log and
completes the transaction.

8-64
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

8.2.4 DD Print and Reprint

The Teller can use the DD Print-Reprint screen to print a DD. It is also used to reprint the
DD if it is not properly printed or to issue duplicate instruments.
The system maintains track of reprints so that the bank officials or auditors can determine the
reasons and validity of multiple instrument printing.
To print or reprint a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Print-Reprint
or specify DD Print-Reprint in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Print-Reprint screen is displayed.

Figure 8-29 DD Print-Reprint

2. On the DD Print-Reprint screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-29 DD Print-Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument that you need to print or
reprint.
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.

8-65
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-29 (Cont.) DD Print-Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Print Type Select the type Print or Reprint from the drop-down list.
Query Click Query to fetch details of DD print or reprint.
Issuing Branch Code Displays the logged-in branch code.
DD Date Displays the date mentioned in the DD.
DD Amount Displays the DD currency and the DD amount.
Drawer Name Displays the name of the drawer.
DD Status Displays the status of the DD.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Details Displays the identification details of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Reprint Count Specify the count of the current reprint operation.

Note:
This field is applicable only for the reprint option.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Print/Reprint, and it can be

modified.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

8.2.5 DD Operations
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to handle the life cycle processing of
DD that is already issued.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• DD Inquiry
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to inquire about the details of DD.
• DD Revalidation
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to revalidate an instrument that is in
expired status.

8-66
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

• DD Duplicate Issue
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to issue the instrument if the customer or
banker lost the instrument or if the instrument is damaged.
• DD Payment Reversal
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make the reversal of payment for DD.
Reversal of DD Payment through EJ/SJ is not supported through Electronic Journal/
Service Journal.
• DD Payment by Account
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
• DD Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
• DD Payment by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
• DD Refund by Account
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
• DD Refund by Cash
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
• DD Refund by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
• Cancel DD by Account
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.
• Cancel DD by Cash
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.
• Cancel DD by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.

8.2.5.1 DD Inquiry
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to inquire about the details of DD.
To inquire the details of DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Operations or
specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-67
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-30 DD Operations - Inquiry

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-30 DD Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Inquiry from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV. After you specify the Issue Branch Code and
Demand Draft No, press the Tab key. The system will make a
service call to Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the demand
draft details.
BC Currency Specify BC Currency to query instrument details.
Query Click this icon to fetch instrument details.
Demand Draft Details Displays the details of DD under this segment.
Issue Branch Displays the logged-in branch code.
Payable Bank Code Displays the payable bank code.
Payable Branch Displays the payable branch for the DD.
Demand Draft Amount Displays the DD currency and the DD amount.
MICR No Displays the MICR number.
Issue Date Displays the issue date mentioned in the DD.
Issue Mode Displays the issue mode of the DD.
Demand Draft Status Displays the status of the DD.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Inquiry, and it
can be modified.

8-68
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-30 (Cont.) DD Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Revalidation Date Displays the date of DD revalidation.
Duplicate Issue Date Displays the duplicate issue date of DD.
Liquidation Date Displays the liquidation date of DD.
Liquidation Mode Displays the liquidation mode of DD.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Customer ID Displays the Customer ID.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1.

Credit Amount Displays the credit amount.

Beneficiary Address 1 Displays the address of the beneficiary.
and Beneficiary
Address 2
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the beneficiary.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the beneficiary.
Funding Details Funding details are displayed under this segment.
Drawer Name Displays the drawer name.
Drawer Account Displays the account number of the drawer.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the drawer.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.
Debit Amount Displays the amount that needs to be debited from the drawer
account.
Cheque Number Displays the cheque number.
Cheque Date Displays the date mentioned in the cheque.
Drawer Address 1 and Displays the address of the drawer.
Drawer Address 2
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the drawer.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the drawer.

8-69
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

8.2.5.2 DD Revalidation
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to revalidate an instrument that is in
expired status.
When a customer requests for revalidation of an instrument that is in expired status,
Teller can validate the instrument details and initiate revalidation of DD. The system
will allow for revalidation only if:
• Revalidation is allowed at the Instrument type level
• The instrument is not liquidated, canceled, or refunded
• The instrument is issued, revalidated, or duplicate issued but not liquidated/
refunded/canceled
• Rule based authorization is not supported for revalidation
To revalidate a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-31 DD Operations - Revalidate

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-70
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-31 DD Operations (Revalidate) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Revalidate from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Revalidation Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Revalidation Date Select the revalidation date.

Note:
By default, the system date is displayed as a revalidation
date.

New Expiry Date Displays the new expiry date based on the specified revalidation
date.
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values (Account or
Cash).
Charge Account Specify the charge account number. The following conditions apply
based on the value selected for Mode of Charge:
• If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the user needs
to capture the account from which the charges are to be
deducted.

Note:
If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the
system displays the Drawer Account by default. Else,
this field is kept blank and the user can input the
valid account number.

• If Mode of Charge is selected as Cash, the user needs to

capture Charge Currency, and denomination details to be
picked up based on the charge currency specified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Revalidation, and
it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View Demand Draft Details data segment to view the additional details of
the DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

8-71
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.3 DD Duplicate Issue

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to issue the instrument if the customer
or banker lost the instrument or if the instrument is damaged.
In case of a request raised by the customer, additional charges will be deducted while
issuing again. The system will allow for duplicate issues only if:
• The duplicate issue is allowed at the instrument type level
• The instrument is not liquidated, canceled, or refunded
• The instrument is issued or revalidated but not liquidated/refunded/canceled
• Rule based authorization is not supported for duplicate issue
To issue a duplicate DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-72
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-32 DD Operations - Duplicate Issue

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-32 DD Operations (Duplicate Issue) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Duplicate Issue from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Duplicate Issue Details Specify the details under this segment.
Duplicate Issue Date By default, the current system date is displayed as a duplicate issue
date, and it can be modified.
Duplicate Demand Draft Specify the duplicate demand draft number.
No
Duplicate MICR No Specify the duplicate MICR number.
Requested By Select from the drop-down values (Customer or Bank).
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values (Account or
Cash).

8-73
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-32 (Cont.) DD Operations (Duplicate Issue) - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Account Specify the charge account number. The following conditions apply
based on the value selected for Mode of Charge:
• If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the user needs
to capture the account from which the charges are to be
deducted.

Note:
If the Mode of Charge is selected as Account, the
system displays the Drawer Account by default. Else,
this field is kept blank, and the user can input the
valid account number.

• If Mode of Charge is selected as Cash, the user needs to

capture Charge Currency, and denomination details to be
picked up based on the charge currency specified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Duplication, and it
can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View Demand Draft Details data segment to view the additional
details of the DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

8.2.5.4 DD Payment Reversal

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make the reversal of payment for
DD. Reversal of DD Payment through EJ/SJ is not supported through Electronic
Journal/Service Journal.
To make the reversal of payment for DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.

8-74
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-33 DD Operations - Payment Reversal

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-33 DD Operations (Payment Reversal) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment Reversal from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Reversal Details Specify the details under this segment.
Liquidation Mode Select the liquidation mode from the drop-down values.
Liquidation Date Select the liquidation date.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Payment Reversal,
and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the DD.

8-75
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.5 DD Payment by Account

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
The DD payment is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the operation
mode is Account.
To make payment against a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-76
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-34 DD Operations - Payment by Account

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-34 DD Operations (Payment by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Specify the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-77
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-34 (Cont.) DD Operations (Payment by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as DD Operations, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-78
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.6 DD Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
The DD payment is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation mode is Cash.
To make payment against a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Operations or
specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-35 DD Operations - Payment by Cash

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-79
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-35 DD Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down
values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Payment by

Cash, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

8-80
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.7 DD Payment by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to make payment against a DD.
The DD payment is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is GL.
To make payment against a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Operations or
specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-81
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-36 DD Operations - Payment by GL

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-36 DD Operations (Payment by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Payment Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Displays the branch code of the specified GL account.

8-82
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-36 (Cont.) DD Operations (Payment by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as DD Operations, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-83
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.8 DD Refund by Account

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
The DD refund amount is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the
operation mode is Account.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-37 DD Operations - Refund by Account

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-84
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-37 DD Operations (Refund by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Refund by

Account, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.

8-85
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.9 DD Refund by Cash

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
The DD refund is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation mode is Cash.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-86
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-38 DD Operations - Refund by Cash

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-38 DD Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-87
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-38 (Cont.) DD Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Refund by Cash,

and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a

8-88
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction
accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from Oracle
Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.10 DD Refund by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to refund the amount against a DD.
The DD payment is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is GL.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Operations or
specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-39 DD Operations - Refund by GL

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer to
the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-39 DD Operations (Refund by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.

8-89
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-39 (Cont.) DD Operations (Refund by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Specify the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Select the branch code from the list of values.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Demand Draft Refund by GL, and
it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

8-90
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments product
processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a success
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the transaction status
as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The transaction accounting is not
applicable for the transaction. In case of reject notification from Oracle Banking
Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.11 Cancel DD by Account

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.
The DD cancellation amount is credited to a customer account when the operation mode is
Account.
To cancel a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD Operations or
specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

8-91
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Figure 8-40 DD Operations - Cancel by Account

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-40 DD Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down
values.
Cancel Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.

8-92
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-40 (Cont.) DD Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as DD Cancel by Account, and

it can be modified.

3. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-93
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.12 Cancel DD by Cash

The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.
The DD cancellation amount is paid by cash to the beneficiary when the operation
mode is Cash.
To cancel a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-41 DD Operations - Cancel by Cash

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-94
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Table 8-41 DD Operations (Cancel by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down values.
Cancel Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency and transaction amount.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary's name.
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as DD Cancel by Cash, and it can be

modified.

3. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.

8-95
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed

Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.2.5.13 Cancel DD by GL
The Teller can use the DD Operations screen to cancel a DD.
The DD cancellation amount is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is
GL.
To cancel a DD:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click DD
Operations or specify DD Operations in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The DD Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-42 DD Operations - Cancel by GL

2. On the DD Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

8-96
 Chapter 8
Demand Drafts

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-42 DD Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Demand Draft No Specify the DD number of the instrument.
Issue Branch Select the branch code where the instrument is issued from the
LOV.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Refund Details Specify the details under this segment.
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the currency of the specified GL account.
GL Branch Displays the branch code of the specified GL account.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

8-97
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-42 (Cont.) DD Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the default narrative as DD Cancel by GL, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the View DD Details data segment to view the additional details of the
DD.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the details to the payments
product processor (Oracle Banking Payments) for processing. When you get a
success notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will update the
transaction status as Success and mark for charges accounting handoff. The
transaction accounting is not applicable for the transaction. In case of reject
notification from Oracle Banking Payments, the system will discard the transaction.

8.3 Cash Remittance

The screens related to the Cash Remittance can be used to issue remittance, perform
payment or cancellation of the issued remittance, and perform further operations on
the issued remittance.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cash Remittance Issue
The Cash Remittance Issue screen is used to remit funds across branches of the
same bank and across banks.
• Cash Remittance Operations
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to handle the life
cycle processing of cash remittance that is already completed.
• Inward Remittance Registration
The Inward Remittance Registration screen is used to register an inward
remittance and create a remittance instrument.

8-98
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

8.3.1 Cash Remittance Issue

The Cash Remittance Issue screen is used to remit funds across branches of the same
bank and across banks.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cash Remittance Issue Against Account
The Cash Remittance Issue Against Account screen is used to remit funds across
branches of the same bank and across banks.
• Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash
The Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash screen is used to remit funds across
branches of the same bank and across banks.
• Cash Remittance Issue Against GL
The Cash Remittance Issue Against GL screen is used to remit funds across branches
of the same bank and across banks.

8.3.1.1 Cash Remittance Issue Against Account

The Cash Remittance Issue Against Account screen is used to remit funds across
branches of the same bank and across banks.
The cash remittance is performed against the remitter's account when the issuing mode is
Account.
To perform cash remittance issue against account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Issue or specify Cash Remittance Issue in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Issue Against Account screen is displayed.

8-99
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-43 Cash Remittance Issue Against Account

2. On the Cash Remittance Issue Against Account screen, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-43 Cash Remittance Issue Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Displays the code of the home branch.
Issuing Branch Name Displays the name of the issuing branch code.
Payable Bank Code Select the payable bank code from the list of values.

Note:
To remit funds within the same bank, select the
logged-in bank code as payable bank code. To remit
funds across banks, select the necessary bank
code as payable bank code.

Payable Bank Name Displays the name of the selected bank code.

8-100
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-43 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Issue Against Account - Field

Description

Field Description
Payable Branch Code Select the branch code of the payable bank. The list of values
contains the corresponding branches maintained for the
payable bank code.
Payable Branch Name Displays the branch name of the selected branch code.
Remittance Amount Specify the cash remittance currency and amount, which
needs to be transferred.
Remittance Date Select the date of cash remittance.
Remittance No Specify the cash remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Issue Mode Select the issue mode from the drop-down values (Account,
Cash, or GL).
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary.
Beneficiary Account Specify the account number of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type.
Identification No Specify the identification number.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Issuance,
and it can be modified.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-44 Funding Details

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

8-101
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-44 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Remitter Account Specify the remitter account number.
Remitter Name Displays the name of the specified remitter account.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the specified remitter account.
Address Line 4
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the issue date of the cheque.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Identification Type Select the identification type.

Identification No Specify the identification number.

8-102
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-44 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

8.3.1.2 Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash

The Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash screen is used to remit funds across branches
of the same bank and across banks.
The cash remittance is performed against the cash from the remitter when the issuing mode
is Cash.
To perform cash remittance issue against cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Issue or specify Cash Remittance Issue in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash screen is displayed.

8-103
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-45 Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash

2. On the Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash screen, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to Table 8-43.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-46 Funding Details

8-104
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-45 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and amount.

Note:
By default, the currency field will default to local branch
currency and it can be modified.

Remitter Name Specify the name of the remitter.

Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the remitter.
Address Line 4
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Identification Type Select the identification type.

Identification Number Specify the identification number.

8-105
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-45 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
7. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

8.3.1.3 Cash Remittance Issue Against GL

The Cash Remittance Issue Against GL screen is used to remit funds across
branches of the same bank and across banks.
The cash remittance is performed against a GL account when the issuing mode is GL.
To perform cash remittance issue against GL:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Issue or specify Cash Remittance Issue in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Issue Against GL screen is displayed.

8-106
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-47 Cash Remittance Issue Against GL

2. On the Cash Remittance Issue Against GL screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to Table 8-43.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Click on the Funding Details data segment.

The Funding Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 8-48 Funding Details

8-107
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

4. In the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-46 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Description Displays the description of the specified GL account number.
GL Currency Select the GL currency from the list of values.
Remitter Name Specify the name of the remitter.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the remitter.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type.
Identification Number Specify the identification number.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the GL amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

8-108
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-46 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Mode of Charge Select the mode of charge from the drop-down values.

5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

8.3.2 Cash Remittance Operations

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to handle the life cycle
processing of cash remittance that is already completed.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cash Remittance Inquiry
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to inquire about the details
of the issued cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Payment by Account
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment against a
cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment against a
cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Payment by GL
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment against a
cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Refund by Account
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount
against a cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Refund by Cash
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount
against a cash remittance.
• Cash Remittance Refund by GL
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount
against a cash remittance.
• Cancel Cash Remittance by Account
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash
remittance.

8-109
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

• Cancel Cash Remittance by Cash

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash
remittance.
• Cancel Cash Remittance by GL
The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash
remittance.

8.3.2.1 Cash Remittance Inquiry

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to inquire about the
details of the issued cash remittance.
When you select the operation mode as Inquiry, the fields related to cash remittance
inquiry will be displayed.
To inquire about the details of cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

8-110
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-49 Cash Remittance Operations (Inquiry)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-47 Cash Remittance Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the cash remittance is issued from
the LOV.
Operation Mode Select the type Inquiry from the drop-down list.
Remittance No Specify the cash remittance number.

8-111
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-47 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Query Click this icon to fetch the cash remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Cash Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to the Oracle Banking Payments and
fetch the cash remittance details.

Remittance Details Displays the details of cash remittance under this segment.
Issue Branch Displays the logged-in branch code.
Payable Bank Code Displays the payable bank code for the cash remittance.
Payable Branch Code Displays the payable branch code for the cash remittance.
Remittance Amount Displays the currency and the amount of the cash remittance.
Issue Date Displays the issue date mentioned in the cash remittance.
Remittance Status Displays the status of the cash remittance.
Remittance No Displays the cash remittance number.
Test Key No Displays the test key number.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Inquiry, and it
can be modified.
Issue Mode Displays the issue mode of the Cash Remittance.
Liquidation Date Displays the liquidation date of Cash Remittance.
Liquidation Mode Displays the liquidation mode of Cash Remittance.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the beneficiary.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the beneficiary.
Funding Details Funding details are displayed under this segment.
Remitter Account Displays the account number of the remitter.
Remitter Name Displays the remitter name.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Cheque Number Displays the cheque number.
Cheque Date Displays the date mentioned in the cheque.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

8-112
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-47 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Inquiry) - Field Description

Field Description
Account Amount Displays the amount that needs to be debited from the remitter
account.
Identification Type Displays the identification type of the remitter.
Identification Number Displays the identification number of the remitter.

8.3.2.2 Cash Remittance Payment by Account

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment against a
cash remittance.
The cash remittance payment is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the
operation mode is Account.
To make payment against a cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-50 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Account)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-113
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-48 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Account) - Field

Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued from
the LOV.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down
values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to Oracle Banking Payments
and fetch the remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

Beneficiary Account Specify the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary's name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

8-114
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-48 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Account) -

Field Description

Field Description
Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation

by Payment, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another bank, the
Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during handoff for validation.
On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will hand off accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8-115
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

8.3.2.3 Cash Remittance Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment
against a cash remittance.
The cash remittance payment is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation
mode is Cash.
To make payment against a cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-51 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Cash)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-49 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.

8-116
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-49 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down
values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to Oracle Banking Payments
and fetch the remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and a transaction amount.

Note:
By default, the local branch currency is displayed as
transaction currency and it can be modified.

Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary's name.

Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at the Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

8-117
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-49 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation

by Payment, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another
bank, the Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during
handoff for validation. On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will
hand off accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.4 Cash Remittance Payment by GL

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to make payment
against a cash remittance.
The cash remittance payment is credited to the GL account when the operation mode
is GL.

8-118
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

To make payment against a cash remittance:

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-52 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by GL)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-50 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number of the instrument.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Payment from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.

8-119
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-50 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by GL) - Field

Description

Field Description
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will make
a service call to Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the
remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

GL Account Specify the GL account number.
GL Description Displays the description of the specified GL account number.
GL Currency Displays the branch local currency of the specified GL account.

Note:
You can also select a currency from the list of values.

Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.

Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

8-120
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-50 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Payment by GL) - Field

Description

Field Description
GL Amount Displays the GL amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation by

Payment, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another bank, the
Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during handoff for validation.
On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will hand off accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8-121
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

8.3.2.5 Cash Remittance Refund by Account

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount
against a cash remittance.
The refund amount is credited to the beneficiary customer account when the operation
mode is Account.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-53 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Account)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-51 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Account) - Field

Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.

8-122
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-51 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Account) - Field

Description

Field Description
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down
values.
Query Click this icon to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to the Oracle Banking Payments
and fetch the remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

8-123
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-51 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Account) - Field

Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation

by Refund, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another
bank, the Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during
handoff for validation. On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will
hand off accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.6 Cash Remittance Refund by Cash

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount
against a cash remittance.
The cash remittance refund is made by cash to the beneficiary when the operation
mode is Refund.
To refund the amount:

8-124
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

Figure 8-54 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Cash)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-52 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down values.

8-125
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-52 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Query Click this icon to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will make
a service call to Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the
remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and transaction amount.

Note:
By default, the local branch currency is displayed as a
transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.

Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

8-126
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-52 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation by
Refund, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another bank, the
Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during handoff for validation.
On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will hand off accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.7 Cash Remittance Refund by GL

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to refund the amount against a
cash remittance.
The refund amount is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is GL.
To refund the amount:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

8-127
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-55 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by GL)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-53 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Refund from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to Oracle Banking Payments
and fetch the remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

GL Account Specify the GL account number.

8-128
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-53 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Refund by GL) - Field

Description

Field Description
GL Description Displays the description of the specified GL account number.
GL Currency Specify the currency of the specified GL account.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

GL Amount Displays the GL amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation

by Refund, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

8-129
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another
bank, the Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during
handoff for validation. On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will
hand off accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.8 Cancel Cash Remittance by Account

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash
remittance.
The cancellation amount is credited to a customer account when the operation mode
is Account.
To cancel a cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

8-130
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-56 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Account)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-54 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number of the instrument.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Account from the drop-down values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will make
a service call to Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the
remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.

8-131
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-54 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Account) - Field

Description

Field Description
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Account Amount Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation by

Cancel, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

8-132
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another bank, the
Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during handoff for validation.
On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will hand off accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.9 Cancel Cash Remittance by Cash

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash remittance.
The cancellation amount is paid by cash to the beneficiary when the operation mode is Cash.
To cancel a cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash Remittance
Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

8-133
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-57 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Cash)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-55 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Issuing Branch Code Select the branch code where the remittance is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as Cash from the drop-down
values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will
make a service call to Oracle Banking Payments
and fetch the remittance details.

8-134
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-55 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by Cash) - Field

Description

Field Description
Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction currency and transaction amount.

Note:
By default, the local branch currency is displayed as
a transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.

Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is displayed only if
Multi-Currency Configuration at Function
Code Indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the account amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation

by Cancel, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

8-135
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another
bank, the Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during
handoff for validation. On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will
hand off accounting to FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.2.10 Cancel Cash Remittance by GL

The Teller can use the Cash Remittance Operations screen to cancel a cash
remittance.
The cancellation amount is credited to the GL account when the operation mode is
GL.
To cancel a cash remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Cash
Remittance Operations or specify Cash Remittance Operations in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Remittance Operations screen is displayed.

8-136
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-58 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by GL)

2. On the Cash Remittance Operations screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-56 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
Issue Branch Code Select the branch code where the instrument is issued.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number of the instrument.
Operation Type Select the type Cancel from the drop-down list.
Operation Mode Select the operation mode as GL from the drop-down values.
Query Click Query to fetch the remittance details.

Note:
When you click this icon, after you specify the Issue
Branch Code and Remittance No, the system will make
a service call to Oracle Banking Payments and fetch the
remittance details.

Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.

GL Account Specify the GL account number.

8-137
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-56 (Cont.) Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel by GL) - Field Description

Field Description
GL Description Displays the description of the specified GL account number.
GL Currency Specify the currency of the specified GL account.
Beneficiary Name Specify the beneficiary name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-down
values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system will display the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

GL Amount Displays the GL amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charge amount.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cash Remittance Operation by

Cancel, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click on the Remittance Details data segment to view the additional details of the
remittance.

8-138
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Note:
This data segment is non-editable.

5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the system will hand off the request to Oracle Banking
Payments using Instrument Pay Service. If the remittance is issued by another bank, the
Oracle Banking Branch has to provide the test key number during handoff for validation.
On transaction completion, the Oracle Banking Branch will hand off accounting to
FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the main leg.

8.3.3 Inward Remittance Registration

The Inward Remittance Registration screen is used to register an inward remittance and
create a remittance instrument.
During inward registration, the specified test key will be validated internally to proceed with
registration.
To register an inward remittance:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click Inward
Remittance Registration or specify Inward Remittance Registration in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Inward Remittance Registration screen is displayed.

8-139
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Figure 8-59 Inward Remittance Registration

2. On the Inward Remittance Registration screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-57 Inward Remittance Registration - Field Description

Field Description
Inward Remittance Specify the inward remittance reference issued by the external
Reference bank during registration of the remittance.
Remittance Amount Specify the remittance currency and amount.

Note:
By default, the logged-in branch local currency is
displayed as remittance currency, and it can be
modified.

8-140
 Chapter 8
Cash Remittance

Table 8-57 (Cont.) Inward Remittance Registration - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Bank Code Specify the code of the external issuing bank.
Issuing Bank Name Displays the name of the specified external issuing bank.
Issue Branch Code Specify the branch code of the external issuing bank.
Issue Branch Name Displays the name of the specified external issuing branch.
Payable Bank Code Specify the payable bank code.
Payable Bank Name Displays the payable bank name.
Payable Branch Code Specify the payable branch code.
Payable Branch Name Displays the payable branch name.
Remittance Date Select the issue date of the TT.
Remittance No Specify the remittance number of the TT.
Test Key No Specify the test key number.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Inward Remittance
Registration, and it can be modified.
Beneficiary Details Specify the details under this segment.
Beneficiary Account Displays the beneficiary account number.
Beneficiary Name Displays the beneficiary's name.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification No Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Beneficiary Phone No Specify the phone number of the beneficiary.
Funding Details Specify the fields.
Remitter Account Specify the account number of the remitter.
Remitter Name Displays the name of the specified remitter account.
Address Line 1 to Displays the address of the specified remitter account.
Address Line 4
Identification Type Select the identification type of the beneficiary from the drop-
down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number of the beneficiary.
Identification Type Select the identification type.
Identification Number Specify the identification number.
Remitter Phone No Specify the phone number of the remitter.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

8-141
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves.

8.4 Travellers Cheque

This sub-section describes the various screens used to perform the remittances
related to Travellers Cheque. The screens are described in the following topics:
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• TC Sale by Other Modes
The Teller can use the TC Sale by Other Modes screen to issue TC against the
customer's CASA or a GL account.
• TC Sale Against Walk-in
The Teller can use the TC Sale Against Walk-in screen to sell TC to a walk-in
customer by cash.
• TC Purchase Against Account
The Teller can use the TC Purchase Against Account screen to purchase TC
from a customer and the credit the equivalent amount to the customer account.
• TC Purchase Against Walk-in
The Teller can use the TC Purchase Against Walk-in screen to purchase TC
from a walk-in customer and pay out the equivalent amount in cash.

8.4.1 TC Sale by Other Modes

The Teller can use the TC Sale by Other Modes screen to issue TC against the
customer's CASA or a GL account.
To issue TC against various modes:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click TC Sale by
Other Modes or specify TC Sale by Other Modes in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The TC Sale by Other Modes screen is displayed.

8-142
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Figure 8-60 TC Sale by Other Modes

2. On the TC Sale by Other Modes screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-58 TC Sale by Other Modes - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Bank Code Displays the code of the issuing bank.
Issuing Bank Name Displays the name of the issuing bank.
Issuing Branch Code Displays the code of the issuing branch.
Branch Name Displays the name of the issuing branch.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the logged-in
branch and the issuer codes maintained in the Issuer
Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
Issue Mode Select the mode of issue from the drop-down values (By Account
or By GL).
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and specify the
TC Amount.

8-143
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-58 (Cont.) TC Sale by Other Modes - Field Description

Field Description
TC Date Select the date of the TC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Account Number Specify the account number of the customer. When you press the
Tab key, the system defaults the Account Name.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By Account.

Account Name Displays the name of the account.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By Account.

Account Amount Displays the account amount based on the Exchange Rate, TC
Amount, and Account Number selected.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By Account.

GL Number Click the search icon, and select the GL number from the list of
values.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By GL.

8-144
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-58 (Cont.) TC Sale by Other Modes - Field Description

Field Description
GL Description Displays the description of the specified GL account.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By GL.

GL Amount Displays the account amount based on the Exchange Rate, TC

Amount, and Account Number selected.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Issue Mode is selected
as By GL.

Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

Cheque Date Specify the date of the cheque.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the TC currency is the same as the account currency,
the system displays the exchange rate as 1. This field is
displayed only if Multi-Currency Configuration at
the Function Code indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as TC Sale Against Account and it can be

modified.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields under this section.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4

8-145
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Sell TC.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the TC position (TC outflow) is updated to the teller position for the
combination of Issuer Code, TC Currency, TC Denom code, and Series
to the extent of TC denomination units being purchased.

In addition, during transaction completion, the system updates the TC Status as

Used for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code, Series,
and TC Number. Following main transaction accounting entries is triggered for
Account mode at Oracle Banking Branch:
• Dr Customer Account for TC Amount
• Cr Int. Susp GL for TC Amount
Following main transaction accounting entries is triggered for Account mode at
Oracle Banking Branch:
• Dr Cash GL for TC Amount
• Cr Int. Susp GL for TC Amount
Oracle Banking Payments will pass the credit leg accounting (Debit - Int. Susp GL
and Credit - TC GL) for TC Issuance. During handoff, Oracle Banking Branch
needs to pass the intermediary bridge GL as a Debit account in the request.
• Add TC Denominations to Sell TC
You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data
segment.

8.4.1.1 Add TC Denominations to Sell TC

You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data
segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

Figure 8-61 TC Denominations

8-146
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

To add the denomination details:

On the TC Denominations data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 8-59 TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Specify the TC denomination code from the list of values.
Currency Displays the default TC Currency.
Series Specify the series of the TC Denom Code that needs to be sold from
Teller’s Till.

Note:
The list of values contains the valid TC
series that are available with the Teller
TC position. On click of LOV, the search
criterion field will have Series, and the
result criterion will display the Series and
Start Number.

Count Specify the count of the TC.

Start Number Display the starting number of the series.

Note:
Based on the series selected, the system
will populate the Start Number available
for the combination of Currency, TC
Denom Code, and Series.

End Number Displays the end number, which is the sum of the start number and the
count.
TC Amount Displays the TC Amount, which is the product of the denomination and
the count.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount along with the currency.
Denomination Amount Displays the denomination amount along with the currency.

8.4.2 TC Sale Against Walk-in

The Teller can use the TC Sale Against Walk-in screen to sell TC to a walk-in customer by
cash.
To sell TC to a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click TC Sale Against
Walk-in or specify TC Sale Against Walk-in in the search icon bar and select the
screen.

8-147
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

The TC Sale Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 8-62 TC Sale Against Walk-in

2. On the TC Sale Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-60 TC Sale Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Bank Code Displays the code of the issuing bank.
Issuing Bank Name Displays the name of the issuing bank.
Issuing Branch Code Displays the code of the issuing branch.
Issuing Branch Name Displays the name of the issuing branch.

8-148
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-60 (Cont.) TC Sale Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Issuer Code Click the search icon, and select the issuer code from the list
of values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the
logged-in branch and the issuer codes maintained
in the Issuer Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and
specify the TC Amount.
TC Date Select the date of the TC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Transaction Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values.
When you press the Tab key, the system displays the
transaction amount based on the Exchange Rate, TC
Amount, and Account Number selected.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the TC currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as TC Sale Against Walk-in, and it can

be modified.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields.

8-149
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-60 (Cont.) TC Sale Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary.
Identification Type Select the identification type from the drop-down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC
Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Sell TC.
5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction submission,
the TC position (TC outflow) is updated to the teller position for the
combination of Issuer Code, TC Currency, TC denom Code, and Series
to the extent of TC denomination units being purchased.

In addition, during transaction completion, the system updates the TC status as

Used for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code, Series,
and TC Number. Following main transaction accounting entries are triggered for
this transaction at Oracle Banking Branch.
• Dr Cash GL for TC Amount
• Cr Int. Susp GL for TC Amount
Oracle Banking Payments will pass the credit leg accounting (Debit - Int. Susp GL
and Credit - TC GL) for TC Issuance. During handoff, Oracle Banking Branch
needs to pass the intermediary bridge GL as a Debit account in the request.

8.4.3 TC Purchase Against Account

The Teller can use the TC Purchase Against Account screen to purchase TC from a
customer and the credit the equivalent amount to the customer account.
To purchase TC from a customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click TC
Purchase Against Account or specify TC Purchase Against Account in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The TC Purchase Against Account screen is displayed.

8-150
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Figure 8-63 TC Purchase Against Account

2. On the TC Purchase Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 8-61 TC Purchase Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Bank Code Specify the code of the issuing bank.

Note:
By default, the logged-in bank code is displayed.

Issuing Bank Name Displays the name of the issuing bank specified.
Issuing Branch Code Specify the code of the issuing branch.

Note:
By default, the logged-in branch code is displayed.

Branch Name Displays the name of the issuing branch specified.

8-151
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-61 (Cont.) TC Purchase Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the logged-in
branch and the issuer codes maintained in the Issuer
Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and specify the
TC Amount.
Purchase Date Select the purchase date of the TC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Account Number Specify the account number of the Customer. When you press the
Tab key, the system defaults the Account Name.
Account Name Displays the name of the account.
Account Amount Displays the account amount based on the Exchange Rate, TC
Amount, and Account Number selected.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the TC currency is the same as the account currency,
the system displays the exchange rate as 1. This field is
displayed only if Multi-Currency Configuration at
the Function Code indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as TC Sale Against Account, and it can be

modified.

8-152
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-61 (Cont.) TC Purchase Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields under this section.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4

3. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC

Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Purchase TC.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

The following conditions apply for the TC status:

• If the system finds the TC for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC
Denom Code, Series, and TC Number, the TC status will be updated to Purchased.
• If the record is not found for the above-mentioned combination, during transaction
completion, the system creates individual TC records for the combination of TC
Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code, Series, and TC Number with TC status as
Purchased.
Following main transaction accounting entries is triggered for this transaction at Oracle
Banking Branch:
• Dr Int. Bridge GL for TC Amount
• Cr Customer Account for Customer Account Amount
Oracle Banking Payments will pass the debit leg accounting (Debit – TC GL and Credit –
Int. Bridge GL) for TC Purchase. During handoff, the Oracle Banking Branch needs to
pass the intermediary bridge GL as a credit account in the request.
• Add TC Denominations to Purchase TC
You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data
segment.

8.4.3.1 Add TC Denominations to Purchase TC

You can add the denomination details for the TC in the TC Denominations data segment.
Make sure that the transaction details are added to the transaction screen.

8-153
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Figure 8-64 TC Denominations

To add the denomination details:

On the TC Denominations data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 8-62 TC Denominations - Field Description

Field Description
Denom Code Specify the TC denomination code from the list of values.
Currency Displays the default TC Currency.
Series Specify the series of the TC Denom Code that is being purchased
from the Agent.

Note:
You can also select from the list of
values if the bank is purchasing the
TC which is already sold.

Count Specify the count of the TC.

Start Number Specify the starting number of the series for a new purchase of
TC.

Note:
You can also select from the list of
values if the bank is purchasing the
TC which is already sold.

End Number Displays the end number, which is the sum of the start number
and the count.
TC Amount Displays the TC Amount, which is the product of the
denomination and the count.
Total TC Amount Displays the total TC amount along with the currency.
Denomination Amount Displays the denomination amount along with the currency.

8-154
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

8.4.4 TC Purchase Against Walk-in

The Teller can use the TC Purchase Against Walk-in screen to purchase TC from a walk-in
customer and pay out the equivalent amount in cash.
To purchase TC from a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Remittances, click TC Purchase
Against Walk-in or specify TC Purchase Against Walk-in in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The TC Purchase Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 8-65 TC Purchase Against Walk-in

2. On the TC Purchase Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

8-155
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-63 TC Purchase Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Issuing Bank Code Specify the code of the issuing bank.

Note:
By default, the logged-in bank code is displayed.

Issuing Bank Name Displays the name of the issuing bank specified.
Issuing Branch Code Specify the code of the issuing branch.

Note:
By default, the logged-in branch code is displayed.

Issuing Branch Name Displays the name of the issuing branch specified.
Issuer Code Click the search icon and select the issuer code from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the HO code of the
logged-in branch and the issuer codes maintained
in the Issuer Code Maintenance screen.

Issuer Code Description Displays the description of the specified Issuer Code.
TC Amount Select the TC currency from the drop-down values, and
specify the TC Amount.
Purchase Date Select the purchase date of the TC.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Account Amount Displays the account amount based on the Exchange Rate,
TC Amount, and Account Number selected.

8-156
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

Table 8-63 (Cont.) TC Purchase Against Walk-in - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the TC currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as TC Sale Against Account, and it

can be modified.
Beneficiary Details Specify the fields under this section.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary.
Identification Type Select the identification type from the drop-down values.
Identification Number Specify the identification number.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary.
Address Line 4

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Specify the TC denomination details. For information on the fields in the TC
Denominations segment, refer to Add TC Denominations to Purchase TC.
5. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
6. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

8-157
 Chapter 8
Travellers Cheque

The following conditions apply for the TC status:

• If the system finds the TC for the combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code,
TC Denom Code, Series, and TC Number, the TC status will be updated to
Purchased.
• If the record is not found for the above-mentioned combination, during
transaction completion, the system creates individual TC records for the
combination of TC Currency, Issuer Code, TC Denom Code, Series, and TC
Number with TC status as Purchased.
Following main transaction accounting entries is triggered for this transaction at
Oracle Banking Branch:
• Dr Int. Bridge GL for TC Amount
• Cr Cash GL for Transaction Amount
Oracle Banking Payments will pass the debit leg accounting (Debit – TC GL &
Credit – Int. Bridge GL) for TC Purchase. During handoff, the Oracle Banking
Branch needs to pass the intermediary bridge GL as a credit account in the
request.

8-158
9
Term Deposit Transactions
A deposit with a fixed tenure is called a time deposit or Term Deposits (TD). You can open,
redeem, and top-up a term deposit using the TD transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• TD Account Opening
The Teller can use the TD Account Opening screen to open a term deposit account.
• TD Redemption Against Cash
The Teller can use the TD Redemption Against Cash screen to initiate manual
redemption of the cash from a term deposit account.
• TD Redemption Against Account
The Teller can use the TD Redemption Against Account screen to initiate manual
redemption of the cash from a term deposit account.
• TD Top-Up Against Account
The Teller can use the TD Top-Up Against Account screen to initiate the top-up for a
term deposit account.
• TD Top-Up Against Cash
The Teller can use the TD Top-Up Against Cash screen to initiate the top-up for a term
deposit account.

9.1 TD Account Opening

The Teller can use the TD Account Opening screen to open a term deposit account.
The following details are necessary to open a term deposit account:
• Deposit details
• Funding details
• Joint Holder details
• Payout details
• Rollover details
To open a term deposit account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Term Deposit, click TD Account
Opening or specify TD Account Opening in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The TD Account Opening screen is displayed.

9-1
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Figure 9-1 TD Account Opening

2. On the TD Account Opening screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-1 TD Account Opening - Field Description

Field Description
Customer ID Select the Customer ID from the list of values.
Customer Name Displays the name of the specified Customer ID.
Mode of Operation Select the mode of operations from the drop-down list. The
drop-down list shows the following values:
• Single
• Jointly
• Either Anyone or Survivor
• Former or Survivor
• Mandate Holder
Account Type Select the account type (Single or Joint).
Deposit Product Specify the deposit product (FCUBS Account Class) from the
list of values fetched from FLEXCUBE Universal Banking
System.
Deposit Product Displays the description of the specified deposit product.
Description
Deposit Account Specify the description of the deposit account.
Description
Deposit Account Specify the account opening date of the deposit account.
Opening Date
Deposit Amount Specify the currency and amount for the term deposit.
Deposit Tenor Specify the tenor of deposit in days/months/years.
Maturity Amount Displays the maturity amount along with the currency.

9-2
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Table 9-1 (Cont.) TD Account Opening - Field Description

Field Description
Simulate Click Simulate to fetch the interest data for the given account
class.
Auto-Renewal Select if auto-renewal is required for the deposit account after
maturity.

3. Specify the funding details. For information on the fields in the Funding Details segment,
refer to Add Funding Details.
4. Specify the joint holder details. For information on the fields in the Joint Holders
segment, refer to Add Joint Holders Details.
5. Specify the payout details. For information on the fields in the Payout Details segment,
refer to Add Payout Details.
6. Specify the interest details. For information on the fields in the Interest Details segment,
refer to Add Interest Details.
7. Specify the rollover details. For information on the fields in the Rollover Details segment,
refer to Add Rollover Details.
8. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
Details segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
9. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. When you submit, the transaction details are handed off
to the Term Deposit module in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the TD
account opening process.
Both TD account opening by cash and TD account opening by account can be
viewed from the electronic journal log after submission.

• Add Funding Details

The Funding Details data segment is used to add the details of the pay-by option for the
TD.
• Add Joint Holders Details
The Joint Holders data segment is used to add the details of the joint holders for the TD.
• Add Payout Details
The Payout Details data segment is used to add the details of the maturity payment for
the TD.
• Add Interest Details
The Interest Detail data segment is used to add the details of the interest for the TD.
• Add Rollover Details
The Rollover Details data segment is used to add the parameters for auto-renewal of
the TD account.

9-3
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

9.1.1 Add Funding Details

The Funding Details data segment is used to add the details of the pay-by option for
the TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the TD Account Opening screen.
For more information, refer to TD Account Opening.
2. After you specify the deposit details, click on the Funding Details data segment.

Figure 9-2 Funding Details (Cash)

Figure 9-3 Funding Details (Account)

The pay-by option can be selected as Cash or Account based on the requirement.
To add the funding details:
On the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-2 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Pay By Select Account or Cash for the pay-in option.

9-4
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Table 9-2 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency if the Pay By is selected as
Cash.

Note:
By default, branch currency will be
shown and allow for editing. In
addition, the system defaults the
transaction amount based on the
transaction currency selected.

Account Number Specify the account number from which the deposit account
needs to be funded.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Account Branch Displays the branch of the selected account number.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Account Amount Displays the currency of the selected account number and the
calculated account amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.
This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at
Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

9-5
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Table 9-2 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the deposit currency
into account or transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the deposit currency is the same
as the account or transaction
currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is
displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

9.1.2 Add Joint Holders Details

The Joint Holders data segment is used to add the details of the joint holders for the
TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the TD Account Opening screen.
For more information, refer to TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details.
3. After you specify the funding details, click on the Joint Holders data segment.

Figure 9-4 Joint Holders

This data segment is applicable only if the account type is maintained as Joint.
To add the details of the joint holders:
On the Joint Holders data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

9-6
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Table 9-3 Joint Holders - Field Description

Field Description
Joint Holder ID Select the customer ID, which is considered as a joint account holder
for the deposit account.
Joint Holder Name Displays the customer name as joint holder name.
Relationship Select the relationship of the joint account holder from the drop-down
list.
Joint Holder’s Type Select the joint holder’s type from the drop-down list.

9.1.3 Add Payout Details

The Payout Details data segment is used to add the details of the maturity payment for the
TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the TD Account Opening screen. For
more information, refer to TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details.
3. Specify the details of the joint holders. For more information, refer to Add Joint Holders
Details.
4. After you specify the details of the joint holders, click on the Payout Details data
segment.

Figure 9-5 Payout Details

In this data segment, you can add the parameters for automatic payout through either
account transfer, banker's cheque, or demand draft.
To add the payout details:
On the Payout Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

9-7
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-4 Payout Details - Field Description

Field Description
Component Type Select the component type from the drop-down list. (Principal or
Interest).
Repayment By Select the repayment option from the drop-down list (Account,
Bankers Cheque, or Demand Draft).
Payment Account Specify the account to which the repayment is to be made.

Note:
This field allows you to input only if
repayment is by account.

Account Branch Displays the account branch based on the payment account
selected.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the payout of BC or DD
drawn.

Note:
This field allows you to input only if
the repayment is by BC or DD.

Beneficiary Address 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary for the payout.
Beneficiary Address 4

9.1.4 Add Interest Details

The Interest Detail data segment is used to add the details of the interest for the TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the TD Account Opening screen.
For more information, refer to TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details.
3. Specify the details of the joint holders. For more information, refer to Add Joint
Holders Details.
4. Specify the payout details. For more information, refer to Add Payout Details.
5. After you specify the payout details, click on the Interest Detail data segment.

9-8
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Figure 9-6 Interest Detail

To add the interest details:

On the Interest Detail data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-5 Interest Detail - Field Description

Field Description
Product Details Displays the details of the deposit product.
Select Select the check box to populate the Effective Date.
Waiver Displays the waiver applicability (Y or N).
Product Status Displays the product status code.
Continue Variance on Displays the following applicability of variance:
Rollover • Y – If the variance is to be continued on rollover.
• N – If the variance is not continued on rollover.
Effective Date Displays the effective date of the deposit product.
Select Select the check box to populate the user-defined values.
Date Displays the effective date.
Status Displays the product status.
User Defined Values Displays the user-defined values of the deposit product.
Element Displays the element code. You can edit the value based on the
requirements.
Value Displays the value. You can edit the value based on the requirements.

9-9
 Chapter 9
TD Account Opening

Table 9-5 (Cont.) Interest Detail - Field Description

Field Description
Rate Code Displays the rate code. You can edit the value based on the
requirements.
Deposit Rate Code Displays the deposit rate code. You can edit the value based on the
requirements.
Variance Displays the variance. You can edit the value based on the
requirements.

9.1.5 Add Rollover Details

The Rollover Details data segment is used to add the parameters for auto-renewal of
the TD account.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the TD Account Opening screen.
For more information, refer to TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details.
3. Specify the details of the joint holders. For more information, refer to Add Joint
Holders Details.
4. Specify the payout details. For more information, refer to Add Payout Details.
5. Specify the interest details. For more information, refer to Add Interest Details.
6. After you specify the interest details, click on the Rollover Details data segment.

Figure 9-7 Rollover Details

To add the rollover details:

On the Rollover Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

9-10
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Cash

Table 9-6 Rollover Detail - Field Description

Field Description
Renewal Option Specify the renewal option from the following drop-down values:
• Account Class Tenor
• Account Tenor
• Independent

Note:
This field is mandatory to input if auto-
renewal is selected.

Renewal Type Specify the renewal type from the following drop-down values:
• Principal
• Interest
• Principal + Interest
• Special Amount

Note:
This field is mandatory to input if auto-
renewal is selected.

Renewal Amount Specify the renewal amount and renewal currency.

Note:
The renewal currency is displayed as a
deposit currency.

Renewal Tenor Specify the renewal tenor in days/months/year.

9.2 TD Redemption Against Cash

The Teller can use the TD Redemption Against Cash screen to initiate manual redemption
of the cash from a term deposit account.
It is accomplished by the pre-mature redemption either in full or part, ahead of the maturity
date or after the maturity date when TD is in grace days without maturing.
To perform TD redemption against cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Term Deposit, click TD Redemption
- Cash or specify TD Redemption - Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The TD Redemption Against Cash screen is displayed.

9-11
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Cash

Figure 9-8 TD Redemption Against Cash

2. On the TD Redemption Against Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-7 TD Redemption Against Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Deposit Account Specify the deposit account number.
Query Click Query to fetch the deposit details.
Deposit Details Specify the fields.
Customer ID Displays the Customer ID of the deposit account number.
Account Name Displays the account description of the deposit account.
Principal Amount Click Compute to get the amount paid at the time of term
deposit booking.
Interest Amount Displays the default rate of interest at which the interest
amount is calculated.
Tax Amount Displays the amount to be deducted towards tax.
Interest Rate Click Compute to get the current interest rate applicable after
partial or full redemption.
Maturity Amount Displays the current maturity amount after partial or full
redemption.
Total Payout Amount Displays the total payout amount.

9-12
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Cash

Table 9-7 (Cont.) TD Redemption Against Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Redemption Details Specify the fields.
Redemption Mode Select the redemption mode from the drop-down list (Partial
Redemption or Full Redemption).
Redemption Amount Specify as mentioned below:
• If the Redemption Mode is selected as Partial
Redemption, specify the redemption amount.
• If the Redemption Mode is selected as Full
Redemption, it displays the principal amount as
redemption amount.
Waive Penalty Check this box to waive the penalty for redeeming the term
deposit.

Note:
This is applicable only if the Redemption Mode is
selected as Full Redemption.

Waive Interest Check this box to waive the interest for redeeming the term
deposit.

Note:
This is applicable only if the Redemption Mode is
selected as Full Redemption.

Transaction Currency Specify the currency in which the cash is handed over to the
customer during redemption.
Transaction Amount Displays the transaction amount based on the Redemption
Amount and Transaction Currency.

Note:
If the deposit currency is different from the
transaction currency, the system calculates the
transaction amount based on the exchange rate.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

9-13
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Account

Table 9-7 (Cont.) TD Redemption Against Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate applicable for the transaction
based on the deposit currency and transaction currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Term Deposit Redemption

Against Cash, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. When you submit, the transaction details
are handed off to the Term Deposit module in FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking for the TD redemption process.

9.3 TD Redemption Against Account

The Teller can use the TD Redemption Against Account screen to initiate manual
redemption of the cash from a term deposit account.
It is accomplished by the pre-mature redemption either in full or part, ahead of the
maturity date or after the maturity date when TD is in grace days without maturing.
To perform TD redemption against account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Term Deposit, click TD
Redemption - Account or specify TD Redemption - Account in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The TD Redemption Against Account screen is displayed.

9-14
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Account

Figure 9-9 TD Redemption Against Account

2. On the TD Redemption Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-8 TD Redemption Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Deposit Account Specify the deposit account number.
Account Branch Displays the branch of the deposit account.
Query Click Query to fetch the deposit details.
Deposit Details Specify the fields.
Customer ID Displays the Customer ID of the deposit account number.
Account Name Displays the account description of the deposit account.
Principal Amount Click Compute to get the amount paid at the time of term deposit
booking.
Interest Amount Displays the default rate of interest at which the interest amount is
calculated.
Tax Amount Displays the amount to be deducted towards tax.
Interest Rate Click Compute to get the current interest rate applicable after
partial or full redemption.
Maturity Amount Displays the current maturity amount after partial/full redemption.
Total Payout Amount Displays the total payout amount.
Redemption Details Specify the fields.

9-15
 Chapter 9
TD Redemption Against Account

Table 9-8 (Cont.) TD Redemption Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Redemption Mode Select the redemption mode from the drop-down list (Partial
Redemption or Full Redemption).
Redemption Amount Specify as mentioned below:
• If the Redemption Mode is selected as Partial Redemption,
specify the redemption amount.
• If the Redemption Mode is selected as Full Redemption, it
displays the principal amount as redemption amount.
Waive Penalty Check this box to waive the penalty for redeeming the term deposit.

Note:
This is applicable only if the Redemption Mode is
selected as Full Redemption.

Waive Interest Check this box to waive the interest for redeeming the term deposit.

Note:
This is applicable only if the Redemption Mode is
selected as Full Redemption.

Offset Account Specify the offset account number to which the redeemed funds are
to be paid.
Offset Account Amount The system defaults the amount in the offset account number.
Offset Account Branch The system defaults the branch of the offset account number.
Offset Account Name The system defaults the description of the offset account number.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate applicable for the transaction based on
the deposit currency and offset account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as TD Redemption, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

9-16
 Chapter 9
TD Top-Up Against Account

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised when
the transaction saves. When you submit, the transaction details are handed off
to the Term Deposit module in FLEXCUBE Universal Banking for the TD
redemption process.

9.4 TD Top-Up Against Account

The Teller can use the TD Top-Up Against Account screen to initiate the top-up for a term
deposit account.
The top-up for a term deposit can be done after the opening date and before the maturity
date.
To initiate the top-up for a term deposit:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Term Deposit, click TD Topup - Cash
or specify TD Topup - Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The TD Top-Up Against Account screen is displayed.

Figure 9-10 TD Top-Up Against Account

2. On the TD Top-Up Against Account screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

9-17
 Chapter 9
TD Top-Up Against Account

Table 9-9 TD Top-Up Against Account - Field Description

Field Description
Deposit Account Specify the deposit account number for which the top-up
amount is to be added.
Account Branch Displays the branch of the deposit account number.
Query Click Query, to fetch the deposit details.
Deposit Details Specify the fields.
Original Deposit Displays the original deposit amount of the deposit account.
Amount
Principal Balance Displays the principal balance of the deposit account.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the deposit account number.
Account Name Displays the account description of the deposit account
number.
Interest Rate Displays the interest rate of the deposit account.
Deposit Tenor Displays the tenor of the deposit account.
Interest Amount Displays the calculated interest amount of the deposit account.
Maturity Amount Displays the amount available on the maturity of the deposit
account.
Top-Up Details Specify the fields.
Offset Account Specify the offset account from which the top-up amount
needs to be debited.
Offset Account Branch Displays the branch of the specified offset account.
Account Amount Displays the top-up amount that is added to the deposit
amount. The top-up currency is defaulted to deposit account
currency.
Value Date Specify the date on which the TD top-up needs to be effective.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Term Deposit Top-Up, and it
can be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. When you submit, the transaction details
are handed off to the Term Deposit module in FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking for the TD top-up processing.

9-18
 Chapter 9
TD Top-Up Against Cash

9.5 TD Top-Up Against Cash

The Teller can use the TD Top-Up Against Cash screen to initiate the top-up for a term
deposit account.
The top-up for a term deposit can be done after the opening date and before the maturity
date.
To initiate the top-up for a term deposit:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Term Deposit, click TD Topup - Cash
or specify TD Topup - Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The TD Top-Up Against Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 9-11 TD Top-Up Against Cash

2. On the TD Top-Up Against Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 9-10 TD Top-Up Against Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Deposit Account Specify the deposit account number for which the top-up amount
needs to be added.

9-19
 Chapter 9
TD Top-Up Against Cash

Table 9-10 (Cont.) TD Top-Up Against Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Query Click Query to fetch the deposit details.
Deposit Details Specify the fields.
Original Deposit Amount Displays the principal amount at the time of TD account opening.
Principal Balance Displays the principal balance of the deposit account.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the deposit account number.
Account Name Displays the account description of the deposit account number.
Interest Amount Displays the calculated interest amount of the deposit account.
Interest Rate Displays the interest rate of the deposit account.
Deposit Tenor Displays the tenor of the deposit account.
Interest Amount Displays the calculated interest amount of the deposit account.
Maturity Amount Displays the amount available on the maturity of the deposit
account.
Top-Up Details Specify the fields.
Top-Up Amount Specify the top-up amount that is added to the deposit amount. The
top-up currency is defaulted to deposit account currency.
Value Date Specify the date on which the TD top-up needs to be effective.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Term Deposit Top-Up, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the

Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any warning raised
when the transaction saves. When you submit, the transaction details
are handed off to the Term Deposit module in FLEXCUBE Universal
Banking for the TD top-up processing.

9-20
10
Credit Card Transactions
The Teller can use the screens related to credit card transactions to perform credit card
advances and payments.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Credit Card Advance by Cash
The Teller can use the Advance by Cash screen to disburse the credit card advance in
cash to a walk-in customer against the credit card.
• Credit Card Advance by Transfer
The Teller can use the Advance by Transfer screen to transfer the credit card advance
amount to a customer’s account.
• Credit Card Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Cash screen to accept cash from a
walk-in customer and make a credit card payment.
• Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes
The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment screen to make credit card payments by
debiting a walk-in customer’s account or clearing a cheque.
• Stop Card Request
The Teller can use the Stop Card Request screen to block the credit card of a customer.

10.1 Credit Card Advance by Cash

The Teller can use the Advance by Cash screen to disburse the credit card advance in cash
to a walk-in customer against the credit card.
To perform credit card advance by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Advance by Cash
or specify Advance by Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Advance by Cash screen is displayed.

10-1
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Advance by Cash

Figure 10-1 Advance by Cash

2. On the Advance by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-1 Advance by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Credit Card Specify the credit card number against which the cash
advance is to be made. When you press the Tab key, the
customer details and card details will be displayed in the
Customer Information widget.
Advance Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values and
specify the advance amount.
Advance Tenor Specify the tenor in Days/Months/Years.

10-2
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Advance by Cash

Table 10-1 (Cont.) Advance by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Document Type Select from the drop-down list. The values in the drop-down
list are mentioned below:
• Address Document
• Identity Document
• Financial Document
• General Document
Document Number Specify the document number.

Note:
This field is mandatory only if the document type is
selected.

Approval Reference Specify the approval reference if already approved.

Number
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Account Amount Display the account amount along with the currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charges applicable for the cash advance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Advance by Cash, and it can be

modified.

10-3
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Advance by Transfer

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the cash is disbursed successfully to the walk-in customer against the
credit card.

10.2 Credit Card Advance by Transfer

The Teller can use the Advance by Transfer screen to transfer the credit card
advance amount to a customer’s account.
To perform credit card advance by transfer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Advance by
Transfer or specify Advance by Transfer in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Advance by Transfer screen is displayed.

10-4
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Advance by Transfer

Figure 10-2 Advance by Transfer

2. On the Advance by Transfer screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-2 Advance by Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Credit Card Specify the credit card number against which the cash advance is to
be made. When you press the Tab key, the customer details and
card details will be displayed in the Customer Information widget.
Advance Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values and
specify the advance amount.
Advance Tenor Specify the tenor in Days/Months/Years.
Beneficiary Account Specify the beneficiary account number to which the amount needs
to be transferred.
Beneficiary Name Displays the name based on the specified beneficiary account
number.

10-5
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Advance by Transfer

Table 10-2 (Cont.) Advance by Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Account Branch Displays the branch based on the specified beneficiary account
number.
Document Type Select from the drop-down list. The values in the drop-down list are
mentioned below:
• Address Document
• Identity Document
• Financial Document
• General Document
Document Number Specify the document number.

Note:
This field is mandatory only if the document type is
selected.

Approval Reference Specify the approval reference if already approved.

Number
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Display the account amount along with the currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the cash advance.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is set
as Y.

10-6
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Cash

Table 10-2 (Cont.) Advance by Transfer - Field Description

Field Description
Narrative Displays the narrative as Advance by Transfer, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the advance
against the credit card is transferred successfully to the account of the walk-in
customer.

10.3 Credit Card Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Cash screen to accept cash from a walk-in
customer and make a credit card payment.
To perform credit card payment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Payment by Cash
or specify Payment by Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Credit Card Payment by Cash screen is displayed.

10-7
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Cash

Figure 10-3 Credit Card Payment by Cash

2. On the Credit Card Payment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-3 Credit Card Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Credit Card Specify the credit card number for which the payment is to be
made. When you press the Tab key, the customer details and
card details will be displayed in the Customer Information
widget.
Payment Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values and
specify the payment amount.

Note:
If Multi-Currency and Total Charges
Configuration are set as Y, then the currency in
the Payment Amount field defaults credit card
currency, and it can be modified. If it is set as N,
then the Payment currency is defaulted and
displayed.

10-8
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Cash

Table 10-3 (Cont.) Credit Card Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Credit Amount Display the credit amount along with the currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charges applicable for the credit card
payment.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Credit Card Payment by Cash, and

it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

10-9
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the credit card payment is done successfully.

10.4 Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment screen to make credit card payments by
debiting a walk-in customer’s account or clearing a cheque.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Credit Card Payment by Account
The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Account screen to make credit
card payments by debiting a walk-in customer’s account.
• Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque
The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque screen to
make credit card payments by clearing a cheque.

10.4.1 Credit Card Payment by Account

The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Account screen to make credit card
payments by debiting a walk-in customer’s account.
The fields in this screen are displayed based on the Account payment mode.
To make credit card payment by account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Credit Card
Payment or specify Credit Card Payment in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Credit Card Payment by Account screen is displayed.

10-10
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Figure 10-4 Credit Card Payment by Account

2. On the Credit Card Payment by Account screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-4 Credit Card Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Mode Select the payment mode as Account.
Credit Card Specify the credit card number for which the payment is to be made.
When you press the Tab key, the customer details and card details
will be displayed in the Customer Information widget.

10-11
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Table 10-4 (Cont.) Credit Card Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values and
specify the payment amount.

Note:
If Multi-Currency and Total Charges
Configuration is set as Y, then the currency in the
Payment Amount field to default credit card currency
and can be modified. If it is set as N, then Payment
currency is defaulted and displayed.

Debit Amount Specify the account number from which the amount is to be debited.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or Stopped
or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the date mentioned in the cheque.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Credit Amount Display the credit amount along with the currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

10-12
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Table 10-4 (Cont.) Credit Card Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges applicable for the credit card payment.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is set
as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Credit Card Payment by Account, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charges segment, refer to
Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the credit card
payment is done successfully.

10.4.2 Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque

The Teller can use the Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque screen to make credit
card payments by clearing a cheque.
The fields in this screen are displayed based on the Clearing Cheque payment mode.
To make credit card payment by clearing cheque:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Credit Card
Payment or specify Credit Card Payment in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Credit Card Payment by Cheque screen is displayed.

10-13
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Figure 10-5 Credit Card Payment by Cheque

2. On the Credit Card Payment by Cheque screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-5 Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Mode Select the payment mode as Clearing Cheque.
Credit Card Specify the credit card number for which the payment is to be
made. When you press the Tab key, the customer details and
card details will be displayed in the Customer Information
widget.

10-14
 Chapter 10
Credit Card Payment by Non-Cash Modes

Table 10-5 (Cont.) Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque - Field

Description

Field Description
Cheque Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values and
specify the payment amount.

Note:
If Multi-Currency and Total Charges
Configuration is set as Y, then the currency in
Payment Amount field to default credit card
currency and it can be modified. If it is set as N,
then Payment currency is defaulted and displayed.

Cheque Number Specify the cheque number from which the amount is to be
drawn.
Cheque Date Specify the date of the cheque.
Routing Number Specify the routing number of the cheque.
Drawer Name Specify the drawer name.
Drawer Account Specify the drawer account number.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Credit Amount Display the credit amount along with the currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

10-15
 Chapter 10
Stop Card Request

Table 10-5 (Cont.) Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque - Field

Description

Field Description
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges applicable for the credit card
payment.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Credit Card Payment by Clearing

Cheque, and it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the credit card payment is done successfully.

10.5 Stop Card Request

The Teller can use the Stop Card Request screen to block the credit card of a
customer.
To block a credit card:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Credit Card, click Stop Card
or specify Stop Card in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Stop Card Request screen is displayed.

10-16
 Chapter 10
Stop Card Request

Figure 10-6 Stop Card Request

2. On the Stop Card Request screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 10-6 Stop Card Request - Field Description

Field Description
Card Number Specify the credit card number, which needs to be blocked. When
you press the Tab key, the system will fetch and display the
following details:
• Customer ID
• Account Number
• Branch
• Reference Number
Customer ID Displays the Customer ID for the credit card number specified.
Account Number Displays the account number for the credit card number specified.
Branch Displays the branch for the credit card number specified.
Reference Number Displays the reference number for the credit card number specified.
Card Status Select the card status (Active or Inactive) from the drop-down list.

3. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the credit card
will be blocked successfully.

10-17
11
Loan Transactions
The loan transactions are used to perform loan disbursement and loan repayment
transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Loan Disbursement by Cash
The Teller can use the Loan Disbursement by Cash screen to disburse the loan by
cash.
• Loan Repayment by Cash
The Teller can use the Loan Repayment by Cash screen to accept repayment of a loan
by cash.

11.1 Loan Disbursement by Cash

The Teller can use the Loan Disbursement by Cash screen to disburse the loan by cash.
To perform loan disbursement by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Loan Transactions, click Loan
Disbursement by Cash or specify Loan Disbursement by Cash in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Loan Disbursement by Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 11-1 Loan Disbursement by Cash

11-1
 Chapter 11
Loan Disbursement by Cash

2. On the Loan Disbursement by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 11-1 Loan Disbursement by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Loan Account Specify the loan account number. When you press the Tab
key, the customer details and loan account details will be
displayed in the Customer Information widget.
Disbursement Amount Select the disbursement currency and specify the
disbursement amount.

Note:
By default, the loan account currency is displayed
as disbursement currency. If Multi-Currency
Configuration is set as Y, it can be modified and
if it is N, then the default value cannot be modified.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charges
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

11-2
 Chapter 11
Loan Repayment by Cash

Table 11-1 (Cont.) Loan Disbursement by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Account Amount Displays the total cash to be disbursed to the customer in loan
account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is
set as Y. If the loan account currency is different
from disbursement currency, then the system will
derive the account amount based on the exchange
rate.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Loan Disbursement By Cash, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the transaction details are handed off to the respective
product processor to trigger disbursement and on transaction completion, the cash is
disbursed successfully to the walk-in customer against the loan account.

11.2 Loan Repayment by Cash

The Teller can use the Loan Repayment by Cash screen to accept repayment of a loan by
cash.
To perform loan repayment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Loan Transactions, click Loan
Repayment by Cash or specify Loan Repayment by Cash in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Loan Repayment by Cash screen is displayed.

11-3
 Chapter 11
Loan Repayment by Cash

Figure 11-2 Loan Repayment by Cash

2. On the Loan Repayment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 11-2 Loan Repayment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Loan Account Specify the loan account number. When you press the Tab
key, the customer details and loan account details will be
displayed in the Customer Information widget.
Repayment Amount Select the repayment currency and specify the repayment
amount.

Note:
By default, the loan account currency is displayed
as repayment currency.

Account Branch Specify the branch code.

Query Click this icon to fetch the details of loan account based on the
branch code.

11-4
 Chapter 11
Loan Repayment by Cash

Table 11-2 (Cont.) Loan Repayment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charges (LCY) Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Total Charge
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the repayment amount in loan account currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code indicator level is
set as Y. If the loan account currency is different
from repayment currency, then the system will
derive the account amount based on the exchange
rate.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Loan Repayment By Cash, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

11-5
 Chapter 11
Loan Repayment by Cash

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction submission, the transaction details are handed off to the respective
product processor to trigger disbursement, and on transaction completion, the loan
amount is repaid successfully.

11-6
12
Islamic Transactions
The Teller can use the following screens to perform various Islamic transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Murabaha Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the Murabaha Payment by Cash screen to accept cash to repay the
Murabaha loan amount.
• Islamic Down Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the Islamic Down Payment by Cash screen to accept down payment
by cash for an Islamic loan account.
• Islamic TD Account Opening
The Teller can use the Islamic TD Account Opening screen to open an Islamic TD
account.

12.1 Murabaha Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the Murabaha Payment by Cash screen to accept cash to repay the
Murabaha loan amount.
To perform Murabaha payment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Islamic Transactions, click
Murabaha Payment by Cash or specify Murabaha Payment by Cash in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Murabaha Payment by Cash screen is displayed.

12-1
 Chapter 12
Murabaha Payment by Cash

Figure 12-1 Murabaha Payment by Cash

2. On the Murabaha Payment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 12-1 Murabaha Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Murabaha Account Specify the Murabaha account number. When you press the
Tab key, the customer details and Murabaha account details
will be displayed in the Customer Information widget.
Repayment Amount Select the repayment currency and specify the repayment
amount.

Note:
By default, the repayment currency is displayed as
financing account currency. If the Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y, it can be modified, and if it is N,
then the default value cannot be modified.

12-2
 Chapter 12
Murabaha Payment by Cash

Table 12-1 (Cont.) Murabaha Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the
account currency, the system displays the exchange
rate as 1. This field is displayed only if Multi-
Currency Configuration at the Function Code
indicator level is set as Y.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the repayment amount in loan account currency. This
amount will be derived based on the Repayment Amount and
Exchange Rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Murabaha Payment By Cash, and it

can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the Denomination
segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

12-3
 Chapter 12
Islamic Down Payment by Cash

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction completion, the loan repayment details are handed off to the
Islamic Financing module using the payment service. It is accomplished by
handing off the entries to the accounting system (Dr Cash GL and Cr Int. Bridge
GL) as maintained in the Accounting Definition screen, and the system updates
the Till cash position.

12.2 Islamic Down Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the Islamic Down Payment by Cash screen to accept down
payment by cash for an Islamic loan account.
To perform Islamic down payment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Islamic Transactions, click
Islamic Down Payment by Cash or specify Islamic Down Payment by Cash in
the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Islamic Down Payment by Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 12-2 Islamic Down Payment by Cash

2. On the Islamic Down Payment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

12-4
 Chapter 12
Islamic Down Payment by Cash

Table 12-2 Islamic Down Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Financing Account Specify the financing account number. When you press the Tab key,
the customer details and financing account details will be displayed
in the Customer Information widget.
Down Payment Amount Select the down payment currency and specify the amount.

Note:
By default, the down payment currency is displayed as
financing account currency. If the Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y, it can be modified, and if it is N, then the default
value cannot be modified.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the transaction currency is the same as the account
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as 1.
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Total Charges Displays the total charges in the branch local currency.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Account Amount Displays the down payment amount in loan account currency. This
amount will be derived based on the Down Payment Amount and
Exchange Rate.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator level is
set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Islamic Down Payment By Cash, and it

can be modified.

12-5
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction completion, the loan repayment details are handed off to the
Islamic Financing module. It is accomplished by handing off entries to the
accounting system (Dr Cash GL and Cr Int. Bridge GL) as maintained in the
Accounting Definition screen, and the system updates the Till cash position.

12.3 Islamic TD Account Opening

The Teller can use the Islamic TD Account Opening screen to open an Islamic TD
account.
The following details are necessary to open an Islamic TD account:
• Deposit details
• Funding details
• Joint Holder details
• Payout details
• Rollover details
To open an Islamic TD account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Islamic Transactions, click
Islamic TD Account Opening or specify Islamic TD Account Opening in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Islamic TD Account Opening screen is displayed.

12-6
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Figure 12-3 Islamic TD Account Opening

2. On the Islamic TD Account Opening screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 12-3 Islamic TD Account Opening - Field Description

Field Description
Customer ID Select the Customer ID from the list of values.
Customer Name Displays the name of the specified Customer ID.

12-7
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Table 12-3 (Cont.) Islamic TD Account Opening - Field Description

Field Description
Mode of Operation Select the mode of operations from the drop-
down list. The drop-down list shows the
following values:
• Single
• Jointly
• Either Anyone or Survivor
• Former or Survivor
• Mandate Holder
Account Type Select the account type (Single or Joint).
Deposit Product Specify the deposit product. Click Fetch to
select the appropriate product type.
Deposit Product Description Displays the description of the specified deposit
product.
Deposit Account Description Specify the description of the deposit account.
Deposit Account Opening Date Specify the account opening date of the deposit
account.
Deposit Amount Specify the deposit amount along with the
currency.
Deposit Tenor Specify the deposit tenor in Days/Months/Years.
Profit Rate Specify the profit rate.

3. Specify the funding details. For information on the fields in the Funding Details
segment, refer to Add Funding Details for Islamic TD.
4. Specify the joint holder details. For information on the fields in the Joint Holders
segment, refer to Add Joint Holders for Islamic TD.
5. Specify the payout details. For information on the fields in the Payout Details
segment, refer to Add Payout Details for Islamic TD.
6. Specify the rollover details. For information on the fields in the Rollover Details
segment, refer to Add Rollover Details for Islamic TD.
7. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
8. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the loan repayment details are handed off to the Islamic Financing TD
module for account creation.

12-8
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

• Add Funding Details for Islamic TD

The Funding Details data segment is used to add the details of the pay-by option for the
Islamic TD.
• Add Joint Holders for Islamic TD
The Joint Holders data segment is used to add the details of the joint holders for the
Islamic TD.
• Add Payout Details for Islamic TD
The Payout Details data segment is used to add the details of the maturity payment for
the Islamic TD.
• Add Rollover Details for Islamic TD
The Rollover Details data segment is used to add the parameters for auto-renewal of
the Islamic TD account.

12.3.1 Add Funding Details for Islamic TD

The Funding Details data segment is used to add the details of the pay-by option for the
Islamic TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the Islamic TD Account Opening
screen. For more information, refer to Islamic TD Account Opening.
2. After you specify the deposit details, click on the Funding Details data segment.

Figure 12-4 Funding Details (Cash)

Figure 12-5 Funding Details (Account)

12-9
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

The pay-by option can be selected as Cash or Account based on the requirement.
To add the funding details:
On the Funding Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 12-4 Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Pay By Select Account or Cash for the pay-in option.
Account Number Specify the account number from which the deposit account
needs to be funded.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Account Branch Displays the branch of the selected account number.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Account Amount Displays the currency of the selected account number and the
calculated account amount based on the exchange rate.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Cheque Number Specify the cheque number of the account.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

12-10
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Table 12-4 (Cont.) Funding Details - Field Description

Field Description
Cheque Date Specify the date as mentioned in the cheque.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the
Pay By is selected as Account.

Transaction Amount Specify the transaction currency if the Pay By is selected as

Cash.

Note:
By default, branch currency will be
shown and allow for editing. In
addition, the system defaults the
transaction amount based on the
transaction currency selected.

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate used to convert the deposit currency
into account or transaction currency, and it can be modified.

Note:
If the deposit currency is the same
as the account or transaction
currency, the system will display the
exchange rate as 1. This field is
displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code
Indicator level is set as Y.

12.3.2 Add Joint Holders for Islamic TD

The Joint Holders data segment is used to add the details of the joint holders for the Islamic
TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the Islamic TD Account Opening
screen. For more information, refer to Islamic TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details for Islamic
TD.
3. After you specify the funding details, click on the Joint Holders data segment.

12-11
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Figure 12-6 Joint Holders

This data segment is applicable only if the account type is maintained as Joint.
To add the details of the joint holders:
On the Joint Holders data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Table 12-5 Joint Holders - Field Description

Field Description
Joint Holder ID Select the customer ID which is considered as joint account
holder for the deposit account.
Joint Holder Name Displays the customer name as joint holder name.
Relationship Select the relationship of the joint account holder from the drop-
down list.
Joint Holder’s Type Select the joint holder’s type from the drop-down list.

12.3.3 Add Payout Details for Islamic TD

The Payout Details data segment is used to add the details of the maturity payment
for the Islamic TD.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the Islamic TD Account Opening
screen. For more information, refer to Islamic TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details for
Islamic TD.
3. Specify the details of the joint holders. For more information, refer to Add Joint
Holders for Islamic TD.
4. After you specify the details of the joint holders, click on the Payout Details data
segment.

12-12
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Figure 12-7 Payout Details

In this data segment, you can add the parameters for automatic payout through either
account transfer, banker's cheque, or demand draft.
To add the payout details:
On the Payout Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 12-6 Payout Details - Field Description

Field Description
Component Type Select the component type from the drop-down list. (Principal or
Profit).
Repayment By Select the repayment option from the drop-down list (Account,
Bankers Cheque, or Demand Draft).
Payment Account Specify the account to which the repayment is to be made. This field
allows you to input only if repayment is by account.
Account Branch Displays the account branch based on the payment account selected.
Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the payout of BC or DD drawn.

Note:
This field allows you to input only if the
repayment is by BC or DD.

Beneficiary Address 1 to Specify the address of the beneficiary for the payout.
Beneficiary Address 4

12-13
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

12.3.4 Add Rollover Details for Islamic TD

The Rollover Details data segment is used to add the parameters for auto-renewal of
the Islamic TD account.
The prerequisites are as follows:
1. Make sure that the deposit details are added to the Islamic TD Account Opening
screen. For more information, refer to Islamic TD Account Opening.
2. Specify the funding details. For more information, refer to Add Funding Details for
Islamic TD.
3. Specify the details of the joint holders. For more information, refer to Add Joint
Holders for Islamic TD.
4. Specify the payout details. For more information, refer to Add Payout Details for
Islamic TD.
5. After you specify the payout details, click on the Rollover Details data segment.

Figure 12-8 Rollover Details

To add the rollover details:

On the Rollover Details data segment, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 12-7 Rollover Detail - Field Description

Field Description
Auto Renewal Select if auto-renewal is required for the deposit account.

12-14
 Chapter 12
Islamic TD Account Opening

Table 12-7 (Cont.) Rollover Detail - Field Description

Field Description
Renewal Type Specify the renewal type from the following drop-down values:
• Principal
• Principal + Profit
• Special Amount
• Profit

Note:
This field is mandatory to input if
auto-renewal is selected.

Renewal Amount Specify the renewal amount and renewal currency.

Note:
The renewal currency is displayed
as the deposit currency.

Renewal Tenor Specify the renewal tenor in days/months/year.

12-15
13
Bill Payments
The bill payment transactions are used to make payments for various utility bills.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Bill Payment by Cash
The Teller can use the Bill Payment by Cash screen to make utility bill payments by
cash.
• Bill Payments by Other Modes
The bill payment transactions are used to make payments for various utility bills. Utility
bill payments can be performed for the Institutions, which are already maintained in
product processors. The bill payment can be made by account and clearing cheque.

13.1 Bill Payment by Cash

The Teller can use the Bill Payment by Cash screen to make utility bill payments by cash.
Utility bill payment can be performed for the institutions, which are already maintained in
product processors.
To make bill payment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Bill Payments, click Bill Payment by
Cash or specify Bill Payment by Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Bill Payment by Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 13-1 Bill Payment by Cash

2. On the Bill Payment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

13-1
 Chapter 13
Bill Payment by Cash

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 13-1 Bill Payment by Cash - Field Description

Field Description
Utility Provider ID Click the search icon, and select the utility provider ID from the
list of values.
Settlement Account Displays the account number of the specified utility provider ID.
Account Currency Displays the account currency of the settlement account.
Account Description Displays the account description of the settlement account.
Utility Provider Name Displays the name of the specified utility provider ID.
Consumer Number Specify the consumer number.
Bill Number Specify the bill number.
Bill Date Specify the bill date.
Bill Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify
the bill amount that needs to be paid.
Transaction Amount Select the transaction currency from the drop-down values.
The transaction amount is displayed based on the exchange
rate.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the bill currency is the same as the Transaction
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Bill Payment By Cash, and it can be

modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Specify the denomination details. For information on the fields in the
Denomination segment, refer to Add Denomination Details.
5. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

13-2
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the main leg
accounting (Dr Cash GL and Cr Institution ID account GL) and charge
accounting details are handed off to the Accounting System.

13.2 Bill Payments by Other Modes

The bill payment transactions are used to make payments for various utility bills. Utility bill
payments can be performed for the Institutions, which are already maintained in product
processors. The bill payment can be made by account and clearing cheque.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Bill Payment by Account
The Teller can use the Bill Payment by Account screen to make utility bill payments
against an account.
• Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque
The Teller can use the Bill Payment screen to make utility bill payment by clearing
cheque.

13.2.1 Bill Payment by Account

The Teller can use the Bill Payment by Account screen to make utility bill payments against
an account.
Utility bill payment can be performed for the institutions, which are already maintained in
product processors.
To make utility bill payment by account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Bill Payments, click Bill Payment by
Other Modes or specify Bill Payment by Account in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Bill Payment by Account screen is displayed.

Note:
By default, the system displays the Bill Payment by Account screen.

13-3
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

Figure 13-2 Bill Payment by Account

2. On the Bill Payment by Account screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 13-2 Bill Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Mode Select the payment mode type from the drop-down list. The
values are:
• Account
• Clearing Cheque
Utility Provider ID Click the search icon, and select the utility provider ID from the
list of values.
Utility Provider Name Displays the name of the specified utility provider ID.
Settlement Account Displays the account number of the specified utility provider ID.
Account Currency Displays the account currency of the settlement account.
Account Description Displays the account description of the settlement account.
Consumer Number Specify the consumer number.
Bill Number Specify the bill number.
Bill Date Specify the bill date.
Bill Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify
the bill amount that needs to be paid.
Account Number Specify the account number against which the bill payment
needs to be done.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.

13-4
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

Table 13-2 (Cont.) Bill Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number, if the amount needs to be debited
through the cheque.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the cheque date, if the amount needs to be debited
through the cheque.
Account Amount Displays the amount that needs to be debited based on the
exchange rate.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the bill currency is the same as the Transaction
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Bill Payment Against Account, and

it can be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the main leg
accounting (Dr Cash GL and Cr Institution ID account GL) and charge
accounting details are handed off to the Accounting System.

13-5
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

13.2.2 Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque

The Teller can use the Bill Payment screen to make utility bill payment by clearing
cheque.
Utility bill payment can be performed for the institutions, which are already maintained
in product processors.
To make utility bill payment by account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Bill Payments, click Bill
Payment by Other Modes or specify Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque screen is displayed.

Note:
By default, the system displays the Bill Payment by Account screen.

Figure 13-3 Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque

2. On the Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 13-3 Bill Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Payment Mode Select the payment mode type from the drop-down list. The
values are:
• Account
• Clearing Cheque

13-6
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

Table 13-3 (Cont.) Bill Payment by Account - Field Description

Field Description
Utility Provider ID Click the search icon, and select the utility provider ID from the
list of values.
Utility Provider Name Displays the name of the specified utility provider ID.
Settlement Account Displays the account number of the specified utility provider ID.
Account Currency Displays the account currency of the settlement account.
Account Description Displays the account description of the settlement account.
Consumer Number Specify the consumer number.
Bill Number Specify the bill number.
Bill Date Specify the bill date.
Bill Amount Select the currency from the drop-down values, and specify
the bill amount that needs to be paid.
Cheque Amount Displays the currency and bill amount value.
Clearing Type Click Search icon, and select clearing network code from the
drop-down values.
Routing Number Specify the routing number.
Drawer Account Specify the drawer account.
Drawer Name Specify the drawer name.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number, if the amount needs to be debited
through the cheque.

Note:
The system validates the status of the cheque and
prompts an error message if incase of a Used or
Stopped or Invalid cheque.

Cheque Date Specify the cheque date, if the amount needs to be debited
through the cheque.
Account Amount Displays the amount that needs to be debited based on the
exchange rate.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate.

Note:
If the bill currency is the same as the Transaction
currency, the system displays the exchange rate as
1. This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque,

and it can be modified.

13-7
 Chapter 13
Bill Payments by Other Modes

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion,
the main leg accounting (Dr Cash GL and Cr Institution ID account GL)
and charge accounting details are handed off to the Accounting System.

13-8
14
Session Teller Transactions
The Teller can use the screens under the Teller Session menu to perform financial
transactions for customer accounts in a teller session.
The cash transactions can be performed only when the teller session is started, refer to Start
Teller Session to start a teller session. The Teller can enter the denomination details for a
teller session in the Stop Teller Session screen. Denomination tracking must be enabled for
this functionality.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cash Deposit
The Cash Deposit screen is used to deposit the cash in a CASA through a Teller
Session.
• Cash Withdrawal
The Cash Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw funds from the CASA account of the
customer.
• FX Sale Against Walk-in
The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is used to sell a foreign currency to a walk-in
customer in return for the equivalent amount received in another currency.
• FX Purchase Against Walk-in
The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is used to buy foreign currency from walk-in
customers.
• Loan Repayment by Cash
The Teller can use the Loan Repayment by Cash screen to accept cash from a walk-in
customer to repay the loan amount.

14.1 Cash Deposit

The Cash Deposit screen is used to deposit the cash in a CASA through a Teller Session.
Cash can be deposited in either account currency or any foreign currency that is allowed.
Whenever any transaction in foreign currency is posted to the account, it is converted to the
account currency based on the maintained exchange rate for the transaction.
To deposit the cash through a Teller Session:
1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Session Teller
Transactions, click Cash Deposit or specify the Cash Deposit in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Cash Deposit screen is displayed.

14-1
 Chapter 14
Cash Withdrawal

Figure 14-1 Cash Deposit

2. On the Cash Deposit screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to Table 4-1.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit. For more information on transaction submission and validations,
refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.
The Transaction Completed Successfully information message is
displayed.

14.2 Cash Withdrawal

The Cash Withdrawal screen is used to withdraw funds from the CASA account of the
customer.
The withdrawal is subject to the availability of a sufficient balance or available credit
limit. When the transaction is performed, it updates the available balance in the CASA
account immediately.
To withdraw the cash through a Teller Session:

14-2
 Chapter 14
Cash Withdrawal

1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Session Teller
Transactions, click Cash Withdrawal or specify the Cash Withdrawal in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Cash Withdrawal screen is displayed.

Figure 14-2 Cash Withdrawal

2. On the Cash Withdrawal screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to Table 4-3.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

14-3
 Chapter 14
FX Sale Against Walk-in

On transaction completion, the cash is withdrawn successfully from the customer

account. For more information on transaction submission and validations, refer to
Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

14.3 FX Sale Against Walk-in

The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is used to sell a foreign currency to a walk-in
customer in return for the equivalent amount received in another currency.
To sell a foreign currency to a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Session Teller
Transactions, click FX Sale - Walk-in or specify the FX Sale - Walk-in in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The FX Sale Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

Figure 14-3 FX Sale Against Walk-in

2. On the FX Sale Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to Table 4-6.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.

14-4
 Chapter 14
FX Purchase Against Walk-in

4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction completion, the teller cash position to the equivalent of Sold currency is
deducted, and Received currency is incremented. For more information on transaction
submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash Deposit.

14.4 FX Purchase Against Walk-in

The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is used to buy foreign currency from walk-in
customers.
To buy foreign currency from a walk-in customer:
1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Session Teller
Transactions, click FX Purchase Against Walk-in or specify the FX Purchase Against
Walk-in in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen is displayed.

14-5
 Chapter 14
FX Purchase Against Walk-in

Figure 14-4 FX Purchase Against Walk-in

2. On the FX Purchase Against Walk-in screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to Table 4-8.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval
warning raised when the transaction saves.

On transaction completion, the teller cash position is updated based on the

currency of the Amount Bought and the Amount Paid fields. For more
information on transaction submission and validations, refer to Step 5 in Cash
Deposit.

14-6
 Chapter 14
Loan Repayment by Cash

14.5 Loan Repayment by Cash

The Teller can use the Loan Repayment by Cash screen to accept cash from a walk-in
customer to repay the loan amount.
To make loan repayment by cash:
1. On the Homepage, click Teller. On the Teller Mega Menu, under Session Teller
Transactions, click Loan Repayment by Cash or specify the Loan Repayment by
Cash in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Loan Repayment by Cash screen is displayed.

Figure 14-5 Loan Repayment by Cash

2. On the Loan Repayment by Cash screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to Table 11-2.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
A teller sequence number is generated, and the Transaction Completed
Successfully information message is displayed.

Note:
The transaction is moved to authorization in case of any approval warning
raised when the transaction saves. On transaction completion, the loan amount
is repaid successfully.

14-7
15
Journal Log
The Teller or Supervisor can use screens under the Journal Log menu to view the status of
transactions performed by them. It is also used to resubmit or reject an incomplete
transaction or reverse a completed transaction.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• About Electronic and Servicing Journals
In the Electronic Journal and Servicing Journal screens, Tellers can view the status of
the transactions performed only by them and Supervisors can view the status of the
transactions performed by them and other Tellers.
• Electronic Journal
Tellers and Supervisors can use the Electronic Journal screen to view the status of the
cash transactions performed by them on the posting date.
• Servicing Journal
Tellers and Supervisors can use this screen to view the status of the non-cash
transactions performed by them on the posting date.
• Reassign Transactions
Tellers and Supervisors can use the Reassign Transactions screen to re-assign the
transactions that are pending approval to the other Supervisor or to unlock a locked
transaction.

15.1 About Electronic and Servicing Journals

In the Electronic Journal and Servicing Journal screens, Tellers can view the status of the
transactions performed only by them and Supervisors can view the status of the transactions
performed by them and other Tellers.

Common Operations
These screens are used to perform the following operations:

Table 15-1 Operations in Journal Log

Operation Description
View Status View the status of all transactions performed by the logged-
in Teller ID.
Reverse Completed Transactions Reverse the completed transaction posted by Teller during
the day.
Re-submit Incomplete Transactions Re-submit the incomplete transactions performed by the
logged-in Teller ID, that are either:
• Approved by the supervisor and moved to Teller EJ log
for re-submission.
• Processed by an external system (for example, Oracle
Banking Payments) and responded to Teller with the
status as Success.

15-1
 Chapter 15
About Electronic and Servicing Journals

Table 15-1 (Cont.) Operations in Journal Log

Operation Description
Reject Incomplete Transactions Reject the incomplete transactions that are either:
• Rejected by an external system (for example, Oracle
Banking Payments) with the status as Reject.
• Prompted with error due to processing validations.
View Approval History View the approval history to see the list of all transactions
that are either approved or rejected by the logged-in
approver ID.
Approve or Reject Transactions Approve or Reject the transactions that are assigned to the
logged-in Approver ID during the day.
Discard of Reversal Transactions When the approver rejects the reversal request, the
transaction is marked as rejected and the teller discards the
rejected status, the transaction is moved to the discarded
transaction.

In the tile and grid views, the transactions are displayed for all statuses by default. The
status can be changed using the filters option. If the user closes the screen with a
status other than All, the selected status will default until the browser tab is closed.
The following conditions apply for the default status:

Table 15-2 Conditions for Default Status

Condition Description
The browser tab is not closed The transactions will be displayed for the
previously selected status if the screen is
launched again.
The browser tab is closed and the user The transactions will be displayed for all
logs in to the application in a new tab or statuses if the screen is launched.
window

Common Icons, Actions, and Shortcut Keys

Users can perform one of the following actions on the Electronic Journal and
Servicing Journal screens:

Table 15-3 Symbols

Icon Description
Click on this icon to display the details in the tile view.

Click on this icon to display the details in the grid view.

After filling the necessary fields in the Electronic Journal and Servicing Journal
screens, you can do one of the following steps:

15-2
 Chapter 15
Electronic Journal

Table 15-4 Basic Actions

Action Description
Fetch Click Fetch to get the list of transactions based on the query criteria
specified. When you click Fetch, the following details are displayed for
each transaction:
• Function Code and Screen Name
• Transaction Reference Number
• Teller Sequence Number
• Transaction Amount
• Account Number
• Teller ID
• Teller Remarks
Clear Click Clear to clear the specified values.

Users can also navigate to necessary the transaction; perform the operations using the
shortcut keys as follows:
1. Press the Tab key, and navigate to the list of transactions in grid view.
2. Use Up/Down arrow keys to select the necessary transaction.
3. Use Left/Right arrow keys to select the icon.
4. Press Spacebar to view the operations applicable to the selected transaction.
5. Use Up/Down arrow keys to select the necessary operation.

15.2 Electronic Journal

Tellers and Supervisors can use the Electronic Journal screen to view the status of the cash
transactions performed by them on the posting date.
For information on the common operations and icons on this screen, refer to About Electronic
and Servicing Journals.
To view the status of the cash transactions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Journal Log, click Electronic
Journal or specify Electronic Journal in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Electronic Journal screen is displayed.

15-3
 Chapter 15
Electronic Journal

Figure 15-1 Electronic Journal (List View)

You can perform any of the following actions in this screen:

• Click icon to view the transaction information. This screen provides the
details of the transactions handed off to the external system.

The Transaction Info pop-up screen is displayed.

Figure 15-2 Transaction Info

• Click icon to view the transaction details. The following details are
displayed based on the transaction status in the filters:
– Teller Sequence
– Transaction Reference
– Transaction Status
– Time Resubmitted
– Time Stamp/Approval Time Stamp
– Supervisor ID
– Supervisor Remarks

– Override Info
Click Override Info icon to view the details for approval flow request.

• Click icon to submit the transaction.

• Click icon to discard the transaction.

15-4
 Chapter 15
Electronic Journal

• Click icon to view advice.

• Click icon to reverse the transaction.

Figure 15-3 Electronic Journal (Grid View)

2. Click the icon to filter the results on the tile/grid view based on the search criteria.
The Filters pop-up screen is displayed.

Figure 15-4 Filters (Electronic Journal)

3. On the Filters pop-up screen, specify the details fetch the records. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

15-5
 Chapter 15
Electronic Journal

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 15-5 Filters - Field Description

Field Description
Teller ID Specify the Teller ID.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the
Teller ID from the list of values.

Function Code Specify the function code for which the inquiry is to be made.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the
Teller ID from the list of values.

Branch Posting Date Specify the branch posting date for which the inquiry is to be
made.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Account Number Specify the account number.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the
Teller ID from the list of maintained account
numbers.

Teller Sequence Prefix Click the search icon and select from the list of values.
Transaction Status Select the transaction status from the drop-down values.

Note:
By default, All status is selected.

15-6
 Chapter 15
Servicing Journal

Table 15-5 (Cont.) Filters - Field Description

Field Description
Transaction Reference Specify the transaction reference number.
From Sequence Specify the start number of the sequence range.
Number
To Sequence Number Specify the end number of the sequence range.
From Transaction Time Specify the transaction start time.
To Transaction Time Specify the transaction end time.
From Amount Range Specify the “from” amount of the amount range.
To Amount Range Specify the “to” amount of the amount range.
Transaction Currency Click the search icon and select the transaction currency from
the list of values.

15.3 Servicing Journal

Tellers and Supervisors can use this screen to view the status of the non-cash transactions
performed by them on the posting date.
For information on the common operations and icons on this screen, refer to About Electronic
and Servicing Journals.
To view the status of the non-cash transactions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Journal Log, click Servicing Journal
or specify Servicing Journal in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Servicing Journal screen is displayed.

Figure 15-5 Servicing Journal (Tile View)

You can perform any of the following actions in this screen:

• Click icon to view the transaction information. This screen provides the details
of the transactions handed off to the external system.

The Transaction Info pop-up screen is displayed.

15-7
 Chapter 15
Servicing Journal

Figure 15-6 Transaction Info

• Click icon to view the transaction details. The following details are
displayed based on the transaction status in the filters:
– Teller Sequence
– Transaction Reference
– Transaction Status
– Time Resubmitted
– Time Stamp/Approval Time Stamp
– Supervisor ID
– Supervisor Remarks

– Override Info
Click Override Info icon to view the details for approval flow request.

• Click icon to submit the transaction.

• Click icon to discard the transaction.

• Click icon to view advice.

• Click icon to reverse the transaction.

Figure 15-7 Servicing Journal (Grid View)

2. Click the icon to filter the results on the tile/grid view based on the search
criteria.

15-8
 Chapter 15
Servicing Journal

The Filters pop-up screen is displayed.

Figure 15-8 Filters (Servicing Journal)

3. On the Filters pop-up screen, specify the details fetch the records. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 15-6 Filters - Field Description

Field Description
Teller ID Specify the Teller ID.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the Teller ID
from the list of values.

15-9
 Chapter 15
Servicing Journal

Table 15-6 (Cont.) Filters - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Specify the function code for which the inquiry is to be made.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the Teller ID
from the list of values.

Branch Posting Date Specify the branch posting date for which the inquiry is to be made.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Account Number Specify the account number.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select the Teller ID
from the list of maintained account numbers.

Teller Sequence Prefix Click the search icon and select from the list of values.
Transaction Status Select the transaction status from the drop-down values.

Note:
By default, All status is selected.

Transaction Reference Specify the transaction reference number.

From Sequence Number Specify the start number of the sequence range.
To Sequence Number Specify the end number of the sequence range.
From Transaction Time Specify the transaction start time.
To Transaction Time Specify the transaction end time.
From Amount Range Specify the “from” amount of the amount range.
To Amount Range Specify the “to” amount of the amount range.
Transaction Currency Click the search icon and select the transaction currency from the
list of values.

15-10
 Chapter 15
Reassign Transactions

15.4 Reassign Transactions

Tellers and Supervisors can use the Reassign Transactions screen to re-assign the
transactions that are pending approval to the other Supervisor or to unlock a locked
transaction.
To reassign the Supervisor ID:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Journal Log, click Reassign
Transactions or specify Reassign Transactions in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Reassign Transactions screen is displayed.

Figure 15-9 Reassign Transactions

2. On the Reassign Transactions screen, specify the details fetch the records. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 15-7 Reassign Transactions - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Posting Date Specify the branch posting date for which the inquiry is to be made.

Note:
By default, the current posting date is displayed.

Teller ID Select the Teller ID from the list of values.

15-11
 Chapter 15
Reassign Transactions

Table 15-7 (Cont.) Reassign Transactions - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Specify the function code for which the inquiry is to be made.

Note:
You can also click the search icon and select from the list
of the maintained function codes.

Account Number Specify the account number.

Note:
The LOV fetches a list of the maintained account
numbers.

Teller Sequence Prefix Select from the list of values.

From Sequence Number Specify the start number of the sequence range.
To Sequence Number Specify the end number of the sequence range.
From Transaction Time Specify the transaction start time.
To Transaction Time Specify the transaction end time.
From Amount Range Specify the “from” amount of the amount range.
To Amount Range Specify the “to” amount of the amount range.
Journal Log Type Select the type from the drop-down values (Electronic Journal or
Servicing Journal).

3. After you specify the necessary fields, you can perform one of the following
actions:

Table 15-8 Basic Actions

Action Description
Fetch Click Fetch to get the list of transactions based on the query
criteria specified. When you click Fetch, the following details
are displayed for each transaction:
• Function Code and Screen Name
• Transaction Reference Number
• Teller Sequence Number
• Transaction Amount
• Account Number
• Teller ID
• Supervisor ID
• Teller Remarks
• Supervisor Remarks
Clear Click Clear to clear the transaction list.

15-12
 Chapter 15
Reassign Transactions

The transactions fetched based on the search criteria are displayed in Tile View. In the
Tile View, you can click the necessary icons to perform the operations.

Figure 15-10 List of Transactions

In the transaction record, you can perform one of the following operations:

Table 15-9 Actions for Transaction Record

Action Description

Click on this icon to unlock the transaction.

Click on this icon to reassign the Supervisor ID for the transaction.

15-13
16
Prediction
The screen under the Prediction menu is used to predict the number of service counters.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Teller Service Counters Prediction
The Teller Service Counters Prediction screen is used to predict the number of Teller
service counters required for the specified days.

16.1 Teller Service Counters Prediction

The Teller Service Counters Prediction screen is used to predict the number of Teller
service counters required for the specified days.
To predict the number of Teller service counters:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Prediction, click Teller Service
Counters Prediction or specify Teller Service Counters Prediction in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Teller Service Counters Prediction screen is displayed.

Figure 16-1 Teller Service Counters Prediction

2. On the Teller Service Counters Prediction screen, specify the details fetch the records.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 16-1 Teller Service Counters Prediction - Field Description

Field Description
Current Service Time Specify the time to service business transactions at the Teller
(Minutes) counter.
Branch Customer Lounge Specify the number of persons that can be accommodated at one
Capacity (Persons) time in the physical service area of the Branch.

16-1
 Chapter 16
Teller Service Counters Prediction

Table 16-1 (Cont.) Teller Service Counters Prediction - Field Description

Field Description
Physical Teller Counters Specify the physical teller counters available at the branch.
(Number)
Planned Queue Waiting Specify the waiting time to be achieved at the queue.
Time (Minutes)
Prediction Days Specify the number of days in the future where the Teller counters
are required to be predicted.

3. Click Go.
The predicted value of Teller service counters is displayed. A sample prediction of
Teller service counters based on certain values is shown below.

Figure 16-2 Teller Service Counters Prediction - Sample

16-2
17
Cache
The screen under the Cache menu is used to get the maintenance reflected while performing
the transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Clear Cache
The Clear Cache screen is used to clear the cache to get the maintenance reflected
while performing the transactions.

17.1 Clear Cache

The Clear Cache screen is used to clear the cache to get the maintenance reflected while
performing the transactions.
To clear the cache:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Cache, click Clear Cache or specify
Clear Cache in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Clear Cache screen is displayed.

Figure 17-1 Clear Cache

2. Click the checkboxes to select the desired Cache Name.

3. Click Submit to clear the selected cache.
4. Click OK to close the screen.

17-1
18
Customer Service
The screens under the Customer Service menu are used for customer services and
inquiries.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Cheque Status Inquiry
The Teller can use the Cheque Status Inquiry screen to query the details of a cheque by
specifying the account number and cheque number of the customer.
• Stop Cheque Request
The Teller can use the Stop Cheque Request screen to initiate stop payment of cheque
as requested by the customer.
• Cheque Book Request
The Cheque Book Request screen is used to initiate the cheque book request for a
customer account.
• Passbook Issue
The Teller can use the Passbook Issue screen to issue a new passbook for a customer
account.
• Passbook Update
The Teller can use the Passbook Update screen to update the passbook of a customer
account.
• Passbook Status Change
The Teller can use the Passbook Status Change screen to initiate the status change for
a passbook of a customer account.
• Passbook Reprint
The Teller can use the Passbook Reprint screen to reprint the passbook of a customer
account.
• Account Balance Inquiry
The Teller can use the Account Balance Inquiry screen to inquire about the account
balance details of a customer account.
• Account Statement Request
The Teller can use the Account Statement Request screen to initiate an account
statement request for a customer account.
• Customer Address Update
The Teller can use the Customer Address Update screen to initiate a service request to
update the customer address details.
• Account Address Update
The Teller can use the Account Address Update screen to initiate a service request to
update the address details of the customer account.
• Customer Contact Update
The Customer Contact Update screen is used to initiate a service request to update the
customer contact details.

18-1
 Chapter 18
Cheque Status Inquiry

• Cheque Book Status Change

The Cheque Book Status Change screen is used to change the status of a
cheque book.

18.1 Cheque Status Inquiry

The Teller can use the Cheque Status Inquiry screen to query the details of a cheque
by specifying the account number and cheque number of the customer.
To query the details of a cheque:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Cheque Status Inquiry or specify Cheque Status Inquiry in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Cheque Status Inquiry screen is displayed.

Figure 18-1 Cheque Status Inquiry

2. On the Cheque Status Inquiry screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-1 Cheque Status Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the cheque status
needs to be enquired.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number.

18-2
 Chapter 18
Stop Cheque Request

Table 18-1 (Cont.) Cheque Status Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Query Click Query to fetch the details of the cheque.
Clear Click Clear to clear the details.
Account Name Displays the name of the account holder.
Account Branch Displays the account branch code.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the account.
Cheque Status Displays the status of the cheque (Used, Unused, or
Stopped).
Value Date Displays the date specified on the cheque.
Cheque Amount Displays the cheque amount.
Beneficiary Displays the name of the beneficiary.

18.2 Stop Cheque Request

The Teller can use the Stop Cheque Request screen to initiate stop payment of cheque as
requested by the customer.
A stop payment request is an instruction given by a customer to the bank directing it to stop
payment against a Cheque. This instruction can be based on a single cheque or a range of
cheque numbers.
To initiate stop payment of cheque:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Stop
Cheque Request or specify Stop Cheque Request in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Stop Cheque Request screen is displayed.

Figure 18-2 Stop Cheque Request

18-3
 Chapter 18
Cheque Book Request

2. On the Stop Cheque Request screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-2 Stop Cheque Request - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which you need to enforce a
stop payment.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number on which the stop payment is to
be enforced.
Select Multiple Cheques Select this option to enforce stop payment on multiple cheques
of the customer account.
Cheque Amount Specify the cheque amount for which the cheque is drawn.
The cheque currency is defaulted to account currency.
Effective Date Specify the date on which the cheque is drawn.
Expiry Date Specify the expiry date of the cheque.
Reason Type Specify the type of stop payment (Stop or Lost).
Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the
system in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at the Function Code Indicator
level is set as Y.

Narrative The system displays the default narrative as Stop Cheque

Request, and it can be modified. You can specify the reason/
purpose for which the stop payment is issued.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the core FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to
update the stop payment status in Customer Accounts Maintenance to indicate the
presence of a stop payment instruction for the customer account.

18.3 Cheque Book Request

The Cheque Book Request screen is used to initiate the cheque book request for a
customer account.
To initiate the cheque book request:

18-4
 Chapter 18
Cheque Book Request

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Cheque
Book Request or specify Cheque Book Request in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Cheque Book Request screen is displayed.

Figure 18-3 Cheque Book Request

2. On the Cheque Book Request screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-3 Cheque Book Request - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the cheque book request is to
be initiated.
Cheque Book Type Click the search icon, and select the checkbook type from the list of
values.
Number of Leaves Select the number of leaves from the following drop-down values:
• 10
• 25
• 50
• 100
First Cheque Number Specify the number of the first cheque.
Request Date By default, the current posting date is displayed as the request date.

18-5
 Chapter 18
Passbook Issue

Table 18-3 (Cont.) Cheque Book Request - Field Description

Field Description
Request Status Select the request status from the drop-down values (Requested or
Delivered).
Deliver To Specify the mode of delivery (Branch or Post).
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the Customer if the delivery mode is selected
Address Line 4 as Post.

Note:
By default, the address of the customer account is
displayed, and it can be modified.

Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Book Request, and it can
be modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the core FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system for
the cheque book issuance of the customer account.

18.4 Passbook Issue

The Teller can use the Passbook Issue screen to issue a new passbook for a
customer account.
To issue a new passbook:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Passbook Issue or specify Passbook Issue in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Passbook Issue screen is displayed.

18-6
 Chapter 18
Passbook Issue

Figure 18-4 Passbook Issue

2. On the Passbook Issue screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-4 Passbook Issue - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the passbook needs to be
issued.
Account Currency Displays the currency of the specified account number.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the specified account number.
Account Open Date Displays the account opening date.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID.
Address Line 1 to Specify the address of the customer.
Address Line 4

18-7
 Chapter 18
Passbook Update

Table 18-4 (Cont.) Passbook Issue - Field Description

Field Description
Passbook Number Displays the passbook number that needs to be issued.

Note:
The passbook number is generated based on the
instrument number maintenance.

Passbook Status By default, the passbook status is displayed as Issued.

Total Charge Amount Displays the total charge amount, which is computed by the system
in the local currency of the branch.

Note:
This field is displayed only if Multi-Currency
Configuration at Function Code Indicator level is set
as Y.

Passbook Category Click the search icon, and select the passbook category from the
list of values.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Passbook Issue, and it can be
modified.
Old Passbook Details Specify the fields.
Passbook Number Displays the old passbook number that is issued to the customer
account.
Issue Date Displays the issue date of the old passbook.
Status Movement Displays the current status of the passbook.
Status Change Date Displays the date on which the current status got modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details
segment, refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
The passbook issue request is handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking
system to update the passbook issue request for the customer account.

18.5 Passbook Update

The Teller can use the Passbook Update screen to update the passbook of a
customer account.
To update the passbook:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Passbook Update or specify Passbook Update in the search icon bar and select
the screen.

18-8
 Chapter 18
Passbook Update

The Passbook Update screen is displayed.

Figure 18-5 Passbook Update

2. On the Passbook Update screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields, refer
to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-5 Passbook Update - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the passbook needs to be
updated.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the specified account number.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Passbook Number Displays the passbook number that needs to be updated.
Start Line Specify the start line of the passbook to enter the transaction
details.
Previous Balance Displays the previous balance in the passbook.
Compression Required Check this box to modify the defaulted values related to transaction
compression.
Compression Start Date Displays the compression start date.
Compression End Date Displays the compression end date.

3. Click Submit.

18-9
 Chapter 18
Passbook Status Change

The request is handed off to the core FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to
fetch and update the passbook statement of the customer account.

18.6 Passbook Status Change

The Teller can use the Passbook Status Change screen to initiate the status change
for a passbook of a customer account.
To initiate the status change of a passbook:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Passbook Status Change or specify Passbook Status Change in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Passbook Status Change screen is displayed.

Figure 18-6 Passbook Status Change

2. On the Passbook Status Change screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-6 Passbook Status Change - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the passbook status
change is required.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the specified account number.

18-10
 Chapter 18
Passbook Reprint

Table 18-6 (Cont.) Passbook Status Change - Field Description

Field Description
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Customer ID Displays the customer ID of the specified account number.
Passbook Number Displays the current passbook number of the customer
account.
Issue Date Displays the date of issue of the current passbook number.
Passbook Status Select the passbook status to be changed from the following
drop-down values:
• Active
• Close
• Reissue
Status Description Displays the description of the selected status.
Status Change Date Displays the current posting date as the status change date.
Narrative Displays default the narrative as Passbook Status Change,
and it can be modified.
Old Passbook Details Specify the fields.
Passbook Number Displays the old passbook number of the customer account.
Issue Date Displays the issue date of the old passbook.
Status Movement Displays the current status of the old passbook number.
Status Description Displays the description of the status of the old passbook
number.
Status Change Date Displays the date on which the old passbook is modified.

3. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system for updating the
status change of the old passbook number.

18.7 Passbook Reprint

The Teller can use the Passbook Reprint screen to reprint the passbook of a customer
account.
To reprint the passbook:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Passbook
Reprint or specify Passbook Reprint in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Passbook Reprint screen is displayed.

18-11
 Chapter 18
Passbook Reprint

Figure 18-7 Passbook Reprint

2. On the Passbook Reprint screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-7 Passbook Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the passbook needs to
be updated.
Account Branch Displays the branch code of the specified account number.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Account Currency Displays the account currency.
Reprint Basis Select the reprint basis from the following options:
• Reporting Based on Transaction
• Reporting Based on Date

18-12
 Chapter 18
Account Balance Inquiry

Table 18-7 (Cont.) Passbook Reprint - Field Description

Field Description
Last Number of Specify the last number of transactions.
Transactions

Note:
This field is enabled only if Reprint Basis is
selected as Transaction.

From Date Specify the date from which the transactions need to be
printed.

Note:
This field is enabled only if Reprint Basis is
selected as Date.

To Date Displays the current date.

Note:
This field is enabled only if Reprint Basis is
selected as Date.

Narrative Displays the narrative as Passbook Reprint, and it can be

modified.

3. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the core FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to fetch the
details and reprint the passbook of the customer account.

18.8 Account Balance Inquiry

The Teller can use the Account Balance Inquiry screen to inquire about the account
balance details of a customer account.
To inquire about the account balance details:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Account
Balance Inquiry or specify Account Balance Inquiry in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Account Balance Inquiry screen is displayed.

18-13
 Chapter 18
Account Balance Inquiry

Figure 18-8 Account Balance Inquiry

2. On the Account Balance Inquiry screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-8 Account Balance Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Account Specify the account number for which the account balance
needs to be enquired.
Query Click Query to fetch and display the details.
Clear Click Clear to clear the details.
Account Currency Displays the currency for which the account balance needs to
be enquired.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Account Class Displays the account class of the specified account number.
Account Class Displays the description of the account class.
Description
Account Open Date Displays the date on which the account is opened.
Account Type Displays the type of the account.
Mode of Operation Displays the mode of operation.
Balance Details Specify the fields.
Current Balance Displays the current balance of the account.

18-14
 Chapter 18
Account Balance Inquiry

Table 18-8 (Cont.) Account Balance Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Uncollected Displays the uncollected balance.
Blocked Displays the blocked balance.
Available Displays the balance available in the specified account.
Total Available Displays the total available balance.
Book Balance Displays the book balance.
Sweep Enabled Check this box if sweep needs to be enabled.
Sweep Eligible Balance Displays the sweep eligible balance.
ILM Sweep Eligible Displays the ILM sweep eligible balance.
Balance
Temporary Overdraft Displays the temporary overdraft limit.
Limit
Net Balance Displays the net balance.
Passbook Balance Displays the passbook balance.
Account Status Specify the fields.
Posting Allowed Select this checkbox if posting is allowed for the account.
Stop Payment Select this checkbox if stop payment is allowed for the
account.
No Credit Select this checkbox if credit is not allowed for the account.
Debit Override Select this checkbox if debit override is allowed for the
account.
Overdraft Select this checkbox if the overdraft is allowed for the account.
Dormant Select this checkbox if the account is dormant.
Frozen Select this checkbox if the account is frozen.
No Debit Select this checkbox if the debit is not allowed for the account.
Credit Override Select this checkbox if credit override is allowed for the
account.
Status Change Select this checkbox if the automatic status change is allowed.
Automatic

3. Click on the Interest and Charges Details data segment.

The Interest and Charges Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 18-9 Interest and Charges Details

18-15
 Chapter 18
Account Statement Request

4. On the Interest and Charges Details segment, view the details. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 18-9 Interest And Charge Details - Field Description

Field Description
Accrued Interest (Dr) Displays the debit accrued interest.
Accrued Interest (Cr) Displays the credit accrued interest.
Interest Due Displays the interest due.
Charges Due Displays the charges due.
Last Interest Debit Displays the last interest debit.
Last Interest Credit Displays the last interest credit.
Last DR Activity Displays the last DR activity.

5. Click on the Turnover Details data segment.

The Turnover Details data segment is displayed.

Figure 18-10 Turnover Details

6. On the Turnover Details segment, view the details. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 18-10 Turnover Details - Field Description

Field Description
Opening Displays the opening turnover details.
Daily Turnover (Dr) Displays the debit daily turnover.
Daily Turnover (Cr) Displays the credit daily turnover.
Current (ACY) Displays the current (ACY).

18.9 Account Statement Request

The Teller can use the Account Statement Request screen to initiate an account
statement request for a customer account.
To initiate account statement request:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Account Statement Req or specify Account Statement Req in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Account Statement Request screen is displayed.

18-16
 Chapter 18
Account Statement Request

Figure 18-11 Account Statement Request

2. On the Account Statement Request screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-11 Account Statement Request - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Account Specify the account number for which the account statement needs
to be requested.
Account Name Displays the name of the specified account number.
Request Date Displays the current posting date as the request date.
Statement Type Specify the type of statement requested (Detailed or Summary).
From Date Specify the start date for the date range.
To Date Specify the end date for the date range.
Balance Type Specify if the account statement needs to be generated based on
Book Date or Value Date.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Account Statement, and it can be
modified.

3. Specify the charge details. For information on the fields in the Charge Details segment,
refer to Add Charge Details.
4. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to initiate an
account statement request.

18-17
 Chapter 18
Customer Address Update

18.10 Customer Address Update

The Teller can use the Customer Address Update screen to initiate a service request
to update the customer address details.
To update the customer address:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Cust
Address Update or specify Cust Address Update in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Customer Address Update screen is displayed.

Figure 18-12 Customer Address Update

2. On the Customer Address Update screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-12 Customer Address Update - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Number Specify the customer number for which the address details
need to be updated.
Customer Name Displays the customer name for the customer number
specified.
Correspondence Specify the fields.
Address
Address Line 1 to Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
Address Line 4 modified.
Country Code Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
modified.

18-18
 Chapter 18
Account Address Update

Table 18-12 (Cont.) Customer Address Update - Field Description

Field Description
Permanent Address Specify the fields.
Same as Select this checkbox to populate the Correspondence
Correspondence Address to Permanent Address.
Address
Address Line 1 to Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
Address Line 4 modified.
Country Code Displays the maintained Country code, and it can be modified.
Residential Address Specify the fields.
Same as Permanent Select this checkbox to populate the Permanent Address
Address details to Residential Address.
Address Line 1 to Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
Address Line 4 modified.
Country Code Displays the maintained country code, and it can be modified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Customer Address Update,
and it can be modified.
Review and Submit Click Review and Submit to review the request details and
submit.

3. Click Submit.
The request details are handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system for the
customer address update.

18.11 Account Address Update

The Teller can use the Account Address Update screen to initiate a service request to
update the address details of the customer account.
To update the account address:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Account
Address Update or specify Account Address Update in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Account Address Update screen is displayed.

18-19
 Chapter 18
Account Address Update

Figure 18-13 Account Address Update

2. On the Account Address Update screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-13 Account Address Update - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the customer account number for which the address
details need to be updated.
Account Branch Displays the customer name for the customer number
specified.
Correspondence Specify the fields.
Address
Address Line 1 to Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
Address Line 4 modified.
Country Code Displays the maintained address details, and it can be
modified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Account Address Update,
and it can be modified.
Review and Submit Click Review and Submit to review the request details and
submit.

3. Click Submit.
The request details are handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system
for the account address update.

18-20
 Chapter 18
Customer Contact Update

18.12 Customer Contact Update

The Customer Contact Update screen is used to initiate a service request to update the
customer contact details.
To update the customer contact details:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click Cust
Contact No Update or specify Cust Contact No Update in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Customer Contact Update screen is displayed.

Figure 18-14 Customer Contact Update

2. On the Customer Contact Update screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 18-14 Customer Contact Update - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Number Specify the customer number for which the contact details need to
be updated.
Customer Name Displays the customer name for the customer number specified.
Customer Details Specify the fields.
Mobile Phone Displays the mobile number, and it can be modified.
Work Phone Displays the work phone number, and it can be modified.
Residential Phone Displays the residential phone number, and it can be modified.
Fax Phone Displays the fax phone number, and it can be modified.

18-21
 Chapter 18
Cheque Book Status Change

Table 18-14 (Cont.) Customer Contact Update - Field Description

Field Description
Preferred Contact Time Displays the preferred contact time, and it can be modified.
Preferred Communication Displays the communication mode, and it can be modified.
Mode
Email Address Displays the email id of the customer, and it can be modified.
Alternate Email Address Displays the alternate email id of the customer, and it can be
modified.
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Contact Details Update, and it
can be modified.
Review and Submit Click Review and Submit to review the request details and submit.

3. Click Submit.
The request details are handed off to the FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system
for updating customer contact details.

18.13 Cheque Book Status Change

The Cheque Book Status Change screen is used to change the status of a cheque
book.
To change the cheque book status:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Customer Service, click
Cheque Book Status Change or specify Cheque Book Status Change in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Cheque Book Status Change screen is displayed.

Figure 18-15 Cheque Book Status Change

2. On the Cheque Book Status Change screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

18-22
 Chapter 18
Cheque Book Status Change

Table 18-15 Cheque Book Status Change - Field Description

Field Description
Account Number Specify the account number for which the cheque book status
needs to be changed.
First Cheque Number Specify the number of the first cheque.
Request Status Select the status that needs to be updated for the cheque book. The
drop-down values are as follows:
• Delivered
• Requested
• Destroyed
Narrative Displays the default narrative as Cheque Book Status Change,
and it can be modified.

3. Click Submit.
The request is handed off to the core FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system to change
the status of the cheque book.

18-23
19
Branch Dashboard
The Branch Dashboard facilitates the integration of data from multiple screens and displays it
as a dashboard on the application landing page.
It provides a comprehensive and consolidated snapshot in tiny windows to access
information quickly. Thus, helping the bank staff to analyze, monitor, and make better
decisions, which in turn helps to save time and cost. To access the Branch Dashboard, select
Dashboard from the main menu.

Figure 19-1 Dashboard

The Branch Dashboard is designed to display the widgets distributed in rows without the
vertical scroll bar. The widgets are as follows:
• Till Cash Position
• Inventory in Hand
• My Transaction Status
• Customer Search
• Current Till Position
• Frequent Customer Operations
• Frequent Branch Operations
• Customer Service Request
• Notifications
• Alerts
• Frequent Links

19-1
 Chapter 19

Till Cash Position

This widget displays the currency-wise cash position of the Teller Id, which includes
Opening Balance, Total Debit, and Total Credit, which happened for the day, and
the Closing Balance. In addition, the system displays the denomination-wise count for
the closing balance amount. The FILTERS option can be used to display Till cash
position based on the currency, branch code, and date.

Figure 19-2 Till Cash Position

Inventory in Hand
This widget displays the list of inventory counts available with the branch for the
logged-in Teller Id.

Figure 19-3 Inventory in Hand

My Transaction Status
This widget displays the total transaction count performed by the logged-in Teller. Each
slice represents the status-wise count of the transactions performed by the Teller.
The FILTERS option can be used to display transaction status based on the branch
code, branch date, and transaction type (Cash/Non-Cash).

19-2
 Chapter 19

Figure 19-4 My Transaction Status

Customer Search
The Teller can use this widget to query and find a specific customer account. For more
information on this segment, refer to Customer Search.

Figure 19-5 Customer Search

Current Till Position

This widget displays the Till amount available for the logged-in Teller ID. The FILTERS option
can be used to display the current Till amount based on the currency, branch code, and date.
The minimum and maximum values are fetched from the user preferences.

Figure 19-6 Current Till Position

19-3
 Chapter 19

Frequent Customer Operations

The Teller can use this widget to launch one of the frequently used Customer
Transactions screens from the landing page. This option is easy to access instead of
using Menu Item Search or navigating through the menu to process transactions.

Figure 19-7 Frequent Customer Operations

Note:
The system displays an error message stating that the User does not have
rights to access this screen if the user is trying to access the restricted
screen in the widget.

Frequent Branch Operations

The Teller can use this widget to launch one of the frequently used Branch
Operations screens from the landing page. This option is easy to access instead of
using Menu Item Search or navigating through Menu to process transactions.

Figure 19-8 Frequent Branch Operations

19-4
 Chapter 19

Note:
The system displays an error message stating that the User does not have rights to
access this screen if the user is trying to access the restricted screen in the widget.

Customer Service Request

The Teller can use this widget to launch one of the frequently used Customer Service
screens from the landing page. This option is easy to access instead of using Menu Item
Search or navigating through Menu to process transactions.

Figure 19-9 Customer Service Request

Note:
The system displays an error message stating that the User does not have rights to
access this screen if the user is trying to access the restricted screen in the widget.

Notifications
The Teller can use this widget to view the bank-specific notifications or instructions provided
for the bank staff. Generation of the notifications to be configured at the back-end.

19-5
 Chapter 19

Figure 19-10 Notifications

19-6
 Chapter 19

Alerts
The Teller is alerted through this widget on the user-specific information based on which the
Teller has to act accordingly. Generation of the alerts to be configured at the back-end.

19-7
 Chapter 19

Figure 19-11 Alerts

19-8
 Chapter 19

Frequent Links
The Teller can use this widget to access the frequently used links to refer for transaction
submission and other operational activities during the day.

Figure 19-12 Frequent Links

19-9
20
Branch Maintenance
The branch maintenance screens are used to perform the maintenance for processing the
branch transactions.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Common Actions for Branch Maintenance
The screens under the Branch Maintenance menu contain common icons to perform all
or a few of the basic actions.
• Maintain Teller Branch Parameters
The Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance screen is used to set the teller preferences
for a branch.
• Maintain Branch Role Limits
The Branch Role Limits screen is used to set the input and authorization limits for a
specific role.
• Maintain Branch User Preferences
The Branch User Limits screen is used to set preferences like Till/Vault Indicator,
currency holding preferences, and currency limit preferences for the branch user.
• Maintain Denominations
The Denominations Maintenance screen is used to maintain the standard currency
denominations for each currency that the bank deals with.
• Maintain Function Code Definitions
The Function Code Definition screen is used to specify the preferences for the function
code.
• Maintain Function Code Preferences
The Function Code Preferences screen is used to define the workflow preferences
(validation preferences and authorization preferences) for a function code.
• Maintain Default Authorizer
The Default Authorizer screen is used to define the default authorizer who can authorize
a specific function code for a branch user.
• Maintain Accounting and Settlements
The Settlements Definition screen is used to define the settlement and accounting
parameters that are applicable for processing the branch transactions involving a function
code.
• Maintain Instrument Numbers
The Instrument Number Maintenance screen is used to maintain the instrument type
for each branch.
• Maintain Inter Branch Transit Account
The Inter Branch Transit Account screen is used to maintain inter-branch transit
account for each branch using the receiving branch, vault, and currency combination.
• Maintain External System
The External System Maintenance screen is used to define the parameters for the
external system.

20-1
 Chapter 20

• Maintain Channel Limits

The Channel Limits screen is used to maintain the channel limits for a particular
customer group.
• Maintain Account Group
The Account Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the account
codes, and these groups can be used for charge calculation.
• Maintain Branch Group
The Branch Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the branch
codes, and these groups can be used for charge calculation.
• Maintain Customer Group
The Customer Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the
customer codes, and these groups can be used for charge calculation.
• Maintain Charge Definitions
The Charge Definition Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge
definitions.
• Create Charge Pricing Maintenance
The Create Charge Pricing Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge
pricing.
• View Charge Pricing Maintenance
The View Charge Pricing Maintenance screen is used to view the summary and
details of charge pricing IDs.
• Maintain Charge Condition Group
The Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of
the charge condition codes.
• Maintain Charge Decisions
The Charge Decision Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge
decisions.
• Charge Decision Enquiry
The Charge Decision Enquiry screen is used to inquire about the details of
charge definition and charge pricing for the specified search criteria.
• Maintain Reject Codes
The Reject Code Maintenance screen is used to maintain the reject codes.
• Maintain Clearing Network Codes
The Clearing Network screen is used to maintain the clearing network codes.
• Maintain Denomination Variations
The Denomination Variation Maintenance screen is used to maintain the
denomination-wise variations.
• Maintain External Bank Codes
The External Bank Code screen is used to maintain the bank codes and branch
codes.
• Maintain Issuer Codes
The Issuer Code Maintenance screen is used to maintain the issuer codes for TC
transactions.
• Maintain Utility Providers
The Utility Provider Maintenance screen is used to link the utility provider with a
settlement account.

20-2
 Chapter 20
Common Actions for Branch Maintenance

• Maintain Account Entitlement Restriction

This screen is used to maintain the Account Entitlement Group by grouping the set of
Customer accounts. To process this screen, type Account Entitlement Restriction in
the Menu Item Search located at the left corner of the application toolbar and select the
appropriate screen (or) do the following steps:

20.1 Common Actions for Branch Maintenance

The screens under the Branch Maintenance menu contain common icons to perform all or a
few of the basic actions.
The following are the symbols/icons you are likely to find in the branch maintenance screens:

Table 20-1 Symbols

Icon Description
Click this icon to search the configured records based on the specified
search criteria. The input fields to search the records are displayed
based on the maintenance screen.
Click this icon to reset the search results to the default summary view.

Table 20-2 Common Actions for Maintenance Screens

Icon Description
Save Click Save to view the configured details in the summary view.
Cancel Click Cancel to terminate the operation.

On the records displayed in the summary view, you can perform one of the following actions:

Table 20-3 Common Actions for Records

Action Description
New Create a new record.
Unlock Modify the details and save.
Delete Delete an unauthorized record.
Authorize Authorize the record.
Close Close the record.
Reopen Re-open a closed record.
Audit Audit the record.

20.2 Maintain Teller Branch Parameters

The Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance screen is used to set the teller preferences for
a branch.
To maintain teller branch parameters:

20-3
 Chapter 20
Maintain Teller Branch Parameters

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance or specify Teller Branch Parameters
Maintenance in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-1 Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-2 Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance (New)

3. On the Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For
more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-4 Teller Branch Parameter Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Select the branch code from the list of the available options.
Description Displays the description of the branch.

20-4
 Chapter 20
Maintain Branch Role Limits

Table 20-4 (Cont.) Teller Branch Parameter Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Denomination Tracking Specify the denomination that needs to be tracked for the
Required Vault, Till and Vault, or None. The descriptions of the drop-
down values are given below:
• Till and Vault - To track denomination for Tills and Vault.
By default, this option is selected.
• Vault - To track denomination only for Vault, if a Vault is
involved in the transaction.
• None - To indicate that denomination tracking is not
required for any transaction.
Currency Code Displays the currency for which the Minimum Cash Holding
Limit or Maximum Cash Holding Limit is to be maintained
for the branch.
Minimum Cash Holding Displays the minimum cash holding limit for the branch.
Limit
Maximum Cash Holding Displays the maximum cash holding limit for the branch.
Limit

Note:
The maximum cash holding amount must not be
less than the minimum cash holding amount.

Action Click the necessary icon to edit, save, or delete a row.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured teller branch parameters.

20.3 Maintain Branch Role Limits

The Branch Role Limits screen is used to set the input and authorization limits for a specific
role.
Four static roles are factory-shipped and mapped with the functional activity codes. The
functional activity codes maintained for each service/menu item are mapped to the respective
roles. The details of each static role are provided in the table below:

Table 20-5 Static Roles

Static Role Description

OBBRN_BASE This role is mapped with all functional activity codes related to the
service side. A user ID has to be mapped to OBBRN_BASE and one or
more of the following roles based on the requirement:
• OBBRN_MANAGER
• OBBRN_TELLER
• OBBRN_VAULT
OBBRN_MANAGER This role is mapped with all menu-related functional activity codes, and
the user can access all screens.

20-5
 Chapter 20
Maintain Branch Role Limits

Table 20-5 (Cont.) Static Roles

Static Role Description

OBBRN_TELLER This role is mapped with functional activity codes related to the menu
that can be accessed by a Teller user. The user can access the
screens except the following:
• All screens under Branch Maintenance
• Open Branch Batch
• Close Branch Batch
• Open Vault Batch
• Close Vault Batch
• Buy Cash from Currency Chest
• Sell Cash to Currency Chest
• Interbranch Transaction Request
• Interbranch Transaction Input
• Interbranch Transaction Liquidation
OBBRN_VAULT This role is mapped with functional activity codes related to the menu
that can be accessed by a Vault user. The user can access only the
following screens:
• Open Vault Batch
• Close Vault Batch
• Buy Cash from Currency Chest
• Sell Cash to Currency Chest
• Interbranch Transaction Request
• Interbranch Transaction Input
• Interbranch Transaction Liquidation

To maintain branch role limits:

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Branch Role Limits or specify Branch Role Limits in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Branch Role Limits summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-3 Branch Role Limits (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Branch Role Limits Maintenance screen is displayed.

20-6
 Chapter 20
Maintain Branch User Preferences

Figure 20-4 Branch Role Limits Maintenance

3. On the Branch Role Limits Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-6 Branch Role Limits Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Role ID Select the role ID for which the limit preferences are to be set.
Role Description Displays the role description for the selected Role ID.
Supervisor Role Select if the defined role is a designated supervisor of the branch
who has the authorization rights.
Limit Currency Select the currency code in which the limits are to be specified.
Input Limit Specify the transaction input limit for a single transaction.
Authorization Limit Specify the maximum amount that the role is allowed to process
while authorizing a transaction.
Action Click the necessary icon to edit, save, or delete a row.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured branch role limits.

20.4 Maintain Branch User Preferences

The Branch User Limits screen is used to set preferences like Till/Vault Indicator, currency
holding preferences, and currency limit preferences for the branch user.
To maintain branch user preferences:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Branch
User Limits or specify Branch User Limits in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Branch User Limits summary screen is displayed.

20-7
 Chapter 20
Maintain Branch User Preferences

Figure 20-5 Branch User Limits (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The User Preferences screen is displayed.

Figure 20-6 User Preferences

3. On the User Preferences screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-7 User Preferences - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Click the search icon, and select the branch code from the list
of values.
User ID Click the search icon, and select the user ID for which the
branch preferences are to be maintained.
Till/Vault Indicator Select from the following drop-down values:
• Till
• Vault
• Both
• None

20-8
 Chapter 20
Maintain Denominations

Table 20-7 (Cont.) User Preferences - Field Description

Field Description

Shortage/Overage GL Note:
Currently not used, meant for future use.

Carry Forward Allowed Select if the funds are allowed to carry forward for the next day.
Inter Branch Select if the transfer between the branches is allowed.
Transactions Allowed
Receive Email Select if the Teller needs to receive emails for approval of
transactions.
Receive Notification Select if the Teller needs to receive notifications in Dashboard.
Currency Holding Specify the fields.
Preferences
Currency Code Click the search icon, and select the currency code to specify
the cash holding preferences.
Minimum Balance Specify the minimum balance to be maintained for the Till or
Vault.
Maximum Balance Specify the maximum balance to be maintained for the Till or
Vault.
Currency Limit Specify the fields.
Preferences
Currency Code Click the search icon, and select the currency in which the
limits (transactions amounts) will be expressed.
Max Transaction Specify the maximum transaction amount allowed that the user
Amount can enter in a single transaction.
Authorization Limit Specify the maximum amount that the user (to which the limit
role is associated) is allowed to process while authorizing a
transaction.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured user preferences.

20.5 Maintain Denominations

The Denominations Maintenance screen is used to maintain the standard currency
denominations for each currency that the bank deals with.
For example, the denominations for the currency USD can be maintained as follows:

Table 20-8 Denominations Maintenance for USD Currency

CCY CODE DENM CODE DESCRIPTION VALUE NOTE / COIN

USD D100 100 dollars 100 NOTE
USD D50 50 dollars 50 NOTE

20-9
 Chapter 20
Maintain Denominations

Table 20-8 (Cont.) Denominations Maintenance for USD Currency

CCY CODE DENM CODE DESCRIPTION VALUE NOTE / COIN

USD D20 20 dollars 20 NOTE
USD D10 10 dollars 10 NOTE
USD D5 5 dollars 5 NOTE
USD D1N 1 dollar 1 NOTE
USD D1C 1 dollar 1 COIN
USD C25 25 cents 0.25 COIN
USD C10 10 cents 0.1 COIN
USD C5 5 cents 0.05 COIN
USD C1 1 cent 0.01 COIN

To maintain denominations:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Denominations Maintenance or specify Denominations Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Denominations Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-7 Denominations Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Denomination Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-8 Denomination Maintenance

20-10
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Definitions

3. On the Denomination Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-9 Denomination Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Currency Code Specify the currency for which the currency denomination is to be
maintained.
Currency Description Specify the description of the currency code.
Denomination Type Select the denomination type.
Denomination Details Specify the fields.
Denomination ID Specify the denomination code.
Description Specify the description of the denomination code.
Value Specify the numeric value of the denomination code.
Sequence Number Specify the number such that the denomination codes will be
displayed in the same sequence maintained.
Type Specify the type as Coin or Note.
Large Denomination Select if a particular denomination is to be maintained as a large
denomination.
Add Click Add to add the specified denomination details as an entry to
the table.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured denominations.

20.6 Maintain Function Code Definitions

The Function Code Definition screen is used to specify the preferences for the function
code.
For the list of function codes and the respective screen names, refer to List of Function
Codes.
To maintain function code definitions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Function
Code Definition or specify Function Code Definition in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Function Code Definition summary screen is displayed.

20-11
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Definitions

Figure 20-9 Function Code Definition

2. Click the icon.

The Function Code Definition (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-10 Function Code Definition

Note:
In Function Code Definition screen, reversal allowed flag will not be
enabled for BC Payment Reversal, DD Payment Reversal, and Cash
Remittance Reversal. The system displays an error message stating that
the Reversal is not supported, making reversal allowed as N.

3. On the Function Code Definition screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-12
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Definitions

Table 20-10 Function Code Definition - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Select from the list function codes that are factory shipped. For the
list of function codes and the respective screen names, refer to List
of Function Codes.
Function Code Displays the description of the function code.
Description
Transaction Limit Specify the maximum transaction amount allowed for this function
code in branch currency.
Support Child Function Select if the specified function code needs to act as the parent
Code function code.
Parent Function Code Specify the applicable parent function code.

Note:
This field is enabled only if the Support Child Function
Code is not selected.

Next Date Transaction Select if the next day transaction posting needs to be allowed for the
Allowed specified function code.
Charge Details Specify the fields.
Apply Charges Specify if charges are applicable for this transaction.
Exchange Rate Details Specify the fields.
Rate Type Select the rate type for the transaction code.
Rate Code Select the rate code for the transaction code.
Override Limit Specify the override limit. The system displays the default override
limit currency as GBP.
Stop Limit Specify the stop limit. The system displays the default stop-limit
currency as GBP.
Additional Preferences Specify the fields.
Reversal Allowed Specify if the reversal is allowed for the transaction.

Note:
Reversal allowed will be disabled for remittances and
clearing transactions. Hence, reversal will not be enabled
in the journal log.

Reversal Requires Specify if the authorization is required for a reversal transaction.

Authorization
Reversal includes Specify if the charges are to be reversed along with transaction
charges reversal.
Reversal Advice Name Select the reversal advice name from the list of values.
Input Slip Name Specify the input slip name.

20-13
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Definitions

Table 20-10 (Cont.) Function Code Definition - Field Description

Field Description
Input Slip Confirmation Select if the input slip confirmation is required for the transaction. If
this option is selected for a transaction screen, the Input-Slip button
will be displayed on the screen.
On the specified transaction screens, you can click Input-Slip to
view the input slip before transaction submission. Once you click
Input-Slip, the system validates mandatory fields. In addition, you
can perform any of the following actions:
• Confirm and Print – This icon is enabled only if Input Slip
Confirmation is selected in the Function Code Definition
screen. In addition, the transaction can be submitted only if the
receipt is confirmed. Click this button to confirm and print the
receipt.
• Print – Click Print to print the generated slip and provide it to
the customer.
• Close – Click Close to close the generated receipt.

Note:
If the mandatory fields are not filled, the system shows
an error message Value is required, wherever
applicable.

Transaction Alert Select the alert notification preference from the drop-down list. The
Preference values are mentioned below:
• SMS – the system sends an SMS notification of the
transactions to the registered mobile number of the customer.
• Email – the system sends an email notification of the
transactions to the registered email ID of the customer.
• Both – the system sends SMS and email notifications of the
transactions to the registered mobile number and email ID of
the customer.
• None – the system will not send any notifications to the
customer.

Note:
The setup for Plato alerts needs to be completed and
Kafka topics need to be created to enable e-mail alerts.
For information on setup, refer to Oracle Banking Branch
Installation Guide.

Advices This section allows selecting advice for multiple Function Codes.
Advice Name Displays the advice name.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured function code definitions.

20-14
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

20.7 Maintain Function Code Preferences

The Function Code Preferences screen is used to define the workflow preferences
(validation preferences and authorization preferences) for a function code.
For the list of function codes and the respective screen names, refer to List of Function
Codes. The rule-based authorization option in this screen is used to configure multi-level
authorization with AND or OR condition. The multi-level authorization feature is described
with the following example.
The sample user roles are considered as follows:
• JUNIOR TELLER (Supervisor enabled)
• SENIOR TELLER1
• SENIOR TELLER2
• OFFICER LEVEL1
• OFFICER LEVEL2
• BRANCH MANAGER
The sample values for limits and roles maintained are as below:

Table 20-11 Sample Values for Multi-level Authorization

Transaction Limit Primary Authorization Alternate Authorization

50,000 to 9,99,999 SENIOR TELLER2, OFFICER LEVEL1, OFFICER LEVEL2 and
and OFFICER LEVEL2 BRANCH MANAGER
10,00,000 to 99,99,99,99,999 SENIOR TELLER1 and OFFICER OFFICER LEVEL2 or
LEVEL1 BRANCH MANAGER

The approval needs to be provided by the roles configured with AND or OR condition defined
either in the primary authorization path or in the alternate authorization path. Based on the
sample values provided, the following are some possible scenarios for multi-level
authorization:

Table 20-12 Examples for Multi-Level Authorization

Condition Authorization Process

Teller with JUNIOR TELLER The transaction gets completed automatically without authorization.
role inputs a cash deposit
transaction of amount 10,000

20-15
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

Table 20-12 (Cont.) Examples for Multi-Level Authorization

Condition Authorization Process

Teller with JUNIOR TELLER The transaction gets assigned to all the roles mentioned in Primary
role input a cash deposit of and Alternate Authorization paths. For example, when a user with the
60,000 OFFICER LEVEL2 role picks the transaction and authorizes it, the
transaction gets assigned to the other three roles in the Primary and
Alternate paths. Further, based on the user who picks for approval, the
corresponding path will be chosen by the system. If a user with
BRANCH MANAGER Role picks the transaction for approval, the
system identifies the Alternate Path for approval and ends the
authorization process. If a user with SENIOR TELLER2 role picks the
transaction and authorizes, then the corresponding Primary Path will
be chosen by the system for OFFICER LEVEL1 to authorize the
transaction.
Teller inputs an account The transaction gets assigned to all the roles mentioned in Primary
transfer of 20,00,000 and Alternate Authorization paths. When a user with BRANCH
MANAGER role or OFFICER LEVEL2 role picks the transaction and
authorizes it, the system identifies the path as Alternate and ends the
authorization process. Else if a user with OFFICER LEVEL1 picks the
transaction and authorizes it, the system identifies the path as Primary
for SENIOR TELLER1 to authorize the transaction.

To maintain function code preferences:

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Function Code Preferences or specify Function Code Preferences in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Function Code Preferences summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-11 Function Code Preferences (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Function Code Preferences screen is displayed.

20-16
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

Figure 20-12 Function Code Preferences

Figure 20-13 Rule-Based Authorization

Figure 20-14 Transaction Limit Check

3. On the Function Code Preferences screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-17
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

Table 20-13 Function Code Preferences - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Select the branch code from the list of values.

Note:
The list of values should have the *.* for the "All"
option.

Branch Description Displays the description of the branch code.

Function Code Specify the function code. The list of values displays the valid
function codes.
Function Code Displays the description of the function code.
Description
General Preferences Specify the fields. This segment can be used to configure
single-level authorization of the preferences with the use of the
Authorizer Role field.
Teller Sequence Select this option to generate the Teller sequence number.
Request
Teller Sequence Prefix Specify the prefix for the generation of the Teller sequence
number.

Note:
This is mandatory only if the Teller Sequence
Request is selected.

Validation Preferences Specify the fields.

Charges Amendable Select if the charges are allowed to modify for the transaction.
Exchange Rate Select if the exchange rate is allowed to modify for the
Amendable transaction.
Rule-Based Select if the rule-based authorization is required for the
Authorization transaction.

Note:
Assignment mode to be defined as 'Auto' if Rule
based auth flag is selected.

20-18
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

Table 20-13 (Cont.) Function Code Preferences - Field Description

Field Description
Email Approval Select if authorization through email is required for a
Required transaction.

Note:
If this option is selected in override confirmation,
then an email will be sent as per the assignment
mode maintained. This email will be sent to the
selected approver or a list of approvers associated
with the role maintained. The approvers will get an
email for authorization only if receive email flag is
selected in the User Preferences screen. Once the
email is received, Approver can either approve or
reject the transaction. When you click the Approve
or Reject, an email will be automatically opened in
the system where the approver can type their
comments. The setup for Plato alerts needs to be
completed and Kafka topics need to be created to
enable e-mail alerts. For information on setup, refer
to Oracle Banking Branch Installation Guide.

Signature Verification Select if the Teller needs to verify the customer’s signature
Required while submitting the transaction.
Authorization Specify the fields.
Preferences
Authorization required Select if the authorization is required for the inter-branch
for Interbranch transaction.
Transaction
Authorization required Select if the authorization is required in case you have
for Charge Amendment amended the charge defaulted by the system.
Authorization required Select if the authorization is required in case you have
for Exchange Rate amended the exchange rate defaulted by the system.
Amendment
Authorization required Select if the authorization is required by default for the
by Default transaction.
Assignment Mode Select to indicate whether remote authorization assignment is
the automatic or manual operation for the transaction.
Authorizer Role Select the role of the authorizers. The users belonging to this
role are the valid authorizers for this workflow.

Note:
This field is applicable, if assignment mode is
Manual or if assignment mode is Auto and no
default authorizer is maintained for the user.

20-19
 Chapter 20
Maintain Function Code Preferences

Table 20-13 (Cont.) Function Code Preferences - Field Description

Field Description
Rule-Based Specify the fields. This segment can be used to configure
Authorization multi-level authorization of the preferences with the use of
Supervisor Role ID and Alternate Supervisor Role ID fields.

Note:
Rule Based Authorization cannot be applied for
customer servicing transactions.

Currency Select the currency of the transaction from the LOV.

From Amount Specify the "From" cap amount.
To Amount Specify the "To" cap amount.
Amend Charge Select from the drop-down values (Yes or No).
Amend Rate Select from the drop-down values (Yes or No).
Interbranch Transaction Select from the drop-down values (Yes or No).
Supervisor Role ID Select the supervisor role ID from the list of values. The
following conditions apply to this field:
• More than one role can be added for authorization.
• If multiple roles are added, it is not mandatory to authorize
in sequential order of the roles added.
• The roles added in this field are considered for the
primary level of authorization.
Supervisor Role Logical Select the logical operator AND or OR. If AND is chosen, all
Operator the Supervisor role specified in primary path has to authorize
the transaction. If OR is chosen, either of the Supervisor role
has to authorize the transaction.
Alternate Supervisor Select the alternate role ID from the list of values. The
Role ID following conditions apply to this field:
• More than one role can be added for authorization.
• If multiple roles are added, it is not mandatory to authorize
in sequential order of the roles added.
• The roles added in this field are considered for the
secondary level of authorization.
Alternate Supervisor Select the logical operator AND or OR. If AND is chosen, all
Role Logical Operator the Supervisor role specified in primary path has to authorize
the transaction. If OR is chosen, either of the Supervisor role
has to authorize the transaction.
Transaction Limit Check Specify the details under this section. Double-click on a row to
enable the fields.
Transaction Currency Click the search icon, and select the transaction currency from
the list of values.
Transaction Amount Specify the transaction amount.
Action Click the necessary icon to save, edit, or delete the values of a
row.

4. Click Save.

20-20
 Chapter 20
Maintain Default Authorizer

The summary view is displayed with the configured function code preferences.

20.8 Maintain Default Authorizer

The Default Authorizer screen is used to define the default authorizer who can authorize a
specific function code for a branch user.
Once it is defined, the system automatically routes the transactions of this function code to
the default authorizer defined for the branch user.
To maintain default authorizer:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Default
Authorizer or specify Default Authorizer in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Default Authorizer summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-15 Default Authorizer (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Default Authorizer (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-16 Default Authorizer

3. On the Default Authorizer screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-21
 Chapter 20
Maintain Accounting and Settlements

Table 20-14 Default Authorizer - Field Description

Field Description
User ID Select the user ID from the list of values. The list consists of
user IDs for which a default authorizer needs to be maintained.
User Name Displays the name of the user, when you select the user ID.
Branch Code Select the branch code from the list of values. This field is
enabled if the All option is selected in the User ID field.

Note:
If a specific authorizer is selected, then the system
will default the home branch as branch code.

Branch Name Displays the branch name, when you select the Branch Code.
Default Authorizer Select the default authorizer from the list of values, if it is
already set while assigning the transaction. If the mode
assigned is Manual, it allows changing the default authorizer.
Select the authorizer ID from the adjoining option list. The
options list consists of authorizers who are mapped to a role
with Savings Authorizer flag value as Y or All option.
Description Displays the description.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured default authorizer.

20.9 Maintain Accounting and Settlements

The Settlements Definition screen is used to define the settlement and accounting
parameters that are applicable for processing the branch transactions involving a
function code.
To maintain accounting and settlements:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Settlements Definition or specify Settlements Definition in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Settlements Definition summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-17 Settlements Definition (Summary)

20-22
 Chapter 20
Maintain Accounting and Settlements

2. Click the icon.

The Accounting Settlement screen is displayed.

Figure 20-18 Accounting Settlement

3. On the Accounting Settlement screen, specify the fields. For more information on fields,
refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-15 Accounting Settlement - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the branch for which the accounting details need to be
defined from the list of values.

Note:
The value *.* indicates the "All" option.

Currency Select the currency for which the accounting details need to be
defined from the list of values.

Note:
The value *.* indicates the "All" option.

Function Code Select the function code for which the accounting details need to be
defined from the list of values.

20-23
 Chapter 20
Maintain Accounting and Settlements

Table 20-15 (Cont.) Accounting Settlement - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Displays the description of the selected function code.
Description
Transaction Account Select the transaction account or GL from the list of values. The list
of values displays all valid GLs maintained. This field is kept blank if
the transaction account needs to be selected from the transaction
screen.

Note:
LOV query will fetch the Nostro type of accounts for 9009
and 9010 function codes. For other function codes, only
GL accounts will be fetched from LOV.

Offset Account/GL No Select the offset account or GL from the list of values. The list of
values displays all valid GLs maintained.

Note:
LOV query will fetch the Nostro type of accounts for 9009
and 9010 function codes. For other function codes, only
GL accounts will be fetched from LOV.

Transaction Code for Select the transaction code used for debit accounting from the list of
Debit values.
Transaction Code for Select the transaction code used for credit accounting from the list
Credit of values.
Main Leg Accounting Select to pass the main accounting entries along with the charges
Required defined in the transaction code.

Netting Charge Required Note:

This field is meant for future use.

Profit Reval GL Specify the profit revaluation GL details.

Note:
This field is used during accounting only when the
transaction involves negotiated exchange rate.

20-24
 Chapter 20
Maintain Instrument Numbers

Table 20-15 (Cont.) Accounting Settlement - Field Description

Field Description
Loss Reval GL Specify the loss revaluation GL details.

Note:
This field is used during accounting only when the
transaction involves negotiated exchange rate.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured accounting details.

20.10 Maintain Instrument Numbers

The Instrument Number Maintenance screen is used to maintain the instrument type for
each branch.
To maintain instrument numbers:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Instrument Number Maintenance or specify Instrument Number Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Instrument Number Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-19 Instrument Number Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Instrument Number Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.
3. On the Instrument Number Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-25
 Chapter 20
Maintain Inter Branch Transit Account

Figure 20-20 Instrument Number Maintenance (New)

Table 20-16 Instrument Number Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Instrument Type Specify the instrument type for which the instrument
maintenance needs to be done.
Branch Select the branch code from the list of values.
Generate Instrument Specify Generate Instrument Number as Yes/No by selecting
Number the radio-button.
• If Yes, then Instrument number will be generated by
OBBRN.
• If No, then Instrument number will be generated by
OBPM.
Cheque Number Specify the cheque number for which the instrument
maintenance needs to be done.
Number of Leaves Specify the number of leaves.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured instrument number.

20.11 Maintain Inter Branch Transit Account

The Inter Branch Transit Account screen is used to maintain inter-branch transit
account for each branch using the receiving branch, vault, and currency combination.
To maintain inter-branch transit account:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Inter Branch Transit Account or specify Inter Branch Transit Account in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Inter Branch Transit Account summary screen is displayed.

20-26
 Chapter 20
Maintain Inter Branch Transit Account

Figure 20-21 Inter Branch Transit Account (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-22 Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance

3. On the Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-17 Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Code Select the branch code from the list of values, which provides all the
branch codes maintained in the system.
Branch Name Display the description of the selected branch code.
Receiving Branch Specify the destination branch to which the cash is transferred.
Branch Name Display the description of the selected Receiving Branch code.
Currency Specify the currency of the cash.

20-27
 Chapter 20
Maintain External System

Table 20-17 (Cont.) Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Transit Account Specify the transit account that is used to track the movement of
cash.
Action Click the necessary icon to edit, save, or delete a row.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured inter-branch transit account.

20.12 Maintain External System

The External System Maintenance screen is used to define the parameters for the
external system.
The parameters are defined whenever there is an external system call to the Oracle
Banking Branch external API. Only the registered users can make the external system
call to process the transaction.
To maintain external system:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
External System Maintenance or specify External System Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The External System Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-23 External System Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The External System Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-24 External System Maintenance (New)

20-28
 Chapter 20
Maintain External System

3. On the External System Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-18 External System Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
External System Code Specify the system code of the registered external system.
External System Name Specify the name of the registered external system.
Function Code Specify the function code of the transaction, which needs to be
performed through the external system. You can also select from
the list of values.
On Warning Select from the drop-down list. The values in the drop-down list are
mentioned below:
• Ignore – Select if you need to ignore the override raised and
process the transaction until completion.
• Error – Select if you need to show the error message and stop
the transaction.
On Approval Select from the drop-down list. The values in the drop-down list are
mentioned below:
• Ignore – Select if you need to ignore the override raised and
process the transaction until completion.
• Error – Select if you need to show the error message and stop
the transaction.
Incoming User Type Select the incoming user type from the drop-down values. The
values in the drop-down list are mentioned below:
• User – User appearing in the payload to process the
transaction.
• Default User – Default user that is maintained to process the
transaction.
• Role – Role appearing in the payload to process the
transaction.
• Default Role – Default role that is maintained to process the
transaction.
Default User Specify the default user maintained.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Incoming User Type is
selected as Default User.

20-29
 Chapter 20
Maintain Channel Limits

Table 20-18 (Cont.) External System Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Default Role Specify the default role maintained.

Note:
This field is applicable only if the Incoming User Type is
selected as Default Role.

External Initiation Select if you need to log the transaction into Journal Log with the
status Initiated.
Till Update Select if you need to update the Till.
Authorization required by Select if you need to raise an override even if it is N in function
Default preference.
Action Click the necessary icon to edit, save, or delete a row.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of external system
maintenance.

20.13 Maintain Channel Limits

The Channel Limits screen is used to maintain the channel limits for a particular
customer group.
To maintain channel limits:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Channel Limits or specify Channel Limits in the search icon bar and select the
screen.
The Channel Limits summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-25 Channel Limits (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Channel Limits Maintenance screen is displayed.

20-30
 Chapter 20
Maintain Channel Limits

Figure 20-26 Channel Limits Maintenance

3. On the Channel Limits Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-19 Function Code Definition - Field Description

Field Description
Account Group Click the search icon and select account group from the list of
values.

Note:
The list of values provides the account groups that are
maintained in the Account Group Maintenance screen.

Channel Select value from the drop-down list.

Note:
By default, the value is selected as Branch.

Currency Select the currency from the list of values.

Max Withdrawal Limit Per Specify the maximum amount for the cash withdrawal transactions
Day per day.
No. of Transactions Per Specify the maximum limit for the number of cash withdrawal
Day transactions per day.

4. Click Save.

20-31
 Chapter 20
Maintain Account Group

The summary view is displayed with the configured details of channel limits
maintenance.

20.14 Maintain Account Group

The Account Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the account
codes, and these groups can be used for charge calculation.
To maintain account group:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Account Group Maintenance or specify Account Group Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Account Group Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-27 Account Group Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Account Group Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-28 Account Group Maintenance (New)

3. On the Account Group Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-32
 Chapter 20
Maintain Branch Group

Table 20-20 Account Group Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Account Group Code Specify the account group code.
Account Group Code Specify the description of the account group code.
Description
Add Accounts Specify the fields.
Account Number Specify the account number. You can also select from the list of
values.
Account Name Displays the description for the specified account number.
Reset Click Reset to reset the accounts added.
Add Accounts Click Add Accounts to add the account specified.
Accounts Added Displays the details of accounts added to the table. Once you add
an account to the table, you can click the necessary icon to edit or
delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of account groups.

20.15 Maintain Branch Group

The Branch Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the branch codes, and
these groups can be used for charge calculation.
To maintain branch group:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Branch
Group Maintenance or specify Branch Group Maintenance in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Branch Group Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-29 Branch Group Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Branch Group Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

20-33
 Chapter 20
Maintain Customer Group

Figure 20-30 Branch Group Maintenance (New)

3. On the Branch Group Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-21 Branch Group Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Group Code Specify the branch group code.
Branch Group Code Specify the description of the branch group code.
Description
Add Accounts Specify the fields.
Branch Number Specify the branch number. You can also select from the list of
values.
Branch Name Displays the description for the specified branch number.
Reset Click Reset to reset the branches added.
Add Branch Click Add Branch to add the branch specified.
Branches Added Displays the details of branches added in the table. Once you
add a branch in the table, you can click the necessary icon to
edit or delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of branch groups.

20.16 Maintain Customer Group

The Customer Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the customer
codes, and these groups can be used for charge calculation.
To maintain customer group:

20-34
 Chapter 20
Maintain Customer Group

1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Customer Group Maintenance or specify Customer Group Maintenance in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Customer Group Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-31 Customer Group Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Customer Group Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

Figure 20-32 Customer Group Maintenance (New)

3. On the Customer Group Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-22 Customer Group Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Group Code Specify the customer group code.
Customer Group Code Specify the description of the customer group code.
Description

20-35
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Definitions

Table 20-22 (Cont.) Customer Group Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Number Specify the customer number. You can also select from the list of
values.

Note:
You cannot add the same customer number in two
different groups.

Customer Name Displays the description for the specified customer number.
Reset Click Reset to reset the customer numbers added.
Add Customer Click Add Customer to add the customer numbers specified.
Customers Added Displays the details of customer numbers added to the table. Once
you add a customer number to the table, you can click the
necessary icon to edit or delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of customer groups.

20.17 Maintain Charge Definitions

The Charge Definition Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge
definitions.
To maintain charge definitions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Charge Definition Maintenance or specify Charge Definition Maintenance in
the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Charge Definition Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-33 Charge Definition Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Charge Definition Maintenance (New) screen is displayed.

20-36
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Definitions

Figure 20-34 Charge Definition Maintenance (New)

3. On the Charge Definition Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-23 Charge Definition Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Code Specify the charge code.
Charge Description Specify the description of the charge code.
Charge Category Select the charge category (Standard or Tax).
Charge Credit Account Specify the charge credit account for the transaction. You can also
select the GL from the list of values or the DR_LEG/CR_LEG.

Note:
If DR_LEG/CR_LEG is selected, the corresponding debit/
credit account of the transaction will be considered for
the charge processing. For example, if the charge code is
defined with Charge Debit Account as DR_LEG for a
cash deposit function code, the charge will be collected
from cash GL. Hence, the customer is expected to
deposit cash including the charge amount. For such a
charge code, the Charge by Cash field will be displayed
as Yes in the charges data segment of the transaction
screen.

20-37
 Chapter 20
Create Charge Pricing Maintenance

Table 20-23 (Cont.) Charge Definition Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Debit Account Specify the charge debit account for the transaction. You can also
select the GL from the list of values or the DR_LEG/CR_LEG.

Note:
If DR_LEG/CR_LEG is selected, the corresponding debit/
credit account of the transaction will be considered for
the charge processing. For example, if the charge code is
defined with Charge Debit Account as DR_LEG for a
cash deposit function code, the charge will be collected
from cash GL. Hence, the customer is expected to
deposit cash including the charge amount. For such a
charge code, the Charge by Cash field will be displayed
as Yes in the charges data segment of the transaction
screen.

Credit Txn Code Click the search icon and select the credit transaction code from the
list of values.
Debit Txn Code Click the search icon and select the debit transaction code from the
list of values.
Pricing Source System Specify the pricing source system. You can also select from the list
of values.
Pricing Source Displays the description of the pricing source.
Description
EDE Code Displays the details of charge codes added to the table. Once you
add a customer number to the table, you can click the necessary
icon to edit or delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of charge definitions.

20.18 Create Charge Pricing Maintenance

The Create Charge Pricing Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge
pricing.
To maintain charge pricing:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Create Charge Pricing Maintenance or specify Create Charge Pricing
Maintenance in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Create Charge Pricing Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

20-38
 Chapter 20
Create Charge Pricing Maintenance

Figure 20-35 Create Charge Pricing Maintenance

2. On the Create Charge Pricing Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-24 Create Charge Pricing Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Application Code Specify the application code.
Charge Pricing Specify the description of the charge pricing.
Description
Pricing Category Select the pricing category. The drop-down list has the following
values:
• Fixed Amount
• Fixed Percent
• Tier Based Amount
• Tier Based Percent
Pricing Method Select the pricing method. The drop-down values will vary based on
the Pricing Category.
Pricing Currency Select the pricing currency.
Rate Code Click the search icon and select the rate code from the list of values.
Rate Type Select the rate type from the drop-down values.
Charge in Transaction Select if the charges are needed in the transaction currency.
Currency
Min/Max Validation Select the criteria (Amount or Percentage) for minimum or
Criteria maximum validation.

20-39
 Chapter 20
View Charge Pricing Maintenance

Table 20-24 (Cont.) Create Charge Pricing Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Min Charge Amount/ Specify the minimum charge amount or percent.
Percent

Note:
Based on the value selected in the Min/Max Validation
Criteria, this field gets enabled.

Max Charge Amount/ Specify the minimum charge amount or percent.

Percent

Note:
Based on the value selected in the Min/Max Validation
Criteria, this field gets enabled.

Fixed Amount/Percent Specify the fixed amount or percent. This field is enabled only if
Pricing Category is selected as Fixed Amount or Fixed Percent.

3. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of charge pricing.

20.19 View Charge Pricing Maintenance

The View Charge Pricing Maintenance screen is used to view the summary and
details of charge pricing IDs.
To view charge pricing maintenance:
On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click View
Charge Pricing Maintenance or specify View Charge Pricing Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The View Charge Pricing Maintenance is displayed.

Figure 20-36 View Charge Pricing Maintenance

You can view a summary of the configured records for the charge pricing details on
this screen.

20-40
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Condition Group

20.20 Maintain Charge Condition Group

The Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen is used to create groups of the charge
condition codes.
To maintain charge condition group:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Charge
Condition Group Maintenance or specify Charge Condition Group Maintenance in
the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Charge Condition Group Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-37 Charge Condition Group Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-38 Charge Condition Group Maintenance (New)

3. On the Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

20-41
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Condition Group

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-25 Charge Condition Group Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Condition Specify the charge group code.
Group Code
Charge Condition Specify the description of the charge group code.
Group Code
Description
Parameter 1 to Select the parameters 1 to 5. For more information on
Parameter 5 Parameters, refer to Additional Information on Parameters.
Charge Details Specify the fields.
Value 1 to Value 5 Specify the values 1 to 5. You can also select from the list of
values.
Charge Pricing Rule ID Specify the charge pricing rule ID. You can also select from the
list of values.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the description for specified charge pricing rule ID.
Description
Reset Click Reset to reset the charge group details added.
Add Charge Group Click Add Charge Group to add the charge group details
specified.
Charge Groups Added Displays the details of charge groups added to the table. Once
you add a customer number to the table, you can click the
necessary icon to edit or delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured groups of the charge condition
codes.
• Additional Information on Parameters
The Parameters field on the Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen
needs to be selected based on the specified conditions.

20.20.1 Additional Information on Parameters

The Parameters field on the Charge Condition Group Maintenance screen needs to
be selected based on the specified conditions.
There will be a few parameters like Customer Group, Account Group, or Branch group
will be pre-shipped. Customers need to choose the parameters, group them, and
name them with the group codes. A rule will be attached to the group code so that
based on the group used corresponding rule will be applied for calculation.
If the Charge Condition Group Maintenance is made with a specific parameter, the
CHG_PARAM_TAGS column in the SRV_TB_TX_STATIC_TAGS table of transaction

20-42
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Decisions

schema needs to be updated. For example, if Parameter 1 is selected as a utility provider, it

needs to be updated as below:

{
"UtilityProvider": "$.institutionID",
"P2": "",
"P3": "",
"P4": "",
"P5": ""
}

For the other options in Parameter field, the JSON needs to be updated as follows:

Table 20-26 Options for Parameter Fields

Option Value
Account Group "AccountGroup": ""
Customer Group "CustomerGroup": ""
Transaction Branch Group "TransactionBranchGroup": ""
To Account Branch Group "ToAccountBranchGroup": ""
To Account Branch "ToAccountBranch": "$.toAccountBranch"
<$.toAccountBranch has to be replaced with the
field id as per the FID that captures To
Account Branch>
Account Currency "AccCcy": "$.AccCcy"
<$.AccCcy has to be replaced with the field id
as per the FID that captures Account Currency>
Utility Provider "UtilityProvider": "$.institutionID"
<$.institutionID has to be replaced with the
field id as per the FID that captures Utility
Provider>

20.21 Maintain Charge Decisions

The Charge Decision Maintenance screen is used to maintain the charge decisions.
To maintain charge decisions:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Charge
Decision Maintenance or specify Charge Decision Maintenance in the search icon bar
and select the screen.
The Charge Decision Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

20-43
 Chapter 20
Maintain Charge Decisions

Figure 20-39 Charge Decision Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Charge Decision Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-40 Charge Decision Maintenance (New)

3. On the Charge Decision Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-27 Charge Decision Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Specify the function code. You can also select from the list of
values.
Branch Specify the branch code. You can also select from the list of
values.
Currency Specify the currency code. You can also select from the list of
values.

20-44
 Chapter 20
Charge Decision Enquiry

Table 20-27 (Cont.) Charge Decision Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Inter Branch Select the inter-branch requirement from the following drop-
down values:
• Yes
• No
• Both
Charge Details Specify the fields.
Charge Code Specify the charge code. You can also select from the list of
values.
Charge Description Displays the description of the charge code specified.
Charge Pricing Rule ID Specify the charge-pricing rule ID. You can also select from the
list of values.

Note:
You can choose the pricing rule ID to apply charge
or choose a group code from which the pricing rule
will be picked for calculation. You can only define
the rule or group. Either the rule can be used, or a
group can be used.

Charge Pricing Rule Displays the description of the charge-pricing rule ID specified.
Description
Charge Basis Specify the charge basis. You can also select from the list of
values.
Charge Condition Specify the charge condition group.
Group
Reset Click Reset to reset the charges added.
Add Charges Click Add Charges to add the charge decisions specified.
Charges Added Displays the details of charge decisions added to the table.
Once you add an account to the table, you can click the
necessary icon to edit or delete the added entry.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of charge decisions.

20.22 Charge Decision Enquiry

The Charge Decision Enquiry screen is used to inquire about the details of charge definition
and charge pricing for the specified search criteria.
To inquire about the charge decision details:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Charge
Decision Enquiry or specify Charge Decision Enquiry in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Charge Decision Enquiry summary screen is displayed.

20-45
 Chapter 20
Charge Decision Enquiry

Figure 20-41 Charge Decision Enquiry

Figure 20-42 Charge Definition

Figure 20-43 Charge Pricing

2. On the Charge Decision Enquiry screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-28 Charge Decision Enquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Function Code Click the search icon and select function code from the list of
values.
Branch Click the search icon and select branch code from the list of
values.

20-46
 Chapter 20
Maintain Reject Codes

Table 20-28 (Cont.) Charge Decision Enquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Currency Click the search icon and select currency code from the list of
values.
Inter Branch Select the value for inter-branch from the drop-down list.
Fetch Click Fetch to fetch the details based on the specified search
criteria.
Charge Code Displays the charge code.
Charge Pricing Rule ID Displays the charge pricing rule ID.
Charge Basis Displays the charge basis.
Charge Condition Displays the charge condition group.
Group
Charge Definition Displays the charge definition details. For information on fields
refer to Maintain Charge Definitions.
Charge Pricing Displays the charge pricing details. For information on fields
refer to Create Charge Pricing Maintenance.

20.23 Maintain Reject Codes

The Reject Code Maintenance screen is used to maintain the reject codes.
The reject codes maintained in this screen are used to reject the cheque withdrawal
transactions with the appropriate reject code.
To maintain reject codes:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Reject
Code Maintenance or specify Reject Code Maintenance in the search icon bar and
select the screen.
The Reject Code Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-44 Reject Code Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Reject Code Maintenance screen is displayed.

20-47
 Chapter 20
Maintain Clearing Network Codes

Figure 20-45 Reject Code Maintenance (New)

3. On the Reject Code Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-29 Reject Code Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Reject Code Specify the reject code. This code indicates the reason for
rejecting a clearing transaction.
Reject Code Specify the description of the reject code.
Description
Applicable For Select from the radio list from the following drop-down values:
• Inward Return
• Outward Return
• Both Inward and Outward Return
• Inhouse Cheques

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of reject codes.

20.24 Maintain Clearing Network Codes

The Clearing Network screen is used to maintain the clearing network codes.
To maintain clearing network codes:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Clearing Network or specify Clearing Network in the search icon bar and select
the screen.
The Clearing Network summary screen is displayed.

20-48
 Chapter 20
Maintain Clearing Network Codes

Figure 20-46 Clearing Network (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Clearing Network Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-47 Clearing Network Maintenance

3. On the Clearing Network Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information
on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-30 Clearing Network Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Clearing Network Code Specify the clearing network code.
Clearing Network Specify the description of the clearing network code.
Description

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of network codes.

20-49
 Chapter 20
Maintain Denomination Variations

20.25 Maintain Denomination Variations

The Denomination Variation Maintenance screen is used to maintain the
denomination-wise variations.
In some countries, the local banking practice is to buy various FX currency
denominations with different rates and lower denominations, which becomes a lower
rate. This screen helps to apply rates for different denominations.
To maintain denomination variations:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Denomination Variation Maintenance or specify Denomination Variation
Maintenance in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The Denomination Variation Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-48 Denomination Variation Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Denomination Variation Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-49 Denomination Variation Maintenance (New)

3. On the Denomination Variation Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For

more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-50
 Chapter 20
Maintain External Bank Codes

Table 20-31 Denomination Variation Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Currency 1 Select the currency from the list of values.
Currency 2 Displays the currency 2.
Maintenance Country Displays the maintenance country.
Rate Type Select the rate type from the list of values.
Denomination ID Select the denomination ID from the list of values.
Buy Variance Specify the buy variance.
Sell Variance Specify the sell variance.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of denomination-wise
variations.

20.26 Maintain External Bank Codes

The External Bank Code screen is used to maintain the bank codes and branch codes.
To maintain external bank codes:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click External
Bank Code or specify External Bank Code in the search icon bar and select the screen.
The External Bank Code summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-50 External Bank Code (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The External Bank Code screen is displayed.

20-51
 Chapter 20
Maintain Issuer Codes

Figure 20-51 External Bank Code (New)

3. On the External Bank Code screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-32 External Bank Code - Field Description

Field Description
Bank Code Specify the bank code.
Bank Name Specify the name of the bank.
Branch Code Specify the branch code.
Branch Name Specify the branch name.
Branch Address 1 to Specify the address of the branch.
Branch Address 4

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of external bank and
branch codes.

20.27 Maintain Issuer Codes

The Issuer Code Maintenance screen is used to maintain the issuer codes for TC
transactions.
To maintain issuer codes:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Issuer Code Maintenance or specify Issuer Code Maintenance in the search
icon bar and select the screen.
The Issuer Code Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

20-52
 Chapter 20
Maintain Utility Providers

Figure 20-52 Issuer Code Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Issuer Code Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-53 Issuer Code Maintenance (New)

3. On the Issuer Code Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more information on
fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-33 Issuer Code Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Issuer Code Specify the issuer code.
Issuer Code Description Specify the description of the issuer code.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of issuer codes.

20.28 Maintain Utility Providers

The Utility Provider Maintenance screen is used to link the utility provider with a settlement
account.
The examples of utility providers are as follows:
• Electricity
• Gas

20-53
 Chapter 20
Maintain Utility Providers

• Water
To maintain utility providers:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click
Utility Provider Maintenance or specify Utility Provider Maintenance in the
search icon bar and select the screen.
The Utility Provider Maintenance summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-54 Utility Provider Maintenance (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Utility Provider Maintenance screen is displayed.

Figure 20-55 Utility Provider Maintenance (New)

3. On the Utility Provider Maintenance screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

20-54
 Chapter 20
Maintain Account Entitlement Restriction

Table 20-34 Utility Provider Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Provider ID Click the search icon, and select the provider ID from the list of
values.
Provider Description Specify the description of the utility provider.
Provider Settlement Click the search icon, and select the provider settlement account
Account from the list of values.

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of utility providers.

20.29 Maintain Account Entitlement Restriction

This screen is used to maintain the Account Entitlement Group by grouping the set of
Customer accounts. To process this screen, type Account Entitlement Restriction in the
Menu Item Search located at the left corner of the application toolbar and select the
appropriate screen (or) do the following steps:
1. On the Homepage, from Teller mega menu, under Branch Maintenance, click Account
Entitlement Restriction or specify Account Entitlement Restriction in the search icon
bar and select the screen.
The Account Entitlement Restriction summary screen is displayed.

Figure 20-56 Account Entitlement Restriction (Summary)

2. Click the icon.

The Account Entitlement Restriction screen is displayed.

20-55
 Chapter 20
Maintain Account Entitlement Restriction

Figure 20-57 Account Entitlement Restriction (New)

3. On the Account Entitlement Restriction screen, specify the fields. For more
information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Note:
The fields, which are marked with an asterisk, are mandatory.

Table 20-35 Account Entitlement Restriction - Field Description

Field Description
Account Entitlement Click search icon, and select the account entitlement code
Code from the list of values.
Restriction Type Select restriction type from the radio list from the following
drop-down values:
• Allowed
• Disallowed
Function Code Details Specify the fields.
Function Code Click search icon, and select the function code from the list of
values.
Function Code Displays the description of the function code.
Description

4. Click Save.
The summary view is displayed with the configured details of utility providers.

20-56
A
Error Codes and Messages
The error codes and messages that are available for the Oracle Banking Branch application
are provided in this appendix. The error codes with the prefix GCS apply only to the
maintenance screens, and the remaining error codes apply to all the transaction screens.

Table A-1 Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

CLMO-AC-003 Source stage value should be either Y/N not
valid
CLMO-AC-017 DatasegmentCode not valid
CLMO-AC-018 DocumentType Code not valid
CLMO-AC-020 Life cycle not valid
CLMO-AC-023 Unable to $1 Business Process as $2 data
segment has the following dependencies $3 in
lifecycle $4
CLMO-AC-024 Unable to $1 Business Process as the mandatory
data segments $2 for the $3 lifecycle have not
been mapped!
CLMO-AC-026 In $1 stage of $2 Business Process
CLMO-AC-027 Record already exist with same Lifecycle and
Business Product
CLMO-AC-028 At $1 in $2 stage of $3 Business Process
CLMO-AC-029 At $1 in $2 stage of $3 Business Process
CLMO-AC-030 Business Product Code is Invalid
GCS-AUTH-01 Record Successfully Authorized
GCS-AUTH-02 Valid modifications for approval were not sent.
Failed to match
GCS-AUTH-03 Maker cannot authorize
GCS-AUTH-04 No valid unauthorized modifications found for
approval.
GCS-CLOS-002 Record Successfully Closed
GCS-CLOS-01 Record Already Closed
GCS-CLOS-02 Record Successfully Closed
GCS-CLOS-03 Unauthorized record cannot be closed
GCS-COM-001 Record does not exist
GCS-COM-002 Invalid version sent
GCS-COM-003 Please Send Proper ModNo

A-1
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

GCS-COM-004 Please send makerId in the request
GCS-COM-005 Request is Null. Please Resend with Proper
Values
GCS-COM-006 Unable to parse JSON
GCS-COM-007 Request Successfully Processed
GCS-COM-008 Modifications should be consecutive.
GCS-COM-009 Resource ID cannot be blank or "null".
GCS-COM-010 You have successfully cancelled $1.
GCS-COM-011 Argghhh, $1 failed to update.
GCS-DEL-001 Record deleted successfully
GCS-DEL-002 Record(s) deleted successfully
GCS-DEL-003 Modifications didnt match valid unauthorized
modifications that can be deleted for this
record
GCS-DEL-004 Send all unauthorized modifications to be
deleted for record that is not authorized even
once.
GCS-DEL-005 Only Maker of first version of record can
delete modifications of record that is not once
authorized.
GCS-DEL-006 No valid unauthorized modifications found for
deleting
GCS-DEL-007 Failed to delete. Only maker of the
modification(s) can delete.
GCS-MOD-001 Closed Record cannot be modified
GCS-MOD-002 Record Successfully Modified
GCS-MOD-003 Record marked for close
GCS-MOD-004 Only maker of the record can modify before once
auth
GCS-MOD-005 Not amendable field
GCS-MOD-006 Natural Key cannot be modified
GCS-MOD-007 Psssttt, only the maker can modify the pending
records.
GCS-OPEN-01 Teller Batch Record Already Opened
GCS-REOP-003 Successfully Reopened
GCS-REOP-004 Unauthorized record cannot be reopened
GCS-REOP-01 Unauthorized Record cannot be Reopened
GCS-REOP-02 Failed to Reopen the Record

A-2
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

GCS-REOP-03 Successfully Reopened
GCS-SAV-001 Record already exists
GCS-SAV-002 Record Saved Successfully.
GCS-SAV-003 Congratulations!! The record is saved and
validated successfully.
GCS-SAV-004 Currency Code should be unique
GCS-SAV-005 Min cash holding should be lesser than Max cash
holding
GCS-VAL-001 Congratulations!! Your record is successfully
validated.
RM_BC_CV_01 Amount Limit Exceeded for Account Number
RM_BC_CV_02 Amount Limit Exceeded for Customer Type
RM_BC_CV_03 Amount Limit Exceeded for Product Class
RM_BC_MA_01 Netting Charges Required Should be (Y/N).
RM_BC_MA_02 Main Leg Accounting Required Should be (Y/N).
RM_BC_MN_01 Invalid function code for till/vault indicator
RM_BC_MN_02 Invalid transaction type for till/vault
indicator
RM_BC_OB_08 Please close the previous day batch
RM_BC_OB_09 User is not allowed to open the Teller batch
RM_BC_OB_10 Teller batches should be closed before closing
the branch/vault batch
RM_BC_OB_11 Vault batch should be closed before closing the
branch batch
RM_BC_TB_10 Teller batch is already opened
RM_BC_TB_11 Teller batch is already closed
RM_BC_VA_01 Supervisor Id is not present for manual
assignment.
RM_CS_BC_01 Invalid Instrument No
RM_CS_BC_02 Instrument is already in Used status
RM_CS_BC_03 Instrument is not in INIT status to Print/
Reprint
RM_CS_BC_04 Instrument Number Already Liquidate
RM_CS_DD_04 Incorrect DD details
RM_CT_AC_03 Account Type mismatch.... Exception Occured
RM_CT_AC_04 Invalid Account Number
RM_CT_AC_06 Both Account cannot be Customer Accounts

A-3
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-IN-TX-01 Payments Service is not Reachable
RM_TR_EX_01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM_TX_CX_01 Authorization required for Charge Amendment.
RM_TX_EX_01 Authorization required for inter branch
Transaction.
RM-AD-EC-01 Failed in ECA
RM-AD-HH-01 Failed in Host Handoff
RM-AD-PM-03 Failed in payment
RM-AD-UB-01 Failed in DDA system
RM-AD-VM-01 Invalid Account Number
RM-AD-VM-02 VAM Service is down
RM-BC-AC-01 Failed in Accounting
RM-BC-BP-01 Please Enter the entire Branch Parameter Detail
values
RM-BC-CH-01 Minimum Charge Greeater Than Maximum Charge
RM-BC-CH-02 Please Enter the proper charge code
RM-BC-CH-03 Charge Fields Cannot be empty
RM-BC-CH-04 Please Enter Mininmum and Maximum Charges
RM-BC-CP-03 Function code should not be empty
RM-BC-EJ-01 Record Not Found
RM-BC-EJ-02 Record Updation Failed..
RM-BC-EX-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-BC-EX-02 Transaction Timed Out
RM-BC-EX-03 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-BC-ML-01 Email Account not Valid
RM-BC-OB-01 Branch batch is already open for the current
date
RM-BC-OB-02 Branch batch can be opened only by supervisor
RM-BC-OB-03 Vault batch is open for the current or previous
date
RM-BC-OB-04 User does not have rights to access this screen
RM-BC-OB-05 Teller batch is open for the current or
previous date
RM-BC-OB-06 Please complete the pending transactions in the
Electronic Journal log
RM-BC-OB-07 Branch batch is not opened
RM-BC-OB-08 Please close the previous day batch

A-4
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-BC-OB-10 Teller batches should be closed before closing
the branch/vault batch
RM-BC-OB-11 Vault batch should be closed before closing the
branch batch
RM-BC-OB-16 Teller batch is closed
RM-BC-OB-17 Teller batch is not opened for the user
RM-BC-OB-18 Teller batch is already open
RM-BC-OB-19 Teller batch is closed
RM-BC-OB-20 Invalid Currency Code
RM-BC-OB-21 Authlimit Breached
RM-BC-OB-22 Transaction limit breached at role level
RM-BC-OB-23 Wrong token
RM-BC-OB-24 Branch batch is already closed
RM-BC-OB-25 Vault batch is already closed
RM-BC-OB-26 User is not allowed to open/close the teller
batch
RM-BC-OB-27 Vault batch is not opened
RM-BC-OB-29 Please maintain denomination tracking in Branch
Parameter
RM-BC-OB-30 Denomination Amount is not equal to transaction
amount
RM-BC-OB-31 Insufficient Amount available in Till/Vault
RM-BC-OB-32 Logged in user ID and Teller Id cannot be same
RM-BC-OB-33 Invalid Input TellerId
RM-BC-OB-34 Current Denomination balance is less than zero
for $1
RM-BC-PM-01 Record Successfully Updated
RM-BC-RT-01 Failed in getting the exchange rate
RM-BC-RT-02 Failed to fetch Branch Accounting Tags
RM-BC-TF-01 User not Verified Signature
RM-BC-TF-02 Transaction involves Inter Bank Accounts
RM-BC-TF-03 Default Charge Amount was modified
RM-BC-TF-04 Default Exchange Rate was modified
RM-BC-TF-05 Amount exceeds limit for this transaction
RM-BC-TF-06 Authorisation required. Amount exceeds limit
for the transaction

A-5
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-BC-TF-07 Transaction & Electronic Journal ID needs to be
Enter..
RM-BC-TF-08 Invalid Txn_Ref_Number found for given EJId
RM-BC-TR-07 Invalid Input!!
RM-BC-UL-01 User Limit Transaction Amount breached
RM-BC-UL-02 Authorizer Limit Transaction Amount breached
RM-BC-UL-03 User Limit Holding Minimum Amount breached
RM-BC-UL-04 User Limit Holding Maximum Amount breached
RM-BC-UP-01 Amount exceeds limit for this transaction
RM-BC-UP-02 Minimum charge amount should be applied
RM-BC-UP-03 Amount exceeds limit for this transaction
RM-BC-UP-04 Authorisation amount breached.
RM-BC-UP-05 Till maximum balance breached
RM-BC-UP-06 Till minimum balance breached
RM-BC-UP-07 Authoriser role limit breached
RM-BC-UP-08 Teller role limit breached
RM-BC-UP-09 Transaction requires approval.
RM-BC-UR-01 Submit URL not maintained
RM-BC-VA-01 Till open
RM-BC-VA-02 Vaultl open
RM-BC-VA-03 Pending txn
RM-BC-VA-10 Invalid Status
RM-BC-XR-01 Exchange not Maintained
RM-BC-XT-01 Failed in getting the exchange rate
RM-CH-LM-01 Channel limit not found for Account class group
RM-CH-LM-02 Channel limit details not found
RM-CH-LM-03 Channel limit details found for transaction
currency
RM-CH-LM-04 Number of Withdrawal breached
RM-CH-LM-05 Withdrawal Limit breached
RM-CM-OR-001 Failed to initiate.
RM-CM-OR-002 Transaction is successfully initiated.
RM-CM-OR-003 Invalid action
RM-CM-OR-004 $1 is not submitted
RM-CM-OR-005 Cannot proceed with submit as the action is not
initiated.

A-6
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-CM-OR-006 Cannot proceed with submit as the information
is incomplete.
RM-CM-OR-007 Failed to submit.
RM-CM-OR-008 Record successfully submitted.
RM-CM-OR-009 $1 is in-progress
RM-CM-OR-010 Aw, snap! An unexpected exception occurred, try
again.
RM-CM-OR-011 Invalid request.
RM-CM-OR-012 Cannot proceed with submit as the action is not
initiated.
RM-CM-OR-013 Cannot find the provided information.
RM-CM-OR-014 Record is not yet submitted by $1
RM-CM-OR-015 Record already unlocked by $1.
RM-CS-OB-01 Invalid denomination found
RM-CS-OB-02 Invalid denomination found for given currency
or denomination type
RM-CS-OB-03 Transaction Number Already Exist
RM-CS-OB-04 Data Not Found
RM-CS-OB-05 Amount mismatch
RM-CS-OB-50 SanctionRefNo is already Present.
RM-CS-TF-07 MinCash excedes the MaxCash Value
RM-CT-AC-01 Charges are not maintained
RM-CT-AC-02 Charges should not be maintained
RM-CT-AC-04 Failed to get the account
RM-EX-CS-01 User is an Invalid User.
RM-EX-CS-02 Account number is invalid.
RM-EX-CS-03 Source Reference Number Already Present
RM-EX-CS-05 NegotiatedExchangeRate is not provided
RM-EX-CS-06 NegotiationReferenceNumber is not provided
RM-EX-PY-05 NegotiatedExchangeRate is not provided
RM-EX-PY-06 NegotiationReferenceNumber is not provided
RM-PA-EQ-01 Record not Found.
RM-PY-AC-01 From account and to account are same
RM-PY-AC-02 Account number not entered for field $1
RM-PY-BC-01 Bank code or bank BIC code not entered
RM-PY-BC-02 Please enter either bank code or bank BIC code

A-7
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-PY-CL-01 Payee account and drawer account are same
RM-PY-CL-02 Drawer account number and instrument number
combination are same
RM-PY-CL-03 Invalid Batch Number
RM-PY-CR-01 Remittance number not found
RM-PY-CR-02 Remittance number is already issued/used
RM-PY-CR-03 Please provide Remittance number/Test Key
number
RM-PY-CR-04 Invalid Remittance number/Test Key number
RM-PY-CR-05 Remittance numbers are not maintained
RM-PY-CR-06 Maintained remittance numbers are all USED ones
RM-PY-IN-01 Instrument details not found
RM-TD-SL-01 No Maintanance found for Term Deposit opening
RM-TD-SL-02 Offset GL account not found
RM-TN-RV-02 The transaction Status should be pending
RM-TR-EX-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-TS-TB-10 Teller batch not opened yet
RM-TX-BE-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-TX-CA-01 Charge amount limit Breached from Min Max
Amount
RM-TX-CA-02 Charge amount limit Breached from Min Max
Pecentage
RM-TX-CC-01 Add provided Currency to the Till
RM-TX-ET-01 Session should be Opened before closing.
RM-TX-ET-02 Amount $1 $2 has to be given by the customer.
RM-TX-ET-03 Amount $1 $2 has to be given to the customer.
RM-TX-ET-04 The incoming cash amount in the session is
exceeding by $1 $2.Do you want to proceed.
RM-TX-ET-05 Open Teller Sessions are present. Cannot
proceed with the operation.
RM-TX-ET-06 Teller Session Transactions not
completed.Cannot proceed with the operation.
RM-TX-EX-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-TX-HH-01 Failed in Host Handoff
RM-TX-LC-01 Transaction is locked
RM-TX-LI-00 Amount exceeds the limit of transaction.
RM-TX-NL-01 Unhandled Exception Occured

A-8
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-TX-OC-01 Branch Info not available
RM-TX-OC-02 Function Code definition not maintained
RM-TX-OC-03 Function Code preferences not maintained
RM-TX-OC-04 Branch Parameter maintenance not found
RM-TX-OC-05 User preferences not maintained
RM-TX-OC-06 Default authorizer not maintained for the user
RM-TX-OC-07 Function Indicator entry not found
RM-TX-OC-08 Record status is null in Function Code
Definition Screen
RM-TX-OC-09 Record status is closed in Function Code
Definition Screen
RM-TX-OC-10 Record status is null in User Preferences
Screen
RM-TX-OC-11 Record status is closed in User Preferences
Screen
RM-TX-OC-12 Record status is null in Function Code
Preferences Screen
RM-TX-OC-13 Record status is closed in Function Code
Preferences Screen
RM-TX-PM-01 Transaction status is pending, waiting for the
notification from payment system
RM-TX-PM-03 Failed in payment system
RM-TX-RV-01 The transaction Status should be completed
RM-TX-RV-02 Only maker can reverse the transaction
RM-TX-RV-03 Authorization required for reversal
RM-TX-RV-04 Minimum teller branch ccy holding limit
breached
RM-TX-RV-05 Maximum teller branch ccy holding limit
breached
RM-TX-SL-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RM-TX-ST-01 The incoming cash amount in the session is
exceeding by $1.Do you want to proceed.
RM-TX-ST-02 Total inflow cash amount remaining after this
transaction is $1.
RM-TX-ST-03 Another open session in progress for the
entered Customer No
RM-TX-ST-04 Another open session in progress for the Teller
RM-TX-ST-05 Teller session needs to be opened to perform
this transaction.

A-9
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

RM-TX-ST-06 This transaction is not allowed inside the
teller session
RM-TX-TO-01 Unhandled Exception Occured
RPM-AC-003 Source stage value should be either Y/N not
valid
RPM-AC-017 DatasegmentCode not valid
RPM-AC-018 DocumentType Code not valid
RPM-AC-020 Life cycle not valid
RPM-AC-023 Unable to $1 Business Process as $2 data
segment has the following dependencies $3 in
lifecycle $4
RPM-AC-024 Unable to $1 Business Process as the mandatory
data segments $2 for the $3 lifecycle have not
been mapped!
RPM-AC-026 In $1 stage of $2 Business Process
RPM-AC-027 Record already exist with same Lifecycle and
Business Product
RPM-AC-028 At $1 in $2 stage of $3 Business Process
RPM-AC-029 At $1 in $2 stage of $3 Business Process
RPM-AC-030 Business Product Code is Invalid
RT-F23-001 Error. Enter at least one row in Payment Data
Details
RT-F23-002 Error. Cannot enter more than eight records in
Payment Data Details
RT-F23-006 Error. Mandatory Field Payment Type Cannot be
Null.
RT-F23-007 Error. Fiscal Code has to be 11 or 16 character
long.
RT-F23-008 Error. Fiscal code does not meet checksum
algorithm validations
RT-F23-017 Error. Enter at least one field in either
Reference Number Available or Reference Number
Not Available.
RT-F23-019 Error. Both Reference Number and Primary fiscal
code cannot be null.
RT-F23-020 Invalid character entered for Tax Code
RT-F24-099 Payment Amount Cannot be Zero/Negative
RT-F24-101 Payment amount should not Be Blank
RT-F24-114 Principal fiscal code is mandatory
UBS-BC-UB-01 No More Payments

A-10
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) Error Codes and Messages

Error Code Message

UBS-BC-UB-02 Invalid Settlement Account for the Contract

A-11
B
List of Function Codes
The list of function codes and their respective names for all the transaction screens of the
Oracle Banking Branch application are provided in this appendix.

Table B-1 List of Function Codes

Function Code Screen Name

0006 Account to Account Transfer
0007 In-House Cheque Deposit
1000 Miscellaneous Transfer
1001 Cash Withdrawal
1002 Cash Withdrawal (Teller Session)
1005 Miscellaneous GL Transfer
1008 Miscellaneous Customer Debit
1009 TC Sale Against Account
1010 BC Issue Against Account
1013 Cheque Withdrawal
1014 DD Issue Against Account
1025 Bill Payment by Cash
1060 Miscellaneous GL Debit
1075 Bill Payment by Account
1320 Close-out Withdrawal by Account
1321 Close-out Withdrawal by Cash
1401 Cash Deposit
1403 Cash Deposit (Teller Session)
1404 Domestic Transfer Against Account
1405 Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in
1406 International Transfer Against Account
1407 International Transfer Against Walk-in
1408 Miscellaneous Customer Credit
1409 Interbranch Transaction Request
1410 Interbranch Transaction Input
1411 Interbranch Liquidation Input
1412 TC Purchase Against Account
1421 RD Payment by Cash
1460 Miscellaneous GL Credit
1461 Credit Card Advance by Cash

B-1
 Appendix B

Table B-1 (Cont.) List of Function Codes

Function Code Screen Name

1462 Credit Card Advance by Transfer
1471 Credit Card Payment by Cash
1472 Credit Card Payment
1472CA Credit Card Payment by Account
1472CG Credit Card Payment by Clearing Cheque
3401 Safe Deposit Rental by Cash
5001 Loan Disbursement by Cash
5401 Loan Repayment by Cash
5402 Murabaha Payment by Cash
5403 Islamic Down Payment by Cash
5404 Loan Repayment by Cash (Teller Session)
5555 Inward Clearing Data Entry
6001 Open Branch Batch
6002 Close Branch Batch
6005 Electronic Journal
6501 Cheque Deposit (Account)
6514 Outward Clearing Data Entry
6520 Cheque Deposit (GL)
6560 Cheque Return
7001 Open Vault Batch
7002 Close Vault Batch
7005 Servicing Journal
7010 Passbook Update
7011 Passbook Reprint
7030 Passbook Issue
7031 Passbook Status Change
7040 Teller Total Position
7551 Book Shortage
7552 Book Overage
7787 Multi BC Issuance (Account)
7788 Multi BC Issuance (Cash)
8003 TC Purchase Against Walk-in
8004 FX Purchase Against Walk-in
8008 FX Purchase Against Walk-in (Teller Session)
8203 FX Sale Against Walk-in
8204 FX Sale Against Walk-in (Teller Session)
8205 TC Sale Against GL

B-2
 Appendix B

Table B-1 (Cont.) List of Function Codes

Function Code Screen Name

8206 FX Sale Against Account
8207 FX Purchase against Account
8222 TC Sale Against Walk-in
8301 BC Issue Against Walk-in
8302 BC Issue Against GL
8305 DD Issue Against Walk-in
8306 DD Issue Against GL
8316 Cash Remittance Issue (Cash)
8317 Cash Remittance Issue (GL)
8318 Cash Remittance Issue (Account)
8319 Cash Remittance Operations (Inquiry)
8320 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment – Account)
8321 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment – Cash)
8322 Cash Remittance Operations (Payment – GL)
8324 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund – Account)
8325 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund – Cash)
8326 Cash Remittance Operations (Refund – GL)
8327 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel – Account)
8328 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel – Cash)
8329 Cash Remittance Operations (Cancel – GL)
8330 Inward Cash Remittance
8450 DD Operations
8550 BC Operations
9001 Open Teller Batch
9002 Close Teller Batch
9005 Buy Cash from Till
9006 Sell Cash to Till
9007 Buy Cash from Vault
9008 Sell Cash to Vault
9009 Buy Cash from Currency Chest
9010 Sell Cash to Currency Chest
9011 Buy TC From Agent
9012 Current Open Tills
9015 Buy TC From HO
9016 Return TC to HO
9017 Buy TC From Vault
9018 Return TC to Vault

B-3
 Appendix B

Table B-1 (Cont.) List of Function Codes

Function Code Screen Name

9020 View Available TC with Vault
9401 Start Teller Session
9402 Stop Teller Session
AADU Account Address Update
ACBL Account Balance Inquiry
ACST Account Statement Request
BCRP BC Print-Reprint
CADU Customer Address Update
CCTU Customer Contact Details Update
CDBK Stop Card
CQIN Cheque Status Inquiry
CQRQ Cheque Book Request
CQSC Cheque Book Status Change
CQST Stop Cheque Request
DDRP DD Print-Reprint
DNEX Denomination Exchange
F23A F23 Tax Payment by Account
F23C F23C Tax Payment by Cash
F24A F24 Tax Payment by Account
F24C F24C Tax Payment by Cash
REAN Reassign Transactions
TDI1 Islamic TD Account Opening
TDO1 TD Account Opening
TDR1 TD Redemption Against Cash
TDR2 TD Redemption Against Account
TDT1 TD Top-Up Against Cash
TDT2 TD Top-Up Against Account
TVQB Branch Breaching Limits
TVQR Till Vault Position

B-4
C
Advices
The formats of various advices that are available for the Oracle Banking Branch application
are provided in this appendix.

Topics
• Account Transfer
• Cash Deposit
• Cash Withdrawal
• Cheque Deposit
• Cheque Withdrawal
• DD Issue Against Account
• Domestic Transfer Against Account

Account Transfer
The advice format for Account Transfer transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch

Receipt # txnRefNumber
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
From Account Number : fromAccountNumber
To Account Number : toAccountNumber
Amount : toAccountAmt toAccountCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharges toAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
----------------------------------------------------------------------
(This slip do not require signature)

Cash Deposit
The advice format for Cash Deposit transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch

Receipt # txnRefNumber
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
Account Number : toAccountNumber

C-1
 Appendix C

Amount : toAccountAmt toAccountCcy

Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
Total Charges : totalCharges toAccountCcy

chargeCode chargeCcy chargeAmt

F chargeCode chargeCcy chargeAmt E

-----------------------------------------------------------------

Teller Officer/Manager

Cash Withdrawal
The advice format for Cash Withdrawal transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch

Receipt # txnRefNumber
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
Account Number : fromAccountNumber
Amount : fromAccountAmt fromAccountCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharges fromAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
----------------------------------------------------------------------

chargeAmt chargeCcy chargeCode

F chargeAmt chargeCcy chargeCode E

Teller Officer/Manager

Cheque Deposit
The advice format for Cheque Deposit transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

Receipt #txnRefNumber
----------------------------------------------------------------------
txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
Account Number : toAccountNumber
Cheque Number : chequeNumber

C-2
 Appendix C

Routing Number : routingNo

Amount : toAccountAmt toAccountCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharge toAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Teller Officer/Manager

Cheque Withdrawal
The advice format for Cheque Withdrawal transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch

Receipt # txnRefNumber
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
Account Number : fromAccountNumber
Amount : fromAccountAmt fromAccountCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharges fromAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : tellerId
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Teller Officer/Manager

DD Issue Against Account

The advice format for DD Issue Against Account transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBrnCode, Clinton Branch

Receipt # txnRefNo
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : tellerSeqNumber
Account Number : fromAccNo
In favour of : payeeName
Amount : fromAccAmt fromAccCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharges fromAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
----------------------------------------------------------------------
(This slip do not require signature)

Domestic Transfer Against Account

The advice format for Domestic Transfer Against Account transactions is given below:

TRANSACTION RECEIPT

txnDate txnBranchCode, Clinton Branch

C-3
 Appendix C

Receipt # txnRefNumber
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Transaction : functionCodeDesc
Sequence Number : txnSeqNumber
Account Number : fromAccountNumber
Beneficiary Bank : bankDesc
Beneficiary Name : txnCustomer
Clearing Type : FEDWIRE
Transfer Amount : fromAccountAmt fromAccountCcy
Commission Charges : totalCharges fromAccountCcy
Narrative : narrative
Teller ID : userId
----------------------------------------------------------------------
(This slip do not require signature)

C-4
D
Order of Replacing Parameters with Wild
Card Entries
The order of replacing parameters with wild card entries is required for the Accounting and
Settlements Definition and Charge Decision Maintenance.

Table D-1 Order for Accounting and Settlements Definition

Function Code Branch Currency

Function Code Txn Branch Txn Currency
Function Code *.* Txn Currency
Function Code Txn Branch *.*
Function Code *.* *.*

Table D-2 Order for Charge Pickup

Function Code Txn Branch Txn Currency Inter Branch

Function Code Txn Branch Txn Currency Y
Function Code Txn Branch Txn Currency N
Function Code *.* Txn Currency Y
Function Code *.* Txn Currency N
Function Code Txn Branch *.* Y
Function Code Txn Branch *.* N

Table D-3 Order for Charge Group

Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5

Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5
Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 *.*
Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 *.* Parameter5
Parameter1 Parameter2 *.* Parameter4 Parameter5
Parameter1 *.* Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5
*.* Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5
*.* *.* Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5
Parameter1 *.* *.* Parameter4 Parameter5
Parameter1 Parameter2 *.* *.* Parameter5
Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 *.* *.*
Parameter1 Parameter2 *.* *.* *.*

D-1
 Appendix D

Table D-3 (Cont.) Order for Charge Group

Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 Parameter5

Parameter1 *.* *.* *.* Parameter5
*.* *.* *.* Parameter4 Parameter5
*.* *.* *.* *.* Parameter5
Parameter1 *.* *.* *.* *.*
*.* *.* *.* *.* *.*

D-2
E
Static Maintenance Parameters
The descriptions for the column names of the significant parameters in the static
maintenance tables are provided in this appendix. If required, the user needs to modify these
parameters in the respective static maintenance tables.

Table E-1 Columns in SRV_TM_BC_FUNCTION_INDICATOR Table

Column Name Description

CROSS_CCY_ENABLED This column indicates whether the cross-currency is allowed for a
transaction or not. The user can modify this flag to enable/disable the
cross-currency configuration. Possible values are as follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No

Note:
When the value is set to N, the
Exchange Rate fields will be hidden.

DENOM_VARIANCE This column indicates the applicability of denomination variance. The

user can modify this flag to enable/disable the denomination variance.
Possible values are as follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No

Note:
This flag applies only to the function
codes – 8004, 8203, 8206, and 8207.

IS_NEGOTIATED_RATE_EN This column indicates whether the Negotiated Exchange Rate field is
ABLED required on the screen or not. The user can modify this flag to enable/
disable the Negotiated Exchange Rate for a specified screen.
Possible values are as follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No
IS_REVERSAL_SUPP This column indicates whether the transaction reversal is supported or
not. The user can modify this flag to enable/disable the reversal for a
particular transaction. Possible values are as follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No

E-1
 Appendix E

Table E-1 (Cont.) Columns in SRV_TM_BC_FUNCTION_INDICATOR Table

Column Name Description

IS_TELLER_SEQ_REQ This column indicates whether the Teller Sequence Number generation
is required or not. The user can modify this flag to enable/disable the
Teller Sequence Number generation for a particular transaction.
Possible values are as follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No
IS_TOT_CHARGES_REQ This column indicates whether the Total Charges field is required on
the screen or not. The user can modify this flag to enable/disable the
Total Charges for a particular transaction. Possible values are as
follows:
• Y – Yes
• N – No

Table E-2 Columns in SRV_TB_BC_ARCHIVAL Table

Column Name Description

ARCHIVAL_DAYS This column indicates the number of days required for the
archival. The user can modify this flag to update the number of
days.
BRANCH_CODE This column indicates the Branch Code, based on which the
lookup of Archival details will happen. It refers to the branch in
which the archival will happen. The user can modify this flag to
update the Branch Code.

E-2
Index
A C
Account Address Update, 18-19 Cash Deposit, 4-2
Account Balance Inquiry, 18-13 Cash Deposit (Teller Session), 14-1
Account Entitlement Restriction, 20-55 Cash Remittance Issue Against Account, 8-99
Account Group Maintenance, 20-32 Cash Remittance Issue Against Cash, 8-103
Account Statement Request, 18-16 Cash Remittance Issue Against GL, 8-106
Account to Account Transfer, 6-1 Cash Remittance Operations - Cancel by
Alerts, 19-7 Account, 8-130
Cash Remittance Operations - Cancel by Cash,
8-133
B Cash Remittance Operations - Cancel by GL,
BC Issue Against Account, 8-2 8-136
BC Issue Against GL, 8-10 Cash Remittance Operations - Inquiry, 8-110
BC Issue Against Walk-in, 8-6 Cash Remittance Operations - Payment by
BC Operations - Cancel by Account, 8-39 Account, 8-113
BC Operations - Cancel by Cash, 8-42 Cash Remittance Operations - Payment by Cash,
BC Operations - Cancel by GL, 8-44 8-116
BC Operations - Duplicate Issue, 8-21 Cash Remittance Operations - Payment by GL,
BC Operations - Inquiry, 8-16 8-118
BC Operations - Payment by Account, 8-25 Cash Remittance Operations - Refund by
BC Operations - Payment by Cash, 8-27 Account, 8-122
BC Operations - Payment by GL, 8-30 Cash Remittance Operations - Refund by Cash,
BC Operations - Payment Reversal, 8-23 8-124
BC Operations - Refund by Account, 8-32 Cash Remittance Operations - Refund by GL,
BC Operations - Refund by Cash, 8-35 8-127
BC Operations - Refund by GL, 8-37 Cash Withdrawal, 4-7
BC Operations - Revalidate, 8-19 Cash Withdrawal (Teller Session), 14-2
BC Print-Reprint, 8-14 Channel Limits Maintenance, 20-30
Bill Payment by Account, 13-3 Charge Condition Group Maintenance, 20-41
Bill Payment by Cash, 13-1 Charge Decision Enquiry, 20-45
Bill Payment by Clearing Cheque, 13-6 Charge Decision Maintenance, 20-43
Book Overage, 2-24 Charge Definition Maintenance, 20-36
Book Shortage, 2-21 Cheque Book Request, 18-4
Branch Breach Limits, 2-10 Cheque Book Status Change, 18-22
Branch Group Maintenance, 20-33 Cheque Deposit Against Account, 7-1
Branch Role Limits, 20-5 Cheque Deposit Against GL, 7-5
Branch Total Position, 2-12 Cheque Return, 7-8
Branch User Limits, 20-7 Cheque Status Inquiry, 18-2
Buy Cash from Currency Chest, 3-11 Cheque Withdrawal, 4-11
Buy Cash from Till, 3-17 Clear Cache, 17-1
Buy Cash from Vault, 3-14 Clearing Network, 20-48
Buy TC from Agent, 3-2 Close Branch Batch, 2-20
Buy TC from Head Office, 3-4 Close Out Withdrawal, 4-28
Buy TC from Vault, 3-5 Close Out Withdrawal by Multi Mode, 4-35

Index-1
 Index

Close Teller Batch, 2-14 Frequent Customer Operations, 19-4

Close Vault Batch, 2-18 Frequent Links, 19-9
Create Charge Pricing Maintenance, 20-38 Function Code Definition, 20-11
Credit Card Advance by Cash, 10-1 Function Code Preferences, 20-15
Credit Card Advance by Transfer, 10-4 FX Purchase Against Account, 4-21
Credit Card Payment by Account, 10-10 FX Purchase Against Walk-in, 4-25
Credit Card Payment by Cash, 10-7 FX Purchase Against Walk-in (Teller Session),
Credit Card Payment by Cheque, 10-13 14-5
Current Open Tills, 2-8 FX Sale Against Account, 4-14
Current Till Position, 19-3 FX Sale Against Walk-in, 4-18
Customer Address Update, 18-18 FX Sale Against Walk-in (Teller Session), 14-4
Customer Contact Update, 18-21
Customer Group Maintenance, 20-34
Customer Search, 19-3
I
Customer Service Request, 19-5 In-House Cheque Deposit, 6-5
Instrument Number Maintenance, 20-25
D Inter Branch Transaction Input, 3-24
Inter Branch Transaction Liquidation, 3-26
DD Issue Against Account, 8-54 Inter Branch Transaction Request, 3-22
DD Issue Against GL, 8-61 Inter Branch Transit Account Maintenance, 20-26
DD Issue Against Walk-in, 8-58 International Transfer Against Account, 6-14
DD Operations - Cancel by Account, 8-91 International Transfer Against Walk-in, 6-21
DD Operations - Cancel by Cash, 8-94 Inventory in Hand, 19-2
DD Operations - Cancel by GL, 8-96 Inward Clearing Data Entry, 7-10
DD Operations - Duplicate Issue, 8-72 Inward Remittance Registration, 8-139
DD Operations - Inquiry, 8-67 Islamic Down Payment by Cash, 12-4
DD Operations - Payment by Account, 8-76 Islamic TD Account Opening, 12-6
DD Operations - Payment by Cash, 8-79 Issuer Code Maintenance, 20-52
DD Operations - Payment by GL, 8-81
DD Operations - Payment Reversal, 8-74
DD Operations - Refund by Account, 8-84
L
DD Operations - Refund by Cash, 8-86 Loan Disbursement by Cash, 11-1
DD Operations - Refund by GL, 8-89 Loan Repayment by Cash, 11-3
DD Operations - Revalidate, 8-70 Loan Repayment by Cash (Teller Session), 14-7
DD Print-Reprint, 8-65
Default Authorizer Maintenance, 20-21
Denomination Exchange, 3-20 M
Denomination Variation Maintenance, 20-50 Miscellaneous Customer Credit, 5-4
Denominations Maintenance, 20-9 Miscellaneous Customer Debit, 5-1
Domestic Transfer Against Account, 6-8 Miscellaneous GL Credit, 5-10
Domestic Transfer Against Walk-in, 6-12 Miscellaneous GL Debit, 5-8
Miscellaneous GL Transfer, 5-13
E Miscellaneous Transfer, 5-16
Multi BC Issuance - Account, 8-47
Electronic Journal, 15-3 Multi BC Issuance - Cash, 8-50
External Bank Code, 20-51 Murabaha Payment by Cash, 12-1
External System Maintenance, 20-28 My Transaction Status, 19-2

F N
F23 Tax Payment by Account, 4-64 Notifications, 19-5
F23C Tax Payment by Cash, 4-43
F24 Tax Payment By Account, 4-69
F24C Tax Payment By Cash, 4-47
Frequent Branch Operations, 19-4

Index-2
 Index

O Start Teller Session, 2-26

Stop Card Request, 10-16
Open Branch Batch, 2-3 Stop Cheque Request, 18-3
Open Teller Batch, 2-6 Stop Teller Session, 2-28
Open Vault Batch, 2-4
Outward Clearing Data Entry, 7-13
T
P TC Denomination Enquiry, 2-2
TC Purchase Against Account, 8-150
Passbook Issue, 18-6 TC Purchase Against Walk-in, 8-155
Passbook Reprint, 18-11 TC Sale Against Walk-in, 8-147
Passbook Status Change, 18-10 TC Sale by Other Modes, 8-142
Passbook Update, 18-8 TD Account Opening, 9-1
TD Redemption Against Account, 9-14
TD Redemption Against Cash, 9-11
R TD Top-Up Against Account, 9-17
Reassign Transactions, 15-11 TD Top-Up Against Cash, 9-19
Recurring Deposit Payment by Cash, 4-41 Teller Branch Parameters Maintenance, 20-3
Reject Code Maintenance, 20-47 Teller Service Counters Prediction, 16-1
Return TC to HO, 3-10 Till Cash Position, 19-2
Return TC to Vault, 3-8 Till Vault Position, 2-11

S U
Safe Deposit Rental By Cash, 4-38 Utility Provider Maintenance, 20-53
Sell Cash to Currency Chest, 3-13
Sell Cash to Till, 3-18 V
Sell Cash to Vault, 3-15
Servicing Journal, 15-7 View Charge Pricing Maintenance, 20-40
Settlements Definition, 20-22

Index-3